· web viewcopyright reserve. the copyright in this manual vests exclusively with the titan...

USER GUIDE

COPYRIGHT RESERVE

The Copyright in this manual vests exclusively with The Titan Trust. All rights are reserved. No part of the manual may be modified, added to, reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrievable system or translated into any language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, in whole or in part, without the prior consent of The Titan Trust. Any unauthorised use of this manual, in whole or in part, will result in legal action being taken against such user.

DISCLAIMER

The Titan Trust hereby disclaims any and all guarantees and warranties on this manual or on the documentation relating to or backing up this manual (“the documentation”), and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of the merchantability or fitness of this manual or the documentation for any particular purpose. This manual and documentation are sold on an “as is” basis; any user of this manual or the documentation uses it entirely at his own risk.

The Titan Trust reserves the right to revise the publication and to make changes from time to time in this manual and the documentation.

The Trademark in the name “Titan” is registered in the name of The Titan Trust. Any unauthorised use of the name “Titan” will result in legal action being taken against such user.

OTHER TRADEMARKS

- ACUCOBOL is a registered trademark of ACUCORP Inc.

- Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their holders.

USER GUIDE

CONTENTS

SALES ORDER PROCESSING SYSTEM

1. GETTING STARTED....................................................................................11.1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL......................................................................................11.2 THE TITAN SYSTEM PROFILE...................................................................................11.3 SALES ORDER PROCESSING....................................................................................31.4 CONCEPTS AND FUNCTIONS....................................................................................71.5 THE SALES ORDER PROCESSING SYSTEM MENU.................................................8

2. SET-UP AND RUN.....................................................................................102.1 SETTING UP THE SYSTEM......................................................................................102.2 SYSTEM PARAMETER MAINTENANCE - SP00........................................................142.3 FINANCIALS - SP01...................................................................................................652.4 PROCESSING & BACKUP CYCLES..........................................................................662.5 PERIOD-END MODULE.............................................................................................672.6 PERIOD-END SEQUENCE........................................................................................68

2.6.1 DAILY PROCEDURES......................................................................................682.6.2 MONTH-END- PROCEDURES..........................................................................68

2.7 UPDATE ORDERS WITH SUPERSESSIONS - SP90.................................................692.8 UPDATE ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE & SALES ANALYSIS - SP91............................712.9 CASH UP - SP92........................................................................................................752.10 CONSOLIDATION OF BACK ORDERS - SP93.................................................792.11 DELETION OF ORDER HISTORY - SP94.........................................................822.12 DELETION OF ORDERS - SP95.......................................................................832.13 INVOICE HISTORY TRANSACTION DELETION - SP96...................................842.14 DELETE EXPIRED TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS - SP97...........................872.15 DELIVERY ADDRESS CHANGES CLEARDOWN - SP98....................................882.16 CLEAR INVOICE ANALYSIS FILE - SP99.........................................................89

3. INPUT MODULE........................................................................................903.1 THE INPUT MODULE MENU.....................................................................................903.2 SUPERVISOR ORDER REVIEW - SP09....................................................................933.3 ORDER ENTRY - SP10..............................................................................................953.4 ORDER REVIEW - SP11..........................................................................................1183.5 PICKING LIST PRINT - SP12...................................................................................1203.6 INPUT PICKED DETAILS - SP13.............................................................................1223.7 ORDER RELEASE - SP14........................................................................................1273.8 BATCH INVOICE ENTRY - SP15.............................................................................1303.9 DEMAND INVOICE ENTRY - SP16..........................................................................1323.10 BATCH CREDIT NOTE ENTRY - SP17...........................................................135

SP - Getting Started JULY 2006 1 - 1

3.11 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE ENTRY - SP171..................................................1373.12 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE - SP172..............................................1383.13 DEMAND CREDIT NOTE - SP18.....................................................................1393.14 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE & PRINT - SP182...............................1413.15 DEMAND ORDER INPUT - SP19....................................................................1423.16 BRANCH ORDER ENTRY PROGRAMS..........................................................144

3.16.1 BRANCH ORDER ENTRY - SP20...................................................................1453.16.2 BRANCH ORDER REVIEW - SP21.................................................................1463.16.3 REVERSE A TRANSFER OUT - SP22............................................................1473.16.4 PRINT IN TRANSIT INFO - SP23....................................................................1483.16.5 BRANCH ORDER RELEASE - SP24...............................................................1503.16.6 BRANCH ORDER TO ORDER - SP25.............................................................1523.16.7 RECEIVE INTER BRANCH TRANSFERS - SP26............................................1533.16.8 INTER-BRANCH STOCK BALANCING - SP27................................................1543.16.9 Branch DEL. NOTE PRINT AND RELEASE - SP28...........................................156

3.17 BATCH ORDER UPDATE - SP40....................................................................1573.18 BACK ORDERS TO PURCHASE ORDERS - SP41.........................................1583.19 FLAT FILE TAKE-ON FOR SP32 - SP42.........................................................1593.20 BATCH INVOICE UPDATE - SP45..................................................................160

4. MAINTENANCE MODULE.......................................................................1634.1 THE MAINTENANCE MODULE MENU.....................................................................1634.2 INVOICE MAINTENANCE - SP30.............................................................................1644.3 DELIVERY ADDRESS MAINTENANCE - SP31........................................................165

4.3.1 ADDING DELIVERY ADDRESSES..................................................................1664.3.2 AMENDING DELIVERY ADDRESSES.............................................................1684.3.3 DELETING DELIVERY ADDRESSES..............................................................168

4.4 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX - SP32.........................................................................1694.4.1 PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISCOUNT...............................................................1704.4.2 PRODUCT QUANTITY DISCOUNT.................................................................1734.4.3 VALUE DISCOUNT.........................................................................................1754.4.4 OVERALL DISCOUNT.....................................................................................1774.4.5 TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS....................................................................1794.4.6 PRICE MATRIX...............................................................................................1824.4.7 QUANTITY PRICING.......................................................................................184

4.5 ALTERNATE SEQUENCE MAINTENANCE - SP33..................................................1864.6 CREATE STANDING ORDERS - SP34....................................................................1934.7 REVIEW STANDING ORDERS - SP35.....................................................................1994.8 RELEASE STANDING ORDERS - SP36..................................................................2004.9 COPY STANDING ORDER TO ORDER - SP37.......................................................2024.10 STANDING ORDER PRINT - SP38.................................................................2044.11 DELETION OF STANDING ORDERS - SP39..................................................207

1 - 2 JULY 2006 Sales Order Processing - User Guide

USER GUIDE

5. ENQUIRY MODULE.................................................................................2085.1 THE ENQUIRY MODULE MENU..............................................................................2085.2 ORDER ENQUIRY - SP50........................................................................................2095.3 ORDER ENQUIRY - HISTORY - SP501.....................................................................2115.4 DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN - SP51........................................................................2125.5 ORDERS SCAN - SP52............................................................................................2135.6 DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN - SP53........................................................................2205.7 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SCAN - SP56...............................................................2215.8 INVOICE ENQUIRY - SP57......................................................................................229

6. PRINT MODULE......................................................................................2306.1 THE PRINT MODULE MENU...................................................................................2306.2 INVOICE PRINT - SP70...........................................................................................2316.3 CREDIT NOTE PRINT - SP71..................................................................................2396.4 NON-STANDARD DISCOUNT/PRICE REPORT - SP72...........................................2466.5 CREDIT LIMIT/TERMS EXCEEDED REPORT - SP73..............................................2486.6 OUTSTANDING ORDERS REPORT - SP74.............................................................2506.7 UNRELEASED CREDIT NOTE REPORT - SP741....................................................2536.8 DELIVERY ADDRESS PRINT - SP75.......................................................................2546.9 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX PRINT - SP76..............................................................2566.10 CUSTOMER/GROUP PRICE LIST - SP761.....................................................2586.11 CUSTOMER ORDER PRINT - SP77...............................................................2606.12 DEMAND ORDER RELEASE - SP78...............................................................2666.13 ORDER ANALYSIS - SP79..............................................................................2706.14 INVOICE PRINT FROM HISTORY - SP80.......................................................2746.15 CREDIT NOTE PRINT FROM HISTORY - SP81.............................................2756.16 LABEL AND MANIFEST - SP82.......................................................................2766.17 RELEASE PICKED QUANTITY AND PRINT DELIVERY NOTE - SP83...........2786.18 RELEASE DELIVERED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE - SP84............................2796.19 RELEASE DELIVERED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE - SP85............................2806.20 CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE - SP86..............2816.21 CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE - SP87..............2826.22 DELIVERY ADDRESS CHANGES PRINT - SP88............................................2836.23 DISCOUNT/PRICE CHANGES PRINT - SP89.................................................284

7. BACK ORDER MODULE.........................................................................2857.1 BACK ORDER MODULE MENU...............................................................................2857.2 BACK ORDER DELETE OR AMEND - SP61............................................................2867.3 NARRATIVE COPY PROGRAM - SP62...................................................................2897.4 BACK ORDER REPORT - SP67...............................................................................2907.5 BACK ORDER RELEASE - SP69.............................................................................294


APPENDIX A...................................................................................................298A.1. ORDER AVAILABILITY/MESSAGE SYSTEM...........................................................298A.2 ORDER ANALYSIS...................................................................................................300A.3 SUPERSESSIONS....................................................................................................303A.4 POINT-OF SALE.......................................................................................................307A.5. AUTO ORDERING FOR BM COMPONENTS IN SP.................................................309A.6 SUSPENSE CREDIT NOTE FEATURE.....................................................................310

APPENDIX B...................................................................................................311B1. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE IV..............................................................................311B2. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE SP.............................................................................346B3. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE OA............................................................................378B4. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE SL.............................................................................391B5. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE..................................................................................404

INDEX..............................................................................................................420


USER GUIDE

1.GETTING STARTED

1.1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUALEach chapter in this manual leads logically through the important steps to install and maintain your system.

Chapter 1 - Getting Started, describes the hard/software requirements and special features of the TITAN systems.

Chapter 2 - Set-up and Run will take you through the sequential steps required to run the program effectively. As each program has a System Parameter File Program (SU00, AP00 etc.) and usually a Period End Module (SU9, AP9 etc.) these are combined in this chapter to ensure all the set-up data is understood.

The following chapters are the same for most systems. They start with the Input Module, then the Maintenance Module which helps you set up and maintain your file requirements. Then the Enquiry Module which helps you search for data in your files. After that specific modules such as Report Management, Interface to Other Systems will follow. The last chapter deals with the printing of reports.

If there are specific examples required these are entered in the Appendix. The Index provides a reference to the actual screen prompts as well as key words.

Screens are provided as a guide to the fields to be entered. Each screen prompt will be indented and bold with the field length and further information on that field for example,

BATCH # : 6 digitsWhen entering a new batch, press [Enter] for the next sequential batch number.

When information is accepted and another screen appears this will be shown in the manual as Level 1, Level 2 and so on.

When multiple choices appear and these have to be described individually, the first level will be the major input screen.

1.2 THE TITAN SYSTEM PROFILEPlease refer to the Systems Utilities Manual for a profile of the TITAN system, which consists of the following modules:

Application Builder Accounts Payable

Accounts Receivable Bank Link

Bill of Materials Cashbook

Chart Writer Electronic Data Interchange

Fixed Assets General Ledger

Instalment Sales Inventory Control

Job Costing Monthly Payroll


Purchase Ordering Point-of-Sale

Report Writer Sales Analysis

Sales Order Processing Systems Utilities

Weekly Payroll


USER GUIDE

1.3 SALES ORDER PROCESSINGThe Sales Order Processing integrates with the Inventory, Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis systems to form an integrated solution to invoicing requirements.

The system may be integrated further with the addition of the General Ledger system to become a fully integrated distribution and financial package.

The Sales Order Processing will achieve the following results;

Eliminate repetitive manual billing tasks, such as writing or typing out invoices, looking-up prices and discounts, extending prices, etc.

Eliminate losses caused through incorrect pricing, discounts and extensions.

Reduce bad debt risk by only supplying goods and services to authorised, credit worthy customers.

Increase the level of client service.

Provide simultaneous capture of vital customer, inventory and sales analysis transaction information for use in these systems.

Provide multiple billing methods, for example on-line order entry, demand (cash sale) invoices, batch and inter-branch/warehouse invoicing.

SYSTEM FEATURES

On-line order entry, demand or batch invoicing User-defined order of entryThrough the use of 'jump tables', it is possible to define the order in which data is entered into the system. This facility displays all standard information, while automatically placing the cursor at the first position where the entry of new data is required.

Customer credit checkingCustomer credit worthiness is checked before, during and after order/invoice entry.

Supervisor password protectionCredit limits, prices and discounts may be supervisor-password protected.

Product statusDuring order entry a product status is advised, for example on hand, allocated, reserved, on back-order or on order and the lead time.

Non-stock and narrative invoicingCharges for buy-out items and services are provided for within the invoicing process. These options may also be protected by passwords.

Instalment Customer invoicingCustomers purchasing on budget accounts can be invoiced across a number of instalments.


Automatic or manual numberingThe method of invoice numbering can be user-defined, either system generated or manually entered.

Multiple pricesThe system will pre-select prices according to a pricing matrix available, or accept manual or alternative pricing input.

Multiple discountsDiscounts are supplied by the Inventory and Accounts Receivable files and may be changed if required at input time.

Discount matrixStandard discount rates can be set up within the system. This enables automatic generation of discounts by customer, type of customer, product, quantity, time-dependent or overall value.

Multiple delivery addressesEach customer may have multiple delivery addresses which can be selected during order entry.

Financial Exception ReportingAll customers who exceed their credit limits/terms during order entry or invoicing are reported.

Any discount and price entered or selected that is not standard for a customer, is listed in this report for control purposes.

Order enquiriesOrders on file may be viewed in any of the following sequences; by order number, customer number, due date, customer order number, product number or warehouse/bin number sequence.

Unit of issueAll quantities are shown in the unit of issue - but with full access to unit of purchase and unit of hold.

Extensive order status reporting Lost order report


USER GUIDE

MODULE REVIEWThe Sales Order Processing system has the following functional modules, each comprising a number of programs. They are ; Input, Transfer, Maintenance, Interface, Enquiries/Scans, Print and Period-End.

INPUT MODULE

Use this to perform the following functions;

On-line order entry with order review, amendment, cancellation and release facilities.

Input of picked items and the printing of a picking list.

Demand (Cash sale) invoicing for immediate invoice production.

Batch invoicing to cater for delivery note and second stage order input.

Credit note entry.

Demand order or invoice/credit note input with immediate print.

TRANSFER MODULE

Use this module for on-line entry of inter-branch or inter-warehouse transfers, with review, amendment, cancellation, release and printing facilities.

MAINTENANCE MODULE

Use this module for delivery address and discount matrix maintenance. These programs allow customer delivery addresses and customer discounts to be added, amended and deleted.

The standing order programs also form part of this module.

INTERFACE MODULE

Use this module to 'take-on' orders or invoices into the Sales Order Processing cycle which have been produced remotely, off-site.

ENQUIRIES / SCAN MODULE

Use this module to view the orders file; by order number, customer, delivery date, customer order number, bin location or product sequence. The delivery address and discount files may also be scanned.


PRINT MODULE

All the programs in this module are exception-based, using a series of prompts to select the range of data for printing.

Invoice and credit note print

Financial Exception reporting

Order status reporting

Delivery address print

Discount file print

Order print

Order release and print

PERIOD-END MODULE

This module is used at period- and year-end to update the Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis files.


USER GUIDE

1.4 CONCEPTS AND FUNCTIONSPlease refer to the Systems Utilities Manual for a complete explanation of the concepts and functions used throughout the TITAN system.


1.5 THE SALES ORDER PROCESSING SYSTEM MENUTo select the system from the main menu, enter SP. The following modules and programs form part of the Sales Order Processing system.

TITAN SALES ORDER PROCESSING MENUSP1 - INPUT MODULE

SP09 SUPERVISOR ORDER REVIEW

SP16 DEMAND INVOICE ENTRY

SP10 ORDER ENTRY SP17 CREDIT NOTE ENTRYSP11 ORDER REVIEW SP171 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE ENTRYSP12 PICKING LIST PRINT SP172 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASESP13 INPUT PICKED DETAILS SP18 DEMAND CREDIT NOTE ENTRYSP14 ORDER RELEASE SP182 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE &

PRINTSP15 BATCH INVOICE ENTRY SP19 DEMAND ORDER ENTRY

SP2 - TRANSFER MODULESP20 BRANCH ORDER ENTRY SP25 BRANCH ORDER TO ORDERSP21 BRANCH ORDER REVIEW SP26 RECEIVE INTER-BRANCH TRANSFERSSP22 SP27 INTER-BRANCH STOCK BALANCINGSP23 PRINT IN TRANSIT INFO SP28 BRANCH DEL NOTE PRINT AND RELEASESP24 BRANCH ORDER RELEASE

SP3 - MAINTENANCE MODULESP30 INVOICE MAINTENANCE SP35 REVIEW STANDING ORDERSSP31 DELIVERY ADDRESS SP36 RELEASE STANDING ORDERSSP32 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP37 COPY STANDING ORDER TO ORDERSP33 ALTERNATE SEQUENCE SP38 STANDING ORDER PRINTSP34 CREATE STANDING

ORDERSSP39 DELETION OF STANDING ORDERS

SP4 - INTERFACE MODULESP40 BATCH ORDER CAPTURE SP45 BATCH INVOICE CAPTURESP41 BACK ORDERS TO

PURCHASE ORDERSSP5 - ENQUIRY/SCAN MODULE

SP50 ORDER ENQUIRY SP53 DELIVERY ADDRESS SCANSP501 ORDER ENQUIRY -

HISTORY SP56 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SCAN

SP51 DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN

SP57 INVOICE ENQUIRY

SP52 ORDERS SCANSP6 - BACK ORDER MODULE

SP61 BACK ORDER DELETE OR AMEND

SP67 BACK ORDER REPORT

SP62 NARRATIVE COPY PROGRAM

SP69 BACK ORDER RELEASE


USER GUIDE

SP7 - PRINT MODULESP70 INVOICE FORM PRINT SP80 INVOICE PRINT FROM HISTORYSP71 CREDIT NOTE FORM

PRINTSP81 CREDIT NOTE FROM HISTORY

SP72 EXCEPTION REPORTS SP82 LABEL AND MANIFESTSP73 CREDIT LIMIT/TERMS

EXCEEDEDSP83 RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT DEL

NOTESP74 OUTSTANDING ORDERS

REPORTSP84 RELEASE DELIVERED QUANTITIES TO

INVOICESP741 UNRELEASED CREDIT

NOTE REPORTSP85 RELEASE DELIVERED QUANTITY AND

PRINT INVOICESP75 DELIVERY ADDRESS

PRINTSP86 CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QTY AND

PRINT INVOICESP76 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX

PRINTSP87 CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED

QUANTITIES TO PRINTSP77 ORDER & DELIVERY NOTE

PRINTSP88 DELIVERY ADDRESSES CHANGES PRINT

SP78 RELEASE PICKED QUANTITY AND PRINT INVOICE

SP89 DISCOUNT/PRICE CHANGES PRINT

SP79 ORDER/SALES ANALYSISSP9 - PERIOD-END MODULE

SP90 UPDATE ORDERS WITH SUPERSESSIONS

SP95 DELETION OF ORDERS

SP91 INTERFACE TO AR AND SA

SP96 INVOICE HISTORY DELETION

SP92 CASH UP SP97 DELETE EXPIRED TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS

SP93 CONSOLIDATION OF BACK ORDERS

SP98 DELIVERY ADDRESS CHANGES CLEARDOWN

SP94 DELETION OF ORDER HISTORY

SP99 CLEAR INVOICE ANALYSIS FILE

As you can see these modules are organised into functional groups, for example SP1 - Input Module contains all the programs that are concerned with data input.

The menu system has pre-loaded the SP mnemonic and all that is required is to enter the relevant module number, for example 1 for the input module.

Enter [M] to select the main menu.


2.SET-UP AND RUN

2.1 SETTING UP THE SYSTEMThis section sets out the sequence of procedures that must be followed for setting up the Sales Order Processing system.

Some of the programs are contained in this system while others, which are common to most programs, will be found in the Utilities System.

Sales Order Processing system program numbers are preceded by SP. System Utilities programs are preceded by SU.

Should any difficulty be encountered during this set up procedure please contact the Dealer or Distributor immediately.

After installing the system please follow this SET UP procedure.STEP PROGRAM FUNCTION AND PROCEDURE1. Both the Accounts Receivable and the Inventory system must be set up.

Please refer to these User Guides for detailed instructions.2. SP00

MandatoryThe System Record Maintenance program contains various essential parameters that are used by the Sales Order Processing System (refer to Part 2 - Set-up and run - section 2.1.2 of this guide for details.

3. SU30Mandatory

The Installation Maintenance program Option 4 must be called up and the user defined terminology fields must have the correct terminology for the following:Field 1 : 'Post Code'Field 2 : 'Reference'Some people prefer, for instance, to use 'ZIP CODE'.You may also change option 4 in the Accounts Receivable system. If you enter your own terminology for ‘Salesman’, then the first 3 characters will be used on the Order/invoicing header screen.Field 3 to 5 are optional an are for use in the body of the invoice.

4. SU31 The Descriptions File Maintenance program is used to set up the descriptions required by Sales Order Processing. Description file data must be entered for the following description types if these options are to be used;

DIOptional

Delivery instructions.Enter and define the delivery instructions to be used in the Orders/Invoicing programs, for example; 0010 By rail, 0020 By truck, etc.

D1 - D7Optional

Shipping details codes 1 - 7.

DS Discount reference.


USER GUIDE

STEP PROGRAM FUNCTION AND PROCEDUREOptional Enter and define the discount reference to be used on

Orders/Invoicing programs.PM

Optional Payment method.Enter and define the methods of payment to be used, for example; 0001 - Cash on Delivery, 0002 - On account, etc.Also set up references for alternate range of invoice numbers per payment method (optional).In addition if you wish cash payments to be rounded down to the nearest 5 cents, you will have to add .05 on all cash type codes. SP10/SP14 will then do the rounding and add the difference to the discount.

RCOptional

Route code.Enter and define the route codes to be used, for example; 1000 - Southern suburbs, 2000 - Northern suburbs, etc.

SCOptional

Sundry charges.Enter and define the standard sundry charges to be included on the invoices and orders, and how the charge is to be calculated for example; 0200 - Railage, 0300 - Postage, etc.You must also specify whether the calculated values are inclusive or exclusive of VAT

S1Optional

Sales Analysis code 1.Enter and define the first user-defined Sales Analysis code to be used in conjunction with the Sales Analysis system, for example; SS01 - Local sales, SS02 - Foreign sales, etc.

S2Optional

Sales Analysis code 2.Enter and define the second user-defined sales analysis code to be used in conjunction with the Sales Analysis system and set up overrides and set messages to be ignored.NOTEThis may also be used to identify an operator. If the option is selected in program SP00 - System Record Maintenance, the first four characters of the USER NAME will be defaulted to the operator field.

5. SU32Mandatory

The Numbers File Maintenance program will set up and maintain the Sales Order Processing audit numbers in the system.Enter the next credit note number under reference code 'C', the next invoice number under reference code 'I' and the next order number '0'. If interfacing from the Job Costing system enter the next Job Costing invoice under 'i', and the next credit note under 'c'.

SP - Set-up and Run JULY 2006 2 - 11

STEP PROGRAM FUNCTION AND PROCEDURESP20 - Branch Order Entry uses type ‘n’ for orders.

1 to 9 These references are optional and you need only complete them if you specified in program SU31 - Description Type Maintenance, type [PM], that you wish to have alternate invoice ranges by Payment Method.

C For the next credit note number.I For the next invoice number.N For the next delivery note number.O For the next order number.T For the next temporary stock number.c For the next Job Costing credit note number if you are

interfacing from the Job Costing system.i For the next Job Costing invoice number if you are interfacing

from the Job Costing system.If Clients want to identify which invoices are from orders, which direct and which from JC costing.

To solve this we will be using the following SU32 references:

JC13 - "i" or "c"

SP15 - "i" or "c"

SP10 - "o" - this will be retained as inv no. If SP00 is set to use order# as inv#

NB: the user 'must' separate the ranges within the three different series otherwise duplicates can occur. When a duplicate invoice is detected the system will append lines to the original invoice.6. SU33

OptionalThe Narrative File Maintenance program maintains a general narrative file which is described in more detail in Appendix A1.

7. SU35Mandatory

The Customised Forms Maintenance program will set up and maintain the invoice/credit note print layout.Set up the invoice layout (form type IV), and the order confirmation/picking note (form type SP). Please refer to Appendix B for further information.

8. SU71 The Description File Print program prints the details entered into the descriptions file.Check the report against the data entered. Correct any errors using program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance.

9. SU38Mandatory

The Password Maintenance program is used to set up and maintain user names and access permission for all programs in the system.Use the "Super User" logon (SYSADMIN) to gain access to this program.Protect all programs with passwords and ensure that the "Super User" (SYSADMIN) is given password protection.

10. SP31Optional

The Delivery Address Maintenance program allows you to enter up to 9999 different delivery addresses per customer.

11. SP32Optional

The Discount/Price Matrix program allows you to define various levels of discount. It also has a separate function which allows


USER GUIDE

STEP PROGRAM FUNCTION AND PROCEDUREyou to enter a selling price matrix.

12. SP33Optional

The Alternate Sequence Maintenance program is used on the Back Order system SP6

As the system is a multi-company and multi-branch system, this sequence of SET UP procedures needs to be repeated for each company/branch combination to be used.


2.2 SYSTEM PARAMETER MAINTENANCE - SP00The program is used to set up and maintain the following system parameters;

Pricing and discount rules.

Picking note variables and rules for entry of picked details.

Invoice/order printing and update rules

Jump tables

Supervisor password rules.

Totals of sales since the last update to Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis.

Enter SP00 to select the program.

Press [F3] to save the parameters once they have been completed.

On all screens there is an F4 - COPY facility which allows you to copy all the details entered from the currently selected Company and Branch to a different Company/Branch combination. If details exist, you will be warned but will be able to continue if required.

The Report Destination, Company/Branch/Warehouse combination and Report date may be optionally selected. Please see the GETTING STARTED section at the beginning of this chapter.

The following details are available for data input;

Level 1

COMPANY/BRANCH : 2 digits/2 digitFor example 01/01.


USER GUIDE

SELECTION OF SP SCREENS

The SP00 - System Record Maintenance screen now allows you to select the screen you require by using the [F5] key. The screen will display as shown below.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 10/033CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CCBR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH SELECT SCREEN [ 1] 1 - SP10/15/16/17/18 VARIABLES 2 - SP10/15/16/17/18 CONT. 3 - SP10/15/16/17/18 CONT. 4 - SP10/30 REFERENCES 5 - SP12 VARIABLES 6 - SP13 VARIABLES 7 - SP14/24 VARIABLES 8 - SP40/41/45, SP6 VARIABLES 9 - SP70/77/78 VARIABLES 10 - SP78, SP91/92/93 VARIABLES 11 - BLANK CODES & MESSAGE OPTIONS 12 - ORDER/INVOICE HEADER JUMP TABLE 13 - CREDIT NOTE HEADER JUMP TABLE 14 - SUPERVISOR PASSWORDS 15 - PRODUCT JUMP TABLE 16 - NON-STOCK/NARRATIVE ITEM JUMP TABLE 17 - JC19 ITEM JUMP TABLE 18 - TOTALS SCREEN F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT

Enter the number of the screen with which you wish to work. The system will take you directly to that screen, instead of you having to step through all the screens until you arrive at the one you need.


SCREEN 1

SP10/15/16/17/18 VARIABLES

NO. OF STD. PRICES : 2 digitsWhen entering orders or invoices the [F1] key allows the next price to be selected. No prices beyond the value entered here will be available. The maximum is five.

NO. OF STD. : 2 digitsWhen entering orders or invoices the [F1] key allows the next discount to be selected. No discount beyond the value entered here will be available. The maximum is ten.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP10/15/16/17/18 VARIABLESNO. OF STD. PRICES [ 5]NO. OF STD. DISCOUNTS [10]LINE NUMBER INCREMENT [01]AUTO OPTION ON EXCEEDED'S [ ] SP10 1-BO PART 2-BO WHOLE 3-CANCEL"N" FOR OPTIONS NOT ALLOWED [ ] 4-OVERRIDE 5-NO STOCK 6-ALT.STK.NO. OF OVERALL DISCOUNTS [10]DISC. BY GROUP OR CATEGORY [C] OR USER CODE 1 2 3 4DISC. CODE BY GROUP OR CATG [ ] OR USER CODE 1 2 3 4EXT. DESC. IN SCAN? (Y/N) [N]INVOICE NUMBERING (M/A/S/W) [A] ORDER NUMBERING (M/A/S/W)[A]USE ORDER# AS INVOICE# [N]APPEND ORDER# TO REF# POS = [0] POSITION 0 - NO APPEND; ACCESS [8] CHARACTERS INV OR DEL DATE ON IV/AR TRS[I] (D-DEL DATE; L – LATEST DEL DATE)STOCK OR CUSTOMER TAX CATG [4] 1-LOWEST 2-HIGHEST 3-STOCK 4-CUSTOMERCOST DISPLAY/ACCEPT [A] SP20 - PROTECT COST [P]DEFAULT SA#2 AS OPERATOR [N]DEFAULT SA#1 AS USER 1 2 3 4[ ] 5 – PRICE # 6- DEL#DEFAULT SA#2 AS USER 1 2 3 4[2]F1-NEXT PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F4 - COPY, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR

LINE NUMBER INCREMENT : 2 digitsThis governs the increment of line numbers for orders and invoices and will allow you to insert additional lines by entering an ‘I’ on the line above which you wish to insert a line


USER GUIDE

AUTO OPTIONON EXCEEDED'S : 1 digit

This relates to program SP10 – Order Entry.When the quantity required for an order exceeds physical or free quantities, the option entered here will be enforced. If a space is entered you will be allowed to enter the required option at capture stage (depending on the settings in the field below).Options are;[1] Back order that part of the order that cannot be supplied.[2] Back order the whole order.[3] Cancel the line.[4] Override the "out of stock" warning, and supply the goods from previously allocated inventory.[5] Print an "out of stock" comment on the invoice.[6] Use an alternate product to fill the order.

SUPPLY FREE STOCK? : Y/NThis prompt will only be displayed if option [5] was selected above.If you enter [Y] the part of the ordered quantity that can be supplied, will be, and the rest will be written away as a lost order. This applies to programs SP10 - Order Entry, SP15 - Batch Invoice Entry, SP16 - Demand Invoice Entry as well as SP40 - Batch Order Capture. This may then be printed on program SP72 - Exception Reports option 7. If [N], nothing will be supplied and the full amount will be written away as a lost order and may then be printed on SP72 - Exception Reports option 3.

"N" FOR OPTIONS NOT ALLOWED : This field is only used if the 'AUTO OPTION ON

EXCEEDS' was left blank. [N] in any of the six positions will indicate that this option will not be available to an operator at entry stage.

NO. OF OVERALL DISCOUNTS : 2 digits

When entering orders or invoices the [F1] key allows the next overall discount to be selected. No discount beyond the value entered here will be available. The maximum is ten.


DISC. BY GROUP OR CATEGORY : 1 digit

Discount for inventory in SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix is optional by Product Group, Sales Category or User Code 1 to 4. Enter either [C], [G] or 1 to 4 depending on your requirement

DISC. CODE BY GROUP OR CATG : 1 digit

Discount codes for inventory in SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix is optional by Product Group, Sales Category or User Code 1 to 4. Enter either [C], [G] or 1 to 4 depending on your requirement.

EXT. DESC. IN SCAN? : Y/NIf [Y] the scan on order or invoice capture screens will display two lines per item in order to show the extended description. (Thus fewer lines will be displayed per screen of information). Enter [N] if you do not need this facility.

INVOICE NUMBERING (M/A/S/W) : 1 character

[M] Enter invoice/credit note numbers manually.[A] System will automatically allocate sequential invoice/credit note numbers.[S] Semi-automatic. The operator will enter the first document number in a batch and the system will number the rest of the documents sequentially from that number.[W] Invoice and Credit note numbering will be by warehouse. If you select this option then you will have to set the next invoice/credit note number per warehouse in SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance.

ORDER NUMBERING (M/A/S/W) : 1 character

[M] Enter order numbers manually.[A] System will automatically allocate sequential order numbers.[S] Semi-automatic. The operator will enter the first document number in a batch and the system will number the rest of the documents sequentially from that number.[W] Order numbering will be by warehouse. If you select this option then you will have to set the next invoice/credit note number per warehouse in SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance.


USER GUIDE

USE ORDER # AS INVOICE # : Y/N

If [Y] is entered it will force the order and its subsequent invoice number to be the same. Care should be taken when using this option as partially released orders may result in duplicate invoice numbers.

APPEND ORDER# TO REF# POS = : 1 character

The system can optionally automatically place the order number into the reference from a given starting position.Enter the starting position of the order number within the reference. If 0 (zero) is entered then the reference number is not overwritten. Example: The reference is entered as "L", the starting position is given as 3 and the order no. is 000789. The reference will be "L 000789".SP10 - Order Entry and SP69 - Back Order Release use this option when creating new order items.

ACCESS : 1 characterYou may enter the number of additional characters you wish to enter for the above reference

Please note, that the system will NOT append the order number if the space allocated for it is not blank. In other words, if you have entered anything in this field, the system will NOT append the order number.

INV OR DEL DATE ON IV/AR TRS : 1 character

[I] , [D] , [L] or [G]Only one date is held on each stock/debtors transaction. Select the appropriate date for your organisation.If you select [I], the invoice date will be used when writing to the stock or debtors transaction file.If you select [D], the delivery date entered on invoices and orders will overwrite the invoice date in all cases.If you select [L], the latest delivery date will be used. SP14 - Release Picked Quantity to Invoice will change the invoice date to the latest if this is set.If [G], you select to have this option by Debtors Group, you will have to specify the above selection (I, D, or L) in SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance, type DG for each debtors group on file.


STOCK OR CUSTOMER TAX CATG : 1 digit

[1] Lowest[2] Highest[3] Stock[4] CustomerThese options indicate which tax rate is to be used as the default when capturing orders and invoices.

COST DISPLAY/ACCEPT : 1 character[D] will display two costs. The cost of the sale, the cost of purchases and a GP%.[A] or [Y] will display the same figures but will allow the operator to change the cost of sale. (Only affects the sales analysis and will have no bearing on the cost held on the inventory file).[N] no costs will display.

SP20 - PROTECT COST : Blank or [P]If you enter a [P], then costs in program SP20 - Branch Order Entry will be ‘protected’. This means that they will not display at all and the operator will only see quantities.However, they will display for the “SYSADMIN” user or other users with a level 9 security.

DEFAULT SA #2 AS OPERATOR : Y/N.

If option is set to [Y], the first four characters of the user name will be used as sales analysis code 2 and will be validated against that description type. (Type S2 in SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance ).This will in addition, allow amendments to the order only by the operator who originally captured that order, with the exception of the "SYSADMIN" user who may amend any orders.

DEFAULT SA#1 AS USER 1 2 3 4 : 1 digit

You may have the system automatically insert the User code you select here into SA Code 1 on the Order/Invoice header. In this manner each item line may be analysed to a different code. In addition, if you enter [5], then the price code will be moved to this field and held for later analysis by price code and if you enter [6] delivery address code will be moved to this field for later analysis.


USER GUIDE

DEFAULT SA#2 AS USER 1 2 3 4 5 : 1 digit

You may have the system automatically insert the User code you select here into SA Code 2 on the Order/Invoice header. In this manner each item line may be analysed to a different code. In addition, if you enter [5], then the price code will be moved to this field and held for later analysis by price code and if you enter [6] delivery address code will be moved to this field for later analysis.

Please press [F1] for the rest of the screen data fields.

SCREEN 2SP10/15/16/17/18 VARIABLES - continued

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 11/021CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP10/15/16/17/18 VARIABLES - continuedALLOW TEMPORARY STOCK ITEMS? (Y/N) [Y]AUTOMATIC # FOR TEMPORARY STOCK FROM POSITION [00] 0 - NO NUMBER GENERATEDAUTOMATIC # PREFIX FOR TEMPORARY STOCK [ ]DEFAULT BIN LOC [ ]USER NAME AS DEFAULT TEMP STK INT-CODE? (Y/N) [N]AUTO ALLOCATE SUB-STOCK? (Y/N/R) [N] R - AT TIME OF RELEASESTOCK SALES BASED ON GROSS OR NET? [G]ALLOW 'O' TO SUPPRESS PRINT? [Y]DEFAULT NORMAL/PROFORMA/HOLD ( /P/H) [ ]CASH DRAWER - SU01 COMMAND # [00]CASH ACCOUNT NUMBER [ ] IBT ACC# [ ]DEFAULT QUANTITY TO 1 [N]CASH ANALYSIS? (Y/N) [Y]APPEND WH TO SALES CATEGORY [N]USE WH# AS REFERENCE# [N]DEFAULT STOCK REF# AS SOFT 3 4 5 [ ]USE WH# AS DEL ADD# PREFIX [N]B/O QTY AVAILABLE AS FREE [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-UPDATE, F4-COPY, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-CO/BR

ALLOW TEMPORARY STOCK ITEMS? : Y/N

If [Y] you will be able to order and invoice items not on file.

AUTOMATIC # FOR TEMPORARY STOCK FROM POSITION : 2 digits

[0] No number generatedIf a number is entered here a sequential stock number will be generated by the system starting from this point. For instance, if your stock code is 6 characters long and you specify [3] here, the system will generate a code [blank blank 0001] and [blank blank 0002] etc.


AUTOMATIC # PREFIX FOR TEMPORARY STOCK : 1 character

If you wish the generated number to be prefixed by a special character, enter that character here. For example, a [T] will result in a number [Tblank 0001] etc.

DEFAULT BIN LOCATION FOR TEMPORARY STOCK : 6 characters

If temporary items are to be allocated to a specified bin, enter that bin number here.

USER NAME AS DEFAULT TEMP STK INT-CODE? : Y/N

All items carry an internal code. If you wish the first 6 characters of the operator user name to be automatically written to this code, enter [Y] here.

AUTO ALLOCATE SUB-STOCK? (Y/N) : Y/N/R

If sub-stock is used and this option is set to [Y] the total quantity ordered for an item will automatically be allocated across all sub-stock containing enough free stock.If this option is [R], then serial numbers need not be allocated when capturing orders – the system will allocate these automatically when releasing orders to invoices.

STOCK SALES BASED ON GROSS OR NET? : [G] or [N]

Select the indicator for sales figures before or after discount has been taken.

ALLOW 'O' TO SUPPRESS PRINT? : Y/N

[Y] will allow you to enter 'O' at the end of order/invoice lines. This will have the effect of suppressing the printing of that line while still including its value in the total of the order/invoice.[N] will prevent you from doing this.


USER GUIDE

DEFAULT NORMAL/ PROFORMA/HOLD : Blank/P/H

This field is used as the default when capturing and reviewing orders in SP10 - Order Entry and SP11 - Order Review . This default is displayed but may be altered using the [F5] to toggle between NORMAL, PROFORMA or ON HOLD.SP13 - Input Picked Details does not allow quantities to be picked for PROFORMA invoices. When quantities are picked against orders ON HOLD these orders automatically change to NORMAL orders.SP14 - Order Release will skip all PROFORMA invoices and ON HOLD orders i.e. these will not be released.

CASH DRAWER -SU01 COMMAND # : 2 digits

If you use the Point-of-Sale features please enter the Operating System Command you used in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup, Option 5, which will open your Cash Drawer. For more details regarding Point-of-Sale please refer to Appendix A4 at the back of this manual.

CASH ACCOUNT NUMBER : 6 charactersIf you use the Point-of-Sale features you may enter a cash sale account number here. If you do so, the invoicing programs such as SP16 - Demand Invoice Entry will bypass the invoice header and immediately go to the detail lines when you enter this number.

IBT ACC# : 6 charactersThe customer number you enter here will be used as the default Inter-branch transfer account in SP20 - Branch Order Entry

DEFAULT QUANTITY TO 1 : Y/NIf you enter [Y], the invoicing programs will always automatically insert a quantity of 1 which you cannot change and proceed to the next line.

CASH ANALYSIS? (Y/N) : Y/NIf [Y] the system will accumulate tendered amounts by payment type for reporting on SP92 - Cash Up.


APPEND WH TO SALES CATG : Y/N

The Sales Categories on the Accounts Receivable system may be up to 4 characters long. These categories are linked to General Ledger codes which are subsequently used when interfacing from Accounts Receivable to the General Ledger.These Sales Categories are also held on individual inventory items. However, this is held at company level and must therefore be the same for all Company/Branch/Warehouse combinations. If you require the sales for each warehouse to be posted to its own category, enter [Y] in this position.You must then enter the Sales Categories in AR32 - Category File Maintenance with the last two digits representing the warehouse. For example -AA01 Sales Category AA for Warehouse 01.AA02 sales Category AA for Warehouse 02.You must also set up a code consisting only of 'AA'.On the stock item, you will only enter 'AA' (the first two characters of the Sales Category). The system will automatically append the warehouse number to the category at invoicing and ordering stages.

DEFAULT WH# AS REFERENCE# : Y/N

[Y] will automatically insert the warehouse number in the reference field when capturing orders and invoices. You may however change this.

USE WH# AS DEL ADD# PREFIX : Y/N

If you enter [Y], the system will automatically prefix the delivery address with the warehouse number, thus giving you 9999 delivery addresses per warehouse and not per branch.

DEFAULT STOCK REF# AS SOFT 3 4 5 : 1 digit

If you wish to capture any of the above soft terminology items in SP10 - Order Entry, you must select it on the jump table. If you enter the number here, that will be written to the stock reference number. If this field is blank, the header reference is used.

B/O QTY AVAILABLE AS FREE : Y/NIf you set this to [Y], then the system will include the back order quantity in the free stock calculation wherever it is used.


USER GUIDE

SCREEN 3SP10/15/16/17/18 VARIABLES - continued

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 11/012 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp10 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP10/15/16/17/18 VARIABLES - continued CHECK FOR DUPLICATE CUST ORD [U] W - WARNING U - UNIQUE CREATE P/O FOR B/O [Y] SP19 ONLY CREATE SP FOR BM COMPONENTS [Y]CREATE NARRATIVES FOR LONG DESC [Y] SU41 TYPE FOR WARD [XW] SU41 TYPE FOR FOLIO [XF] SU41 TYPE FOR BED [XG] ENTER WH PER LINE ITEM [Y] ORDER ANALYSIS (Y/N) [Y] CHECK FOR DUPL ORD# [Y] ALLOCATE STOCK (Y/N/O)? [N] EXPAND A BILL (Y/N)? [N]USE CURRENT DATE AS ORDER DATE IN SP11 (Y/N) [N] SP15 VARIABLES AUTO OPTION ON EXCEEDED'S [ ] SP15 1-BO PART 2-BO WHOLE 3-CANCEL "N" FOR OPTIONS NOT ALLOWED [NNYNNY] 4-OVERRIDE 5-NO STOCK 6-ALT.STK. RETAIN PAYMENT METHOD ON B/O [N] F1-NEXT PAGE, F2-PREV PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-CO/BR

CHECK FOR DUPLICATE CUST ORD : Y/N

If [N] then no checking will be done.If [Y] program SP10 - Order Entry will check both the ORDERS (current) and ORDHIST (history) files as well as INVFIL for duplicate customer order numbers. This relates only to numbers for the particular customer.If [W] a warning only will be given.If [U] then the Customer Order number must be unique across the system, not only for that particular customer and the number may not be blank..Duplicates may however exist on multiple lines of an order/invoice.

Please note that this check will only be done if the option to retain order analysis is set

CREATE P/O FOR B/O : Y/NIf you enter [Y], then a Purchase Order will automatically be created when a Back Order is created in SP19 - Demand Order Entry. The system will ask for entry of Supplier, Cost Price and Discounts.


When selling a finished stock item which is manufactured in-house and has been taken on as a bill in BM30 - Subassembly Maintenance, for example a kit, there is a requirement to raise a Purchase Order for incomplete or back ordered bills. Similarly, for all bills placed on backorder, there is a requirement to raise a Sales Order for the components required to make up the shortfall, so that these can be issued to manufacturing. In some instances there may still be a shortfall of the components to make up the bill. In this case, two orders are required - one for the components to make up as many complete bills for which there is sufficient stock, and one for the components for the shortfall. On the second order, the insufficient stock will be placed on backorder.

CREATE SP FOR BM COMPONENTS : Y/N

Enter [Y] to generate orders for bills.

CREATE NARRATIVESFOR LONG DESC : Y/N

If a long description is attached to the product via IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance, then a [Y] will cause these descriptions to be duplicated as narrative lines on the order/invoice.

The next three prompts look the same and are used in conjunction with the soft terminology entered in SU30 – Installation Maintenance, Option 4, terms 3,4 and 5. The terms entered there will display here as shown on the screen. These terms are used as additional fields on the order/invoice lines if specified on the jump tables in SP00. If you enter a reference entered in SU41 - Reference File Maintenance, then the relevant entry will be validated when capturing orders or invoices.

SU41 TYPE FOR (term 3, 4 or 5) : 2 characters

ENTER WH PER LINE ITEM : Y/NEnter [Y] to enable you to enter the warehouse on line items in SP10 - Order Entry thus invoicing from multiple warehouses.

ORDER ANALYSIS? (Y/N) : Y/NPlease see Appendix A2 for further details on this option.

CHECK FOR DUPL ORD# : Y/Nif [Y] then SP10 - Order Entry will check both the ORDER and ORDHIST file to ensure that there are no duplicates.


USER GUIDE

ALLOCATE STOCK Y/N/O : Y/N/OThe entry here will depend on whether you allocate stock on program SP34 - Create Standing Orders. If you do, then you must not allocate it again in this SP10 - Order Entry.If you enter an ‘O’, you will be able to decide whether to allocate or not at time of capture. The default will be ‘Yes’.

EXPAND A BILL Y/N : Y/NThis option to caters for expanding a bill in the Sales Order Processing System. If you enter the bill in SP10 - Order Entry, the system picks up the cost from the bill and generates lines for each component making up the bill. The components are marked with a 'c' and stock is issued; the bill is marked with a 'b' and a receipt for the bill is generated after which an invoice is generated. Sales Analysis is not updated with the components issued at zero price.

USE CURRENT DATE AS ORDER DATE IN SP11 : Y/N

Depending on the setting here, the system will either overwrite the order date with the current one when changing an order in SP11 - Order Review, or leave the original one on file.

SP15 VARIABLES

AUTO OPTIONON EXCEEDED'S : 1 digit

This relates to program SP15 – Batch Invoice Entry.When the quantity required for an invoice exceeds physical or free quantities, the option entered here will be enforced. If a space is entered you will be allowed to enter the required option at capture stage (depending on the settings in the field below).Options are;[1] Back order that part of the order that cannot be supplied.[2] Back order the whole order.[3] Cancel the line.[4] Override the "out of stock" warning, and supply the goods from previously allocated inventory.[5] Print an "out of stock" comment on the invoice.[6] Use an alternate product to fill the order.



"N" FOR OPTIONS NOT ALLOWED : This field is only used if the 'AUTO OPTION ON

EXCEEDS' was left blank. [N] in any of the six positions will indicate that this option will not be available to an operator at entry stage.

RETAIN PAYMENT METHOD ON B/0 : Y/N

When SP10 - Order Entry or SP15 - Batch Invoice Entry creates backorders, the system will optionally retain the payment method depending your specifications in this field.


USER GUIDE

SCREEN 4SP10/30 REFERENCES

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 10/033CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CCBR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH SP10/30 REFERENCES LENGTHREFERENCE TERMINOLOGY - 1 [ ] [ ] - 2 [ ] [ ] - 3 [ ] [ ] - 4 [ ] [ ] - 5 [ ] [ ] SP11 VARIABLESCURRENT DATE AS ORDER DATE (Y/N) [ ]USERNAME TO HOLD LATEST USER (Y/N) [ ]ALLOW ORDERS TO BE DELETED (Y/N/S) [ ] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-UPDATE, F4-COPY, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-CO/BR

This screen enables you to define up to 5 references per order/invoice line. You may enter a description of 10 characters for each reference and a length up to 20.

These references are retained on SPREF.

If they are defined here, SP10 - Order Entry will bring up a window for entering the references.

These references will follow the order when it becomes an invoice, and you will be able to amend them in SP30 – Invoice Maintenance.

SP14 - Release Picked Quantity to Invoice, will update SPREF with the invoice number when an order is released.

They may be printed on both the order (SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print) and invoice (SP70 - Invoice Form Print) if specified.

SP95 - Deletion of Orders and SP96 - Invoice History Deletion will delete the SPREF entries when relevant.

SP91 - Interface to AR and SA, will update the Sales Analysis with these fields if they have been selected in SA00 - System Record Maintenance and they will then e printed in the normal way.


SP11 VARIABLES

CURRENT DATE AS ORDER DATE Y/N

If [Y], then the order date will be changed to the current date when ever changes are made via SP11 - Order Review.

USERNAME TO HOLD LATEST USER: Y/N

If this option is set, then the Username on the order will be changed to that of the person accessing the order in SP11 - Order Review.

ALLOW ORDERS TO BE DELETED

Y/N/SYou may block orders from being deleted or specify that this may only be done using a supervisor password.

SCREEN 5

SP12 VARIABLES

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 11/117CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNSP12 VARIABLESPRINT AVERAGE COST? (Y/N) [N]PRINT PHYSICAL? (Y/N) [N]AUTO RELEASE BO QTY? (Y/N) [N]

F1-NEXT PAGE, F2-PREV PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR, ESC-EXIT

PRINT AVERAGE COST? (Y/N) : Y/N

The average cost may optionally be printed on picking slips.


USER GUIDE

PRINT PHYSICAL? (Y/N) : Y/N.The physical inventory on hand may optionally be printed on the picking slip.

AUTO RELEASE BO QTY : Y/NIf [Y] any item still on back order but for which there is enough physical stock need not be released in SP11 - Order Review, but will automatically be printed and marked for release. The item will only be partially released if this option is set to [Y] in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance, for this particular customer.

SCREEN 6

SP13 VARIABLESSALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 11/021CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNSP13 VARIABLESRELEASE NARR/SUNDRYINES [Y] DEFAULT RELEASE OPTION [N]OVERRIDE B/O QTY [Y]ALLOW PICKED > ORDERED [N]ALLOW PICKED > PHYSICAL QTY [N]ALLOW AUTOMATIC RELEASE [Y] CREATE DELIVERY NOTES [N]EXTEND BO LINES [N]CONSIDER COMPLETE FOR B/O [C]ENTER PRICE (Y/N/D) [N]MEMO WINDOW - SP33 SEQ. [1989]SHOW NET AMOUNT [N]ENTER NARRATIVE (Y/N/M) [N] M - MANDATORYENTER CUSTOMER ORD (Y/N/M/C)[ ] C- CONFIRM, M - MANDATORYENTER SALESMAN [ ] C- CONFIRM, M - MANDATORY F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-UPDATE, F4-COPY, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-CO/BR

RELEASE NARR/SUNDRY LINES : Y/N/S

When an order is released for invoicing, all narrative and sundry lines are released at the same time and deleted from the order. This causes a problem where line items are not being released but the narrative items relating to them are.If you enter [Y] here, you will be able to mark narrative and sundry lines in SP13 - Input Picked Details which should not be released.If you enter [S], only sundry lines will be available.

DEFAULT RELEASE OPTION : Y/NSP13 - Input Picked Details will use this as a default for whether narratives are marked for release or not.


OVERRIDE B/O QTY(BACK ORDER) : Y/N.

A [Y] allows the operator to enter a [C] when entering picked details and is used where a lesser quantity than ordered has been picked but the order is regarded as complete.

ALLOW PICKED > ORDERED : Y/N.

A [Y] indicates that you may supply more than was originally ordered.

ALLOW PICKED > PHYSICAL QTY : Y/N.

The option used to enter details of picked items warns the operator if there is not enough physical inventory. Enter [N] to prevent the operator from continuing. A [Y] will allow physical stock to go into a negative quantity.

ALLOW AUTOMATIC RELEASE : Y/N.

Orders may optionally be released to invoicing using programs SP14 - Order Release and SP78 - Order Release and Pint.Enter [Y] to allow the release of an order from program SP13 - Input Picked Details.If you press [F9] after having input the picked details, the order will automatically be released to invoicing and an invoice will be produced as if running program SP78 - Order Release and Pint.

CREATE DELIVERY NOTES : Y/N

If you enter [N], then SP13 - Input Picked Details, will call SP78 Order Release and Print when you press [F9] to access the release option.If you enter [Y], it will call SP83 - Order Release and Print Delivery Note.


USER GUIDE

EXTEND BO LINES : Y/NNormally values are not calculated for items placed on back order. However, if you enter [Y] here, extended values will include those items placed on back order and tax will be calculated as normal. Thus if you print the order using SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print, the values will represent the full value of the order and may then be used as an order confirmation which your customers can sign. Program SP13 - Input Picked Details, will also ensure that extensions are calculated as above.

CONSIDER COMPLETE FOR B/O : C/Blank

This will be used as the default for SP13 - Input Picked Details when less than the amount ordered was picked, but the order is considered to be complete. The ‘C’ indicates that the order line should be considered complete.

ENTER PRICE : Y/NIf [Y], you will be able to enter Selling Prices at SP13 - Input Picked Details stage.

MEMO WINDOW - SP33 SEQ. : 4 charactersThis feature allows you to capture an alternate sequence in SP33 - Alternate Sequence, especially for this purpose and capture up to 8 fields. If you enter that alternate sequence here, SP14 - Release Picked Quantity to Invoice, will display those fields in a memo window for each line item accessed.

SHOW NET AMOUNT : Y/NYou may display a running invoice total as items are picked.

ENTER NARRATIVE (Y/N/M) : Y/N/MA narrative may optionally be entered. If you enter [M], the narrative will be mandatory.

ENTER CUSTOMER ORD : Y/N/M/CThis option allows you to force entry of a customer order number in SP13 - Input Picked Details.[N] – no entry is required[Y] – entry is required[M] – entry is mandatory[C] – confirmation is required.


ENTER SALESMAN : Y/N/M/CThis option allows you to force entry of a salesman code in SP13 - Input Picked Details.[N] – no entry is required[Y] – entry is required[M] – entry is mandatory[C] – confirmation is required.

Only the customer order number/salesman code in the header is changed as different customer order numbers/salesmen are allowed to be entered per line item.


USER GUIDE

SCREEN 7

SP14/ 24 VARIABLESSALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNSP14/24 VARIABLESPRICE # FOR RELEASE [0] 0-PRICE ENTERED 9-LATEST DEFAULT PRICERETAIN PRICE HISTORY [Y] KEEP PRICE OVERRIDES [N]ACCEPT/INCREMENT PICK LIST# [N]AUTO OPTION ON EXCEEDED'S [4] 1-BO PART 2-BO WHOLE 3-CANCEL 4-OVERRIDE 5-NO STOCKALLOW RELEASE ALL OPTION [Y]PASS B/O LINES TO SP70 [Y]AUTO RELEASE BO QTY [Y]KEEP SP10 COST PRICE [N]RECALC PRO-RATA SUNDRIES [N]CAPTURE TRANSPORT DETAILS [N]QUERY STOPPED ACCOUNT (Y/N/W[Y]SUPPRESS PRINT OF ZERO LINES[N]CREATE ACKNOWLEGEMENT FILE [N]ACKNOWLEGEMENT FILENAME [ ]USING SP33 ALT. SEQUENCE [ ]DELIMITED BY [ ]INCLUDE LINES [H] H-HEADER D-DETAIL B-BOTHF1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-UPDATE, F4-COPY, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-CO/BR

PRICE # FOR RELEASE : 1 digitAny figure from zero to five, or 9 may be entered. If zero is entered the price on the order will be transferred to the invoice. Each inventory item may have up to five selling prices and any one of these may be selected. However, any other entry will have the effect of the ruling price being transferred to the invoice. If [9] is entered, the latest default price as recorded in the Customer Masterfile will be used.

RETAIN PRICE HISTORY Y/NIf you enter [Y], then the last 3 prices will be retained for each customer/product combination. You will be able to view these in SP10/15 by pressing [F5] – PRICE HISTORY, while your cursor is on the Price field.

KEEP PRICE OVERRIDES : Y/NDefault prices may be changed at the order stage. A [Y] in this field will ensure that options specified on the previous prompt are ignored in these cases.

ACCEPT/INCREMENTPICK LIST # : Y/N.

Where multiple deliveries from one order take place, it is possible to add an incrementing suffix to each subsequent picking list number. The operator will have to enter this number when releasing an order.


AUTO OPTION ON EXCEEDED'S : When an order is being released to invoicing and the

quantity supplied exceeds physical or free inventory, the option entered here will be enforced. If a space is entered, the user will be allowed to enter the required option at capture stage.

ALLOW RELEASE ALL OPTION : Y/N.

If set to [N] it will not be possible to select the option to release all orders to invoicing in any of the release programs.

PASS B/O LINES TO SP70 : Y/NIf [Y] is entered here, items which cannot be invoiced yet but must remain on back order will also be printed on the invoice as a memorandum item.

AUTO RELEASE BO QTY : Y/NIf [Y] any item still on back order but for which there is enough physical stock need not be released in SP11 - Order Review, but will automatically be released by SP14 - Order Release. The item will only be partially released if this option is set to [Y] in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance, for this particular customer.

KEEP SP10 COST PRICE : Y/NSP14 normally reads the latest cost price from the inventory files and passes it through to invoicing. If this option is set to [Y] the cost in existence at the order stage will be used instead.

RECALC PRO-RATA SUNDRIES : Y/N

'Sundries Items' which are set up in SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance, may be expressed as a percentage of GROSS, NET SALES or of TOTAL QTY. If this option is set to [N] the total of the Sundries will be released for invoicing even if an order is only being partially released. If it is set to [Y] the sundries will be calculated on a pro-rata basis.


USER GUIDE

CAPTURE TRANSPORT DETAILS : Y/N

If you enter [Y], you will have to enter additional information for every Branch order released when running SP24 - Branch Order Release, and will thus not be able to run it in batch mode over-night. Please refer to that section of this User Guide for more information.

QUERY STOPPED ACCOUNT : Y/N/W

If [N] all selected orders will be processed.If [Y], program SP14 - Order Release will check to see if the customer account for the order being transferred is a stopped account. If it is, the program will stop and prompt you to enter either [Y] or [N] to process the order.If [W], the orders for stopped accounts will not be processed, but a warning will be printed on the audit trail.

Remember if you select [Y] here you will not be able to run program SP14 - Order Release overnight or using program SU39 - Job Processing as it may require operator intervention.

SUPPRESS PRINT OF ZERO LINES : Y/N

If [Y], the audit trail produced by program SP14 - Order Release, will NOT print those lines on a released order which are not being transferred to the invoice file, but which are held on the order because they cannot be supplied. Also items where zero has been picked but the item has been marked as ‘C’ – consider complete, will not be printed.If [N], ALL lines of an order being transferred will be printed on the audit trail.

Please note, that where NO lines are being transferred to the invoice file, a header and total line will still be printed if the order was included in the range to be released.


CREATE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FILE : Y/N

If you wish SP14 - Order Release to create an invoice acknowledgement file indicating which orders have been invoiced. This file will be in ASCII format, the format being specified in SP33 - Alternate Sequence.

ACKNOWLEDGE FILENAME : 12 charactersEnter the name of the ASCII file to be created. This may be string of up to twelve or it may contain an extension such as XXXXXXXX.txtIt may also be a variable name based on the creation date. In this case enter : @C@Y@M@D. A file created on for instance 30/10/2001 will then be named 20011030.ACK

USING SP33 ALT. SEQUENCE : 4 charactersEnter the code which is set up in SP33 - Alternate Sequence option 3 to define the ASCII file layout.

DELIMITED BY : 1 characterIf you wish the system to delimit each field in the ASCII file with a special character, enter that character here.

INCLUDE LINE : 1 characterYou may include Headers, Detail Lines or Both


USER GUIDE

SCREEN 8

SP40 VARIABLES

AUTO OPTION ONEXCEEDED'S : When orders are created programmatically from a flat

file, and the quantity ordered exceeds physical or free inventory, the option entered here will be enforced. If a space is entered, the user will be allowed to enter the required option at processing stage.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP40 VARIABLES AUTO OPTION ON EXCEEDED'S [4] 1-BO PART 2-BO WHOLE 3-CANCEL 4-OVERRIDE 5-NO STOCK 6-ALT.STK. SP41 VARIABLES ORDER TEMP STOCK ITEMS ONLY [N] SP45 VARIABLES DELETE ORIGINAL ORDER [N] USE FROM AND TO FILENAMES [N] FORMAT IS 5 ALPHA, 3 NUMERIC SP6 VARIABLES USE BACK-ORDER SUB-SYSTEM [R] Y/N/R R - RELEASE (VIA SP13/14 ONLY) SELECTIVE SP69 RELEASE [Y] B/O UPDATE ON ALTERNATE SEQ [BO01] AUTO OPTION ON B/O UPDATING [1] 1 - SEPARATE ORDER 2 - ACCUMULATIVE SP70/77 VARIABLES 3 - SUPERSEDED BY GREATER AMOUNT ] 4 - ONLY KEEP OLDEST DATED B/O F1-NEXT PAGE, F2-PREV PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR


"N" FOR OPTIONS NOT ALLOWED : This field is only used if the previous one was left blank.

[N] in any of the six positions will indicate that option will not be available to an operator at entry stage.


SP41 VARIABLES

ORDER TEMP STOCK ITEMS ONLY : Y/N

If [Y] this program will only create Purchase Orders for temporary stock items. If [N] Purchase Orders will be created for all orders on back order.

SP45 VARIABLES

DELETE ORIGINAL ORDER : Y/N

If [Y], and the 'SUPPLY FREE STOCK' option at level 1 has been set to [Y], then SP45 - Batch Invoice Capture will compare the incoming invoice to an order with the same number. If the quantity invoiced is less than the original quantity ordered, the difference will be written away as a lost sale and may be printed in SP72 - Exception Reports option 7. The original order will be deleted under all circumstances.

USE FROM AND TO FILENAMES : Y/N

If you enter [Y], program SP45 - Batch Invoice Capture, will allow you to enter a range of file names to be read in consecutively. The format of these filenames must be 5 alpha followed by 3 numerics.If you enter [N], files will be processed one at a time and the format of the file name may be anything up to 8 characters.


USER GUIDE

SP6 VARIABLES

USE BACK-ORDER SUB-SYSTEM : Y/N/R

If [Y] the Back Order sub-system (as described in Section 7 Back Order Module) will apply to this Company/Branch combination.If [N], a separate sub-system will not apply and items placed on a back order will merely be held on a normal order until such time it is deleted or satisfied.If [R] the back-order sub system will only be updated at time of release, that is SP14 - Order Release or SP13 - Input Picked Details option [F9].SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print consequently still shows the back-order quantity and the original order quantity but after release, the invoice only shows the quantity supplied.

SELECTIVE SP69 RELEASE : Y/N

If this option is set to "Y", then the SP69 - Back Order Release allows the following options:RELEASE ALL B/ORDERS[Y] allows you to select a range of orders to be released, using the alternate sequence i.e. the sequence nominated in SP00 - System Record Maintenance as the consolidation sequence for back orders and set up in SP33 - Alternate Sequence. Only back orders, for which there is enough free stock to satisfy the order, will be released.

[N]gives you the option to scan back orders, either in order number sequence or in the alternate sequence, to mark orders for release using [F7] and to enter the quantity to be released."M" releases all orders previously marked for release. Only back orders, for which there is enough free stock to satisfy the order, will be released, regardless of the quantity entered.

B/O UPDATE ONALTERNATE SEQ : 4 characters

This field must contain BO01 and an alternate key for this must be created in SP33 - Alternate Sequence option 2. This key must consist of Co/Br/Wh/Customer as it governs the update sequence of orders from the back order file.


AUTO OPTION ONB/O UPDATING : 1 digit

[1] Separate orderIf this option is selected a new back order record will be written every time an item is placed on back order whether a record already exists for that item or not.[2] AccumulativeIf this option is selected, an alternate sequence key must be used. It is suggested that this key includes customer and stock item but excludes order number. If a key is found to be in the back order file, a new one will not be created but the quantity on the original back order will merely be incremented by the quantity.[3] Superseded by greater amountIf this option is selected, an alternate sequence key must be used. It is suggested that this key includes customer and stock item but excludes order number. If a key is found to be on the back order file, and the quantity for that key is less than the quantity currently being back ordered, that quantity will be overwritten with the greater quantity.[4] Only keep oldest dated back orderIf this option is selected, an alternate sequence key must be used. It is suggested that this key includes customer and stock item but excludes order number. If a key is found to be on the back order file no updating will take place.


USER GUIDE

SCREEN 9

SP70/77/78 VARIABLES

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 11/004CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP70/77/78 VARIABLESREVERSE DATE [Y]PRINT "J" INVOICES [N]PICKING NOTE/ORDER CONF [O]CONSOLIDATE SUBSTKS ON SP70 [N]SP16 DEFAULT FORM [IV ]SP18 DEFAULT FORM [IV ]SP19 DEFAULT FORM [SP ]SP78 ALTERNATE FORM [IV ]SP70 COPY TERMINOLOGY [ ]SP171 DEFAULT FORM [SP ]EMAIL SP70 INVOICES (Y/N/C) [N] C-CONFIRMEMAIL ORDERS (Y/N/C0 [Y] SP13 ADDITIONAL FORM [IV ] SP77 LONG DESC IN BLOCKS [20] WIDE, DELIMITED BY [;] F1-NEXT PAGE, F2-PREV PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-CO/BR

REVERSE DATE [Y] will cause the date on the order and invoicing forms to be printed in a DDMMCCYY format.

PRINT "J" INVOICES : Y/N.[Y] will provide the operator with a choice of printing normal and Job Costing type invoices.[N] must be entered if there is no interface to program JC19 - Contract Input from the Job Costing module.

PICKING NOTE/ORDER CONF : [P] and [O]

If [O] then the item lines with a quantity to be supplied of 'zero' will be printed. If [P] these lines will be suppressed. This refers only to program SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print.

CONSOLIDATE SUBSTKS ON SP70 : Y/N

If sub-stock is used, an invoice may optionally detail Sales per sub-stock. If this option is set to [Y] all Sales by sub-stock will be consolidated at Stock level and only 1 line will be printed. (This only applies if the Auto Allocate Sub-stock option on the SP10/15/16/17/18 screen has been set to [Y]).


SP16 DEFAULT FORM : IVxx.The user-defined form number entered here will be used as the default form for printing invoices in program SP16 - Demand Invoice Entry.

SP18 DEFAULT FORM : IVxx.The user-defined form number entered here will be used as the default form for printing invoices in program SP18 - Demand Credit Note Entry.

SP19 DEFAULT FORM : SPxx.The user-defined form number entered here will be used as the default form for printing invoices in program SP19 - Demand Order Entry.

SP78 DEFAULT FORM : IVxx.The user-defined form number entered here will be used as the default form for printing invoices in program SP78 Order Release and Print.

SP70 COPY TERMINOLOGY : 10 charactersWhen copy invoices are produced in SP70 - Invoice Form Print, you may specify what should be printed to indicate that this is a copy invoice.

SP171 DEFAULT FORM : SPxx.The user-defined form number entered here will be used as the default form for printing invoices in program SP171 - Credit Note Suspense Entry

EMAIL SP70 INVOICES : Y/NIf this is set to [Y], the SP70 - Invoice Form Print produces emails for those customers that have email addresses set up in the narrative field specified in AR00 - System Record Maintenance for that purpose.

EMAIL ORDERS (Y/N/C) : Y/N/CIf this is set to [Y], the SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print produces emails for those customers that have email addresses set up in the narrative field specified in AR00 - System Record Maintenance for that purpose.

SP13 ADDITIONAL FORM : 4 charactersIf you enter a form type here, then this program will produce two different forms when producing an invoice. The 2nd printer options may be used to re-direct the form to a different printer.


USER GUIDE

SP77 LONG DESC IN BLOCKS : 2 digitsThe long description entered for stock items in IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance, may be printed on the order form. When you enter these descriptions, you may enter a number of items, such as colours and use a delimiter entered below. For instance your long description may look as follows:yellow; green; blue; red;….These may then be printed in separate blocks on the order document. Specify the length of the block here.

DELIMITED BY : 1 character.If you wish to use the feature described above, enter the delimiter used here.


SCREEN 10

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP78 VARIABLES ALTERNATE FORM [IV ] SP91 VARIABLES UPDATE ONLY PRINTED INVOICES[N] N/STK DESC TO PART# IN 'SA' [N] QUERY STOP/DEL ACCS (Y/N/W) [Y] WRITE TO HISTORY (INVHIST) [Y] ADD SUNDRY TO AR50 SALES [Y] SP91 BY SELECTED WAREHOUSES [Y] USE IV30 'PG' FOR SA [N] USE AR30 'AR' FOR SA [N] SP92 VARIABLES WRITE TO HISTORY (SPHANAL) [Y] TALLY PRINTOUT (MAX 50 CHAR)[N] SP93 VARIABLES OUTPUT TO FLATFILE [N] AUTOMATICALLY PRINT [Y] RELEASE 'BLANK' SUBSTK #'S [Y] F1-NEXT PAGE, F2-PREV PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR

SP78 VARIABLES

ALTERNATE FORM : IVxx.The user-defined form number entered here will be used as the default form for printing invoices in program SP78 - Order Release and Pint. (Only applies if in either SP10 - Order Entry, SP16 - Demand Invoice Entry or SP18 - Demand Credit Note Entry you have entered a [Y] in the ALT. FORM # field on that program and if the jump table is set up to access that field).


USER GUIDE

SP91 VARIABLES

UPDATE ONLY PRINTEDINVOICES : Y/N.

If this option is set to [Y] the update SP91 - Interface to AR and SA will check to ensure that only printed invoices/credit notes are used for updating Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis files and are removed from the Invoice file.

N/STK DESC TO PART # IN 'SA' : Y/N.

The Sales Analysis Module may optionally produce reports using the inventory code as a key.If this option is set to [N] all non-stock items invoiced will be grouped together as one item on the sales analysis.If a [Y] is entered, the first fifteen characters of the description of a non-stock item will be used as a key. Similar items may therefore be grouped together for analysis purposes.

QUERY STOP/DEL ACCS (Y/N/W) : Y/N/W

Although the system prevents entries being made to customer's records containing a stopped indicator, it may happen that this indicator is set after an invoice has been created but before program SP91 - Interface to AR and SA has been run.If [N] all invoices/credit notes will be processed.If [Y], program SP91 - Interface to AR and SA will check to see if the customer account for the invoice/credit note being transferred is a stopped account. If it is, the program will stop and prompt you to enter either [Y] or [N] to process the transaction.If [W], the invoices/credit notes for stopped accounts will not be processed, but a warning will be printed on the audit trail.

Remember if you select [Y] here you will not be able to run program SP91 - Interface to AR and SA overnight or using program SU39 - Job Processing as it may require operator intervention.


WRITE TO HISTORY (INVHIST) : Y/N

If this option is set to [Y] all records transferred to Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis will be written to the Invoice History File. These records are only accessible by the Report Writer program and must be deleted using program SP96 - Invoice History Deletion.

ADD SUNDRY TO AR50 SALES : Y/N

Sundry charges are normally not included in the Sales Month-to-date on customer records. A [Y] here will ensure that this is done.

SP91 BY SELECTED WAREHOUSES : Y/N

If you select this option you will be able to enter the warehouses you wish to process when you run SP91 - Interface to AR and SA.

USE IV30 ‘PG’ FOR SA : Y/NIf you enter [Y], then SP91 - Interface to AR and SA will update the sales analysis files with the product group in the stock record as entered in IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance, and not with the product group on the invoice/credit note transaction.

USE AR30 ‘AR’ FOR SA : Y/NIf you enter [Y], then SP91 - Interface to AR and SA will update the sales analysis files with the area in the debtor’s record as entered in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance and not with the area on the invoice/credit note transaction.


USER GUIDE

SP92 VARIABLES

WRITE TO HISTORY (SPHANAL) : Y/N

If you enter [Y], the details will be posted to the Sales Order Analysis History file.

TALLY PRINTOUT (MAX 50 CHAR)

: Y/NIf you enter [Y], your Cash-up report will print on a tally slip with a maximum width of 50 characters.

SP93 VARIABLES

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 11/119CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNSP78 VARIABLESALTERNATE FORM [IV ]SP91 VARIABLESUPDATE ONLY PRINTED INVOICES[N]N/STK DESC TO PART# IN 'SA' [N]QUERY STOP/DEL ACCS (Y/N/W) [N]WRITE TO HISTORY (INVHIST) [Y]ADD SUNDRY TO AR50 SALES [N]SP91 BY SELECTED WAREHOUSES [N]USE IV30 ‘PG’ FOR SA [N]USE AR30 ‘AR ‘FOR SA [N]SP92 VARIABLESWRITE TO HISTORY (SPHANAL) [NTALLY PRINTOUT (MAX 50 CHAR)[YSP93 VARIABLESOUTPUT TO FLATFILE [N]AUTOMATICALLY PRINT [Y]RELEASE 'BLANK' SUBSTK #'S [Y]F1-NEXT PAGE, F2-PREV PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR, ESC-EXIT

OUTPUT TO FLATFILE : Y/NConsolidated orders may optionally be written to a flat file. Please see the separate Flat File document for a layout.

AUTOMATICALLY PRINT : Y/NIf [Y] an order form will automatically be printed for the newly created order.

RELEASE 'BLANK' SUBSTK #'S : Y/N

If blank sub-stock items exist, and this is set to [Y] the quantity on order will be allocated to non-blank sub-stock where possible.


SCREEN 11

SP10/15/16/17/18 VALIDATION ALLOW BLANK CODES

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP10/15/16/17/18 VALIDATION - ALLOW BLANK CODES (Y/N/H/D) AR GROUP [N] PRODUCT GROUP [N] SA#2 [Y] SALES CATG [Y] INVENTORY MESSAGE OPTIONS TYPE (SU33/IV30) 1 2 SUPPLY IF AVAILABLE [N] [N] (Y/N) BACK ORDER ALLOWED [N] [N] (Y/N) PRINT INVOICE & MSG [N] [N] (Y/N) RELEASE B/O IF EXIST [N] [N] (Y/N/C) F1-ORDER/INV HEADER, F2-PREV PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR

For all the codes below the following applies:Y = Allow Blank codes on both header and detail lines.N = Blank codes are not allowed.H = Blank codes are only allowed on headersD = Blank codes are only allowed on detail lines.

AR GROUP : Y/NDebtors Groups may optionally be entered when capturing orders or invoices. Set the option as described above.

PRODUCT GROUP : Y/NA Product Group may optionally be selected when entering a non-stock or narrative item. Set the option as described above.

SA#2 : Y/NA Sales Analysis 2 Code may optionally be entered when capturing orders or invoices. As a rule a blank code is allowed. Set the option as described above.If this option is set to [N] you must enter a valid code and ensure that you select this code in the jump tables.

SALES CATG : Y/NSet the option as described above for Sales Categories


USER GUIDE

INVENTORY MESSAGE OPTIONS

TYPE 1/2 (SU33/IV30)

These options apply to the 'Inventory Availability' feature and works in conjunction with the message code set up in program IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance, in the Inventory System, and program SU33 - Narrative File Maintenance, in Systems Utilities. You may state the rules for back ordering of items with message codes 1 or 2 as set up in SU33 - Narrative File Maintenance. Items with message code 3 are handled exactly as those with no message code, except that the code and description may optionally be printed on the invoice. Please see Appendix A1 for more information on this feature.

SUPPLY IF AVAILABLE : Y/N (SU33 message code type 1 or 2)

BACK ORDER ALLOWED : Y/N (SU33 message code type 1 or 2)

PRINT INVOICE & MSG : Y/N (SU33 message code type 1 or 2)

RELEASE B/O IF EXIST : Y/N/C (SU33 message code type 1 or 2)[C] - For existing back orders issue available items and cancel the rest.


SCREEN 12

ORDER AND INVOICE JUMP TABLE.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ORDER/INVOICE HEADER JUMP TABLE ORDER IN WHICH THE VARIABLES BELOW ARE TO BE ENTERED : [1 ][02][03][04][05][06][07][08][09][10][11][12][13][14][15][16][17][18][19][20] 01. REFERENCE 12. DELIVERY ADDRESS 02. CUSTOMER ORDER # 13. ROUTE CODE 03. NO. OF INSTALMENTS 14. DELIVERY DATE 04. AR GROUP 15. PAYMENT METHOD 05. SALESMAN 16. DELIVERY METHOD 06. SA CODE 1 17. AGE PERIOD 07. SA CODE 2 18. TERMS 08. TAX RATE # 19. ALTERNATE FORM PRINT 09. PRICE # 20. CANCEL BY DATE 10. DISC # 11. OVERALL DISC # F1-CRED NOTE HEADER, F2-VARIABLES, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR

This jump table makes entering order and invoicing data easier by allowing you to specify the sequence in which you wish data to be entered. It also allows you to optionally skip certain data fields which are not required for entry.

There is one jump table for order and invoice header information and a separate one for credit note header information.

If you wish to scan supplier transactions when entering credit note header information in program SP17 - Credit Note Entry and SP18 - Demand Credit Note Entry, you must select cross reference in the credit note jump table. This will ensure that you enter the correct cross reference.

In the example shown, the sequence of entry for the order/invoice header details is as follows;

Reference, Customer Order #, tax rate number, delivery address, and finally, debtors group.

You would not be able to access any other fields.

Care should be taken when setting up the sequence for delivery address, area and salesman codes. As area and salesman may optionally be held on the delivery address file, those codes will override anything entered previously. If alteration to the area/salesman codes are allowed, these must follow the delivery address in the jump table.


USER GUIDE

SCREEN 13

CREDIT NOTE JUMP TABLE

There is a similar jump table for credit notes as shown below.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CREDIT NOTE HEADER JUMP TABLE ORDER IN WHICH THE VARIABLES BELOW ARE TO BE ENTERED : [1 ][20][14][17][00][00][00][00][00][00] [00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00] 01. REFERENCE 12. DELIVERY ADDRESS 02. CUS ORD # 13. ROUTE CODE 03. NO. OF INSTALMENTS 14. DELIVERY DATE 04. AR GROUP 15. PAYMENT METHOD 05. SALESMAN 16. REASON CODE 06. SA CODE 1 17. AGE PERIOD 07. SA CODE 2 18. TERMS 08. TAX RATE # 19. ALTERNATE FORM PRINT 09. PRICE # 20. X-REFERENCE FOR CREDIT NOTES 10. DISC # 11. OVERALL DISC # F1-PASSWORDS, F2-ORDER/INV HEADER, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR


SCREEN 14SUPERVISOR PASSWORDS

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SUPERVISOR PASSWORDS ON: N-NO PASSWORDS Y-IN SP10/5/6/7/8/9 S-IN SP09 CREATION OF SERIAL NUMBERS [Y] CHANGE TO SEMI-AUTO DOC.NO. [N] REPRINT OF INVOICES [N] NON-STOCK [N] NARRATIVE [N] RESERVING STOCK [N] CHANGE TO NUMBERING METHOD [N] FORM MSG # IN SP14/78 (Y/N/W) CREDIT LIMIT EXCEEDED [S] 16 [Y] TERMS EXCEEDED [N] 17 [N] CHANGE TO CUSTOMERS DEFAULT PRICE [N] 18 CHANGE TO CUSTOMERS DEFAULT DISC# [N] 19 USER CHANGE TO CUSTOMERS OVERALL DISC# [N] 20 PERMISSION KEY FORM MSG # LEVELS NON-STANDARD PRICE [N] 1 21 [0] NON-STANDARD DISCOUNT [N] 2 22 [0] BELOW COST PRICE [N] 3 23 [0] FREE STOCK EXCEEDED [N] 4 24 [0] PHYSICAL STOCK EXCEEDED [N] 4 24 [0] MINIMUM STOCK EXCEEDED [N] 5 25 [0] BELOW COST PLUS [ 10.00] % [N] F1-PRODUCT LINE, F2-CR NOTE HEADER, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR

SUPERVISOR PASSWORDS ON

Only one of three characters may be entered in most of these prompts. The last prompts which pertain to stock violations will allow a fourth character being a [B].

[N]No supervisor overrides required although a warning will be given and you will have to press [Enter] before the program will continue. [N] may be entered in any of the prompts.

[Y] Supervisor overrides will be required at entry stage if a violation is detected. [Y] may be entered in any of the prompts.

[S] A warning will be given at entry stage but a separate program (SP09) will be used by the supervisor to unflag these warning messages before any orders may be released for invoicing. The [S] option applies only to the last ten checks. This last option does not apply to the 'COST + %' prompt at the bottom of the screen.[B] No supervisor overrides required although a warning will be given. However, the program will not wait for you to press [Enter] and will continue immediately.

[B] may only be entered for the last prompts pertaining to stock violations.

You possibly may NOT be able to read this message on fast machines. If you regard these messages as important then DO NOT select this [B] option.


USER GUIDE

The FORM MSG # field refers to the titles page of the user-definable forms as set up in SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance, for form type SP. If the password indicator on any one of these last fields is either [Y] or [S] and a violation of these conditions has taken place, the appropriate message entered on the form will be printed.

CREATION OF SERIAL NUMBERS : Y/N

[Y] if you wish to control the creation of serial numbers which do not exist when capturing in SP10 - Order Entry.

CHANGE TO SEMI-AUTO DOC.NO : Y/N.

A supervisor override is always required if the method of invoice numbering is altered. However, if this option is set, any break in a numbering range of semi-automatic numbering will require a supervisor override.

REPRINT OF INVOICES : Y/N.[Y] should be entered if operator is to be prevented from reprinting invoices/credit notes on the printing programs (SP80/71). To do so would then require a supervisor override.

NON-STOCK : Y/N.[Y] will prevent the operator from entering a non-stock item on an order/invoice without supervisor overrides.

NARRATIVE : Y/N.[Y] will prevent an operator from entering a narrative type item on an order/invoice without supervisor overrides.

RESERVING STOCK : Y/N.If [Y] is entered the operator would not be able to reserve stock without supervisor overrides.

CHANGE TO NUMBERING METHOD : Y/N

If [Y] the operator will not be allowed to change the numbering method.


CREDIT LIMIT EXCEEDED : If the customers credit limit has been exceeded the options will have the following effect;AT CAPTURE STAGE[Y] a supervisor override required at capture stage.[N] a warning will be given.[S] the operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.AT SP14/78 STAGE[N] No credit limit checking[Y] If credit limit is exceeded a supervisor password must be entered. If the incorrect password is entered, the item is ignored, a warning printed on the SP14 - Order Release report and an entry placed in OVERFIL for printing via SP73 - Credit Limit/Terms Exceeded.[W]If the credit limit is exceeded the item is ignored, a warning printed on the SP14 - Order Release report and an entry placed in OVERFIL for printing via SP73 - Credit Limit/Terms Exceeded.

TERMS EXCEEDED : If the customers terms have been exceeded the options will have the following effect;AT CAPTURE STAGE[Y] supervisor override required at capture stage.[N] warning will be given.[S] operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.AT SP14/78 STAGE[N] No credit limit checking[Y] If terms exceeded a supervisor password must be entered. If the incorrect password is entered, the item is ignored, a warning printed on the SP14 - Order Release report and an entry placed in OVERFIL for printing via SP73 - Credit Limit/Terms Exceeded.[W]If the credit limit is exceeded the item is ignored, a warning printed on the SP14 - Order Release report and an entry placed in OVERFIL for printing via SP73 - Credit Limit/Terms Exceeded.

If the TERMS are exceeded, it will show "***TERMS***"If CREDIT LIMIT is exceeded, it will show "***CR LIMIT***"If both are exceeded, it will show "***TERMS/CR***".


USER GUIDE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 10/036CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CCBR - 01 - MAIN BRANCHSUPERVISOR PASSWORDS ON: N-NO PASSWORDS Y-IN SP10/5/6/7/8/9 S-IN SP09CREATION OF SERIAL NUMBERS [N]CHANGE TO SEMI-AUTO DOC.NO. [N]REPRINT OF INVOICES [N]NON-STOCK [N]NARRATIVE [N]RESERVING STOCK [N]CHANGE TO NUMBERING METHOD [Y] IN SP14/78 (Y/N/W)CREDIT LIMIT EXCEEDED [N] [N]TERMS EXCEEDED [N] [N]CHANGE TO CUSTOMERS DEFAULT PRICE [Y]CHANGE TO CUSTOMERS DEFAULT DISC# [Y] USERCHANGE TO CUSTOMERS OVERALL DISC# [N] PERMISSION LEVELSNON-STANDARD PRICE [N] [0]NON-STANDARD DISCOUNT [Y] [0]BELOW COST PRICE [Y] [0]FREE STOCK EXCEEDED [N] [0]PHYSICAL STOCK EXCEEDED [Y] [N] [9]MINIMUM STOCK EXCEEDED [N] [0]BELOW COST PLUS [ 0.00] % [N]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-UPDATE, F4-COPY, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-CO/BR

CHANGE TO CUSTOMERSDEFAULT PRICE : If a change is made to usual default price # (as set up

in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance) these options are available; [Y] supervisor override will be required at capture stage.[N] warning will be given.[S] operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.

CHANGE TO CUSTOMERSDEFAULT DISC # : If a change is made to the usual default discount # the

options will have the following effect;[Y] supervisor override will be required at capture stage.[N] a warning will be given.[S] the operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.


CHANGE TO CUSTOMERSOVERALL DISC # : If a change is made to usual overall discount #, the

options will have the following effect [Y] supervisor override will be required at capture stage.[N] a warning will be given.[S] the operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.

For the next 5 violations which refer to detail lines, a key will print in the position specified on the form (BODY 2) to indicate which violation(s) apply. For example, if a line item contains both a non-standard price and was sold at below cost price, '1 3' will print next to that line item. The messages in lines 21 to 25 should therefore refer to this key.

NON-STANDARD PRICE : If a non standard price is entered on an order/invoice line, the options will have the following effect;[Y] supervisor override will be required at capture stage.[N] a warning will be given. Press [Enter] to continue.[S] the operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.[B] a warning will be given. No [Enter] required.

NON-STANDARD DISCOUNT : If a non standard discount is allowed on an order or

invoice line, the options will have the following effect;[Y] supervisor override will be required at capture stage.[N] a warning will be given. Press [Enter] to continue.[S] the operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.[B] a warning will be given. No [Enter] required.


USER GUIDE

BELOW COST PRICE : If the price entered or the discount allowed causes the net sales value of a line item to be below the cost of that item, the options will have the following effect;[Y] supervisor override required at capture stage.[N] a warning will be given. Press [Enter] to continue.[S] the operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.[B] a warning will be given. No [Enter] required.

FREE STOCK EXCEEDED : If the quantity ordered is greater than the free inventory on hand, the options will have the following effect;[Y] supervisor override required at capture stage.[N] warning will be given. Press [Enter] to continue.[S] the operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.[B] a warning will be given. No [Enter] required.

PHYSICAL STOCK EXCEEDED: If the quantity ordered is greater than the physical inventory on hand, the options will have the following effect;[Y] supervisor override required at capture stage.[N] warning will be given. Press [Enter] to continue.[S] the operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.[B] a warning will be given. No [Enter] required.

MINIMUM STOCK EXCEEDED : If the quantity ordered causes the physical inventory on

hand to fall below the minimum inventory holding required, the options will have the following effect;[Y] supervisor override required at capture stage.[N] warning will be given. Press [Enter] to continue.[S] operator will be allowed to continue, but the order will not be available for release to invoicing until a supervisor unflags the checks by using program SP09 - Supervisor Order Review.


[B] a warning will be given. No [Enter] required.


USER GUIDE

BELOW COST PLUS % : 3.2 digitsEnter a percentage to be added to cost if you wish the check below to apply.If the price entered or the discount allowed causes the net sales value of a line item to be below the cost plus the percentage entered above, of that item, the options will have the following effect;[Y] supervisor override will be required at capture stage.[N] a warning will be given. Press [Enter] to continue.[B] a warning will be given. No [Enter] required.

USER PERMISSION LEVELS : Enter the user permission levels as specified in SU38

- System Password Maintenance which an operator should have to be able to order an item which violates any one of the conditions.


SCREEN 15

PRODUCT JUMP TABLES

The following three jump tables determine the sequence in which fields on the detail lines of invoices and orders are to be presented for entry. They also allow you to optionally skip certain data fields which are not required for entry.

The logic for selecting the data fields is explained on page 52 for document headers.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE SP00 11/008CO - 01 - HEAD OFFICEBR - 01 - HEAD OFFICE PRODUCT JUMP TABLEENTER THE VARIABLES WHICH ARE COMPULSORY :[ 0][00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00][00] 01. PRICE02. DISCOUNT%03. NET04. TAX RATE #05. DISCOUNT AMT06. COST PRICE07. SALES CATEGORY08. PRODUCT GROUP09. SALESMAN10. DELIVERY DATE11. CUS ORD #12.13.14.15 UPDATE STOCK (CRN)F1-NEXT PAGE, F2-PREV PAGE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-CO/BR

Items 12, 13 and 14 are for Soft Terms 3,4, and 5 as set up in SU30 - Installation Maintenance - Option 4.


USER GUIDE

SCREEN 16NON STOCK/NARRATIVE ITEM JUMP TABLE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN NON-STOCK/NARRATIVE ITEM JUMP TABLE ENTER THE VARIABLES WHICH ARE COMPULSORY : [1 ] [02] [00] [00] [00] [00] [00] [00] [00] 01. PRICE 02. DISCOUNT% 03. NET 04. TAX RATE # 05. DISCOUNT AMT 06. COST PRICE 07. SALES CATEGORY 08. PRODUCT GROUP 09. REP CODE F1-JC19 LINE, F2-PRODUCT LINE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR


SCREEN 17JC19 ITEM JUMP TABLE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN JC19 ITEM JUMP TABLE ENTER THE VARIABLES WHICH ARE COMPULSORY : [1 ] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08] [09] 01. PRICE 02. DISCOUNT% 03. NET 04. TAX RATE # 05. DISCOUNT AMT 06. COST PRICE 07. SALES CATEGORY 08. PRODUCT GROUP 09. REP CODE F1-TOTALS, F2-NON STOCK LINE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR


USER GUIDE

SCREEN 18TOTALS SINCE LAST SP91

Programs SP14, SP15, SP16, will add to them.

Programs SP17, SP18 will deduct from them.

Program SP91 will deduct from the Sales figures on the left hand side of the screen.

This allows a company to have a full view of its month-to-date sales by adding the sales figures to those held on AR00 - System Record Maintenance.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE *003 SP00 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN TOTALS - SINCE LAST SP91 ------------------------ QTY ........ 90.00 SALES ...... 4669.06 SUNDRIES.... 0.00 TAX ........ 637.56 DISCOUNT ... 81.64- NET ........ 5223.99 F2-JC19 LINE, F3-UPDATE, F5-SCRN, F6-CLEAR TOTS, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-COBR

Refer to the status line for the available operator actions.

We suggest you keep strict access control on this program via SU38 - System Password Maintenance, as you can easily clear the totals Sales totals by using [F6].


2.3 FINANCIALS - SP01Programs SP14, SP15, SP16, will add to them.

Programs SP17, SP18 will deduct from them.

Program SP91 will deduct from the Sales figures on the left hand side of the screen.

This allows a company to have a full view of its month-to-date sales by adding the sales figures to those held on AR00 - System Record Maintenance.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - FINANCIALS *003 SP01 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN TOTALS - SINCE LAST SP91 ------------------------ QTY ........ 90.00 SALES ...... 4669.06 SUNDRIES.... 0.00 TAX ........ 637.56 DISCOUNT ... 81.64- NET ........ 5223.99 F3-UPDATE, F6-CLEAR TOTS, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-COBR

Details are displayed as above. Refer to the status line for the available operator actions.

We suggest you keep strict access control on this program via SU38 - System Password Maintenance, as you can easily clear the totals Sales totals by using [F6].


USER GUIDE

2.4 PROCESSING & BACKUP CYCLES

DAILY AND WEEKLY CYCLES

Once the steps outlined in the SET UP sequence (Section 2.1) have been followed, all programs in the Sales Order Processing system, with the exception of the Period-end module programs, may be used on a daily and weekly basis.

As the system is an on-line real-time system, data is updated immediately upon entry. Enquiries and reports will show the latest data as at the last entry before enquiry or printing.

Controlling data entered and taking backups is essential to the successful running of the Sales Order Processing system. Ensure you have implemented the proper controls and methods so that these two areas are adequately covered.

PERIOD-END CYCLES

It is essential that all programs in the period-end module are protected by passwords and that backup is performed prior to using this module.

Ensure that all transactions have been entered into the system. Once the period-end programs have been run it will not be possible to re-run this module without restoring from backup data.

The sequence for the period-end module are detailed in the next section (2.4 Period End Cycles) and the sequence must be strictly followed.

DATA ENTRY AND CONTROL

Data is normally entered in groups or batches and thus a record of batches received and entered must be made. After each batch is entered into the system, the batch should be stamped as "POSTED DD/MM/CCYY". A check should also be made to see that document and batch numbering is sequential and that all batches have been entered.

All prime input programs provide audit trails. These audit trails should be attached to the original batches of input documents and filed daily in a computer file. Any discrepancies in batch totals should be investigated and corrected immediately.

BACKUP

Backup is mandatory and must be performed STRICTLY in accordance with the procedures laid down in the System Utilities User Guide. The program updates the Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis systems with invoices and credit notes according to the parameters held on program SP00 - System Record Maintenance.


2.5 PERIOD-END MODULEThe programs in this module are;

SP90 - UPDATE ORDERS WITH SUPERSESSIONS

SP91 - UPDATE ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE AND SALES ANALYSIS

SP92 - CASH UP

SP93 - CONSOLIDATE BACK ORDERS

SP94 - DELETION OF ORDER HISTORY

SP95 - DELETION OF ORDERS

SP96 - INVOICE HISTORY DELETION

SP97 - DELETE EXPIRED TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS

SP98 - DELIVER ADDRESS CHANGES CLEARDOWN

SP99 - CLEAR INVOICE ANALYSIS FILE

A Backup MUST be taken prior to using this module.

Ensure that ALL TRANSACTIONS have been entered into the system before using this module.

Once the period-end programs have been run it will not be possible to re-run this module without restoring from backup data.

Access to all programs in this module must be strictly controlled using passwords and access permissions.

Enter SP9 to display the period-end module menu.


USER GUIDE

2.6 PERIOD-END SEQUENCE

2.6.1 DAILY PROCEDURES

STEP PROGRAM FUNCTION1. SP92 If you are using the Point-of-Sale features, you must cash up

on a daily basis.

2.6.2 MONTH-END- PROCEDURES

STEP PROGRAM FUNCTION1. SP70 Invoice Print program.

Ensure that all invoices have been printed.2. SP71 Credit Note Print program.

Ensure that all credit notes have been printed.3. BACKUP Take a backup of all Accounts Receivable, Sales Order

Processing and Sales Analysis files.4. SP90 Update Orders with Supersessions

Optional.5. SP91 Update Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis with

Invoices.Optional.

6. SP93 Consolidation of Back Orders.Optional.

7. SP94 Deletion of Order History.Optional.

8. SP95 Deletion of Orders.Optional.

9. SP96 Invoice History Transaction deletion.Optional.

10. SP97 Delete Expired Time Dependent DiscountsOptional.

11. SP88 Print delivery address changes.(Optional)

12. SP89 Discount/Price Changes Print12 SP98 Clear delivery address changes from CHANGES file.13. SP99 Clear Detailed Sales Analysis File

Optional. (Make sure that you print the data first using SA70 - Report Print.


2.7 UPDATE ORDERS WITH SUPERSESSIONS - SP90This program will check orders and/or back orders for superseded items and then replace the original items with their supersessions.


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - UPDATE ORDERS WITH SUPERSESSIONS SP90 11/001 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN FROM ORDER [0 ] TO ORDER [ ] UPDATE TYPE [O] B - Backorders only O - Orders and Backorders UPDATE PRICES (Y/N) [N] PRINT AUDIT (Y/N) [Y] UPDATE BR TRANSFERS (Y/N) [N] AUTOMATICALLY B/O (Y/N) [N] DETAILS OK (Y/N) ? [Y] F9 - PRT OPTIONS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

Level 1

FROM ORDER : Enter range of orders.

TO ORDER : Enter range of orders.

UPDATE TYPE : [B] Backorders only[O] Orders and BackordersIf you use the SP6 option then this does NOT update the BORDERS file.

UPDATE PRICES : Y/NIf [Y] the price on the order will be replaced with the default price from the supersession.

ZERO PRICES ONLY : Y/NIf [Y] then the system picks up the latest price from the branch stock item of supersession for zero prices only. If [N] then it will update prices for all items.

PRINT AUDIT : Y/NIf [Y] an audit trail will be produced.


USER GUIDE

UPDATE BR TRANSFERS : Y/NIf [Y] orders captured via SP20 - Branch Order Entry will also be updated.

AUTOMATICALLY B/O (Y/N) : Y/N

If [Y], the quantity on order will automatically be added to the 'Back order' quantity on the stock file, even if there is enough stock to allow delivery and you will have to use program SP11 - Order Review, to release this for invoicing.If [N], the quantity will be written to the 'allocated' field.


2.8 UPDATE ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE & SALES ANALYSIS - SP91

The frequency with which this program will be run will depend entirely on individual user requirements. Certain users will do this on a daily basis, where others with small volumes and a low requirement for current sales information, may do this only once a month just before printing statements.


The Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis systems are updated with invoices and credit notes according to the parameters set up in program SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

The system displays the periods for AR, IV and SA. Where the SA and AR periods differ, the Sales Analysis will be updated, but the debtors will be posted to AR in the form of an AR20 - Batch Input batch, using the SA period. If any payments have been captured via the Point-of-Sale facilities in SP, then these will be written to a separate batch, using the next batch number.These batches may then be updated in the normal manner via AR21 - Batch Update, once the AR month-end has been run and the period number thus updated.

The default Company/Branch combination may also be optionally displayed. The screen prompt WILL NOT be displayed if this has been specified in SU30 - Installation Maintenance. In order to access this option press the [F10] key and the following details will be available for data input.


USER GUIDE

Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INTERFACE TO AR AND SA SP91 11/028CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN MONTH-END DATE [98/05/1818] ENTRY MODE [2] 1 - DIRECT AR UPDATEBATCH # INVOICES [980518] 2 - BATCH AR UPDATE CREDIT NOTES [980519] PAYMENTS [980520]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] CURRENT IV PERIOD 03CURRENT AR PERIOD 03 WARNING: USING SA PERIODCURRENT SA PERIOD 06 F9 - PRT OPTS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC – EXIT

MONTH-END DATE : DD/MM/CCYYThe default is the current date.

Any invoices dated beyond the date entered here will be ignored for update purposes. This facility allows invoicing to proceed for a new period prior to the old one being closed off.

FOR WAREHOUSES : This prompt will only display if you selected the option on SP00 - System Record Maintenance.When entering warehouses use the following delimiters:+, & ,; , | - to denote AND-, : - to denote a RANGE* - to denote ALLFor instance, to select warehouses 01,03, 10 to 15, and 20, you should enter: “01;03;10:15;20” (do not enter the quotations or any spaces).


ENTRY MODE : [1] Direct AR Update[2] Batch AR UpdateIf you enter [1], the system will immediately update all AR files.If you enter [2], the system will write all transactions to a batch which may then later be updated via program AR21 - Batch Update. This should be used where you wish to update your Sales Analysis, but have not yet run your Debtor’s month-end.The program displays the periods for IV, AR and SA and where they differ, the details will be posted to an AR20 batch using the SA period. If payments have been captured via POS, the a separate payment batch is created, using the next number in the sequence.When posting in batch, the system will prompt for batch numbers Invoices, Credit Notes and payments.

If you get a duplicate batch message you may use “O” to override.

Stopped AccountsDepending on the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, for stopped or deleted accounts, the program may stop to warn you that an account has been stopped. If you respond with a [Y], that invoice will be processed, if [N], the invoice will not be processed. However in both cases a warning will be printed on the audit trail

The document numbers and line numbers are displayed as the update takes place.

Where company level accounts as entered in AR39 - Customer Company File Maintenance, exist, their balances will be updated at the same time as the balances for the branch accounts linked to them are updated, thus providing a consolidated view of balances.

The terms code is read from the customer masterfile and the due date is calculated and written away with the record in the debtor’s transaction file.


USER GUIDE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INTERFACE TO AR AND SA SP91 11/014

FIRST INVOICE # .. 000076LAST INVOICE # .. 000076 UNPOSTED POSTED TO ARQTY......... 0.00 6.00COSTS....... 0.0000 27.4200SALES....... 0.00 27.42SUNDRIES.... 0.00 0.00DISCOUNT.... 0.00 0.00TAX......... 0.00 0.00 ============ ============GROSS....... 0.00 27.42 ============ ============ESC - EXIT

On completion the program displays the data as shown above.

An audit trail is produced and should be checked and filed in a safe place.

Press [Esc] to return to the main menu.


2.9 CASH UP - SP92The frequency with which this program will be run will depend entirely on individual user requirements. Certain users will do this only once a day, while others may do this during the day as well when operators are changed. The program will optionally write the records to SPHANAL if the option is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance. This file is accessible via the Report Writer.


The default Company/Branch combination may also be optionally displayed. The screen prompt WILL NOT be displayed if this has been specified in SU30 - Installation Maintenance. In order to access this option press the [F10] key.

Please remember that you may run this program as SYSADMIN in which case you must enter totals for all users as a whole, or as an individual user (till), in which case you will enter details for one till only, and only the totals for that user will be cleared.

Normal input is as follows;

Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CASH UP SP92 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PRINT ONLY? (Y/N) [N] DELETE HISTORY BEFORE [98/10/23] YYMMDD F3-PROCESS, F5-TOGGLE DATE, F9-PRT OPTIONS, F10-CO/BR

PRINT ONLY? : Y/NIf you enter [Y] only the totals currently in force will be printed.If you enter [N] the next screen will be displayed and you will be able to enter your cash up totals.


USER GUIDE

DELETE HISTORY BEFORE : CCYY/MM/DD

Enter the date up to which you wish details to be written to the history file.

Use [F5] to toggle between the current date and zero. Zero date does NOT archive to history - the data is merely deleted.

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CASH UP SP92 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN USER........ FLOAT....... 100.00 CASH........ 100.00 CHEQUE...... 0.00 CREDIT...... 0.00 BUYAID...... 0.00 OTHER....... 0.00 TOTAL CASH.. 100.00 ACCOUNT..... 0.00 TOTAL....... 100.00 F3 - ACCEPT, F4 - COINAGE F8 - DELETE

The system displays the figures accumulated during processing of invoices and orders under the SP01 heading and allows you to enter your cash up figures.

When you press [F3] to update the file, a report will be printed as shown below and the accumulated figures will be cleared for the system or individual user as the case may be.

[F8] will delete users off the cash-up file.


The report may optionally be printed on a tally slip with a maximum width of 50 characters. This option is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

If you press [F4] a coinage analysis screen will display as shown below.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CASH UP SP92 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN USER........ +--------------------------- COINAGE ---------------------------+ FLOAT...| R c | | 200 [0 ] .0 200 [ ] .00 | CASH....| 100 [ ] .0 100 [ ] .00 | | 50 [ ] .0 50 [ ] .00 | CHEQUE..| 20 [ ] .0 20 [ ] .00 | | 10 [ ] .0 10 [ ] .00 | CREDIT..| 5 [ ] .0 5 [ ] .00 | | 2 [ ] .0 2 [ ] .00 | BUYAID..| 1 [ ] .0 1 [ ] .00 | |F3 - ACCEPT TOTAL | OTHER...+----------------------------------------------------------------+ TOTAL CASH.. 100.00 ACCOUNT..... 0.00 TOTAL....... 100.00 F3 - ACCEPT, F4 - COINAGE


USER GUIDE

CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CASH UP DATE 17/03/98 @ 11:16 PAGE 1BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP92 11/100 00------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------OPERATOR FLOAT CASH CHEQUE CREDIT BUYAID TOTAL CASH ON ACCOUNT TOTAL SP01 TOT 100.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 100.00 0.00 100.00

SYSADMIN 100.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 100.00 0.00 100.00 CAPT 100.00 200.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 300.00 0.00 300.00 DIFF 200.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 300.00 0.00 300.00 SP01 TOT 100.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 100.00 0.00 100.00CLEARED

* * * E N D O F R E P O R T * * *


2.10 CONSOLIDATION OF BACK ORDERS - SP93 This is an optional program consolidating back orders according to user selected parameters. It only selects orders which have already been partially supplied or could not be supplied via program SP14 - Order Release.

It produces an audit trail, listing the old orders and their items, showing the new consolidated order, and an order document for the new consolidated order.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CONSOLIDATION OF BACK ORDERS SP93 11/008CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER FORM TYPE: [SP ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F9 - PRINT OPTIONS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

ORDER FORM TYPE : 4 digitsEnter the form to be used to print the new consolidated orders. This refers to the user-defined form set up in SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/NIf [Y] duplicate orders will be printed side-by-side.

If this option is used, the width of a single document as specified in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance, may not exceed 66 characters.

PRINT TEST REQUIRED? : Y/NIf [Y] a test document will be produced to line up the pre-printed stationery.


USER GUIDE

Level 2

SELECT CURRENCY TO BE USED

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CONSOLIDATION OF BACK ORDERS SP93 11/008CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN

SELECT CURRENCY TO BE USED :CURRENCY CODE [ ]

DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F1 - SCAN, F10 - PREV. SCRN, ESC - EXIT

Currency codes and rates are set up in SU36 - Currency File Maintenance.

CURRENCY CODE : 4 digitsPress [Enter] to accept the default currency or [F1] to scan and select. If another currency is selected the document values will be printed in the foreign currency using the rate held on file.


Level 3

CONSOLIDATION OF BACK ORDERS

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CONSOLIDATION OF BACK ORDERS SP93 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNCUSTOMER # FROM [ ] TO [ ]CONSOLIDATE ORDERS WITH:DELIVERY DATE [N]AREA [N]DELIVERY METHOD [N]CUSTOMER GROUP [N]PAYMENT METHOD [N]SALESMAN [N]ROUTE [N]S.A. CODE 1 [N]S.A. CODE 2 [N]ITEMS PER ORDER? [80]

DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]F1 - SCAN, F9 - PRT OPTS, F10 - FORM, ESC - EXIT

CUSTOMER # FROM-TO : 6 charactersEnter the selected range of customers. Press [Enter] in both fields to consolidate back orders for all customers. A scan is available.

CONSOLIDATE ORDERS WITH : Enter [Y] in any or all of the following fields. Orders will

be consolidated according to the selection available.

ITEMS PER ORDER? : 2 digitsEnter the maximum number of lines each consolidated order may contain.

DETAILS OK? (Y/N) : [Y]Accept the detail entered or re-enter them. Press [Esc] to exit the program.


USER GUIDE

2.11 DELETION OF ORDER HISTORY - SP94This program is used when the Order Analysis system is in use (See Appendix A2). It deletes order history.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELETION OF ORDER HISTORY SP94 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER # FROM [0 ] TO [ ]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F1 - SCAN FILE, F9 - PRT OPTS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

ORDER # FROM-TO : Enter the required order number sequence or press [Enter] for all orders.


2.12 DELETION OF ORDERS - SP95This program allows the deletion of a selected range of orders. It will ensure that all allocated figures on the inventory masterfile are correctly updated. You will also be able to delete orders for a selected range of ‘Cancel by’ dates depending on the sequence you select. Another sequence available is Invoice/Credit Note.

An audit trail of all deleted orders is produced.


The Report Destination, Company/Branch/Warehouse combination and Report date may be optionally selected. Please see the GETTING STARTED section at the beginning of this User Guide.

Level 1

ORDER # FROM-TO : 6 digitsEnter the exact range of orders to be deleted. The system will not allow [Enter] to be pressed (indicating that all orders on file should be deleted). This is done as a precautionary measure. Outstanding orders may be scanned.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELETION OF ORDERS SP95 11/001 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ORDER # FROM [123 ] TO [ ] ORDER# A/C # DEL DATE CUST ORDER# CANCEL BY 000123<-->000000 98/10/16 00/00/00 000124 1000 98/10/16 00/00/00 002106 AAF1 98/08/21 00/00/00 002107 AAF1 98/08/21 00/00/00 002111 Y2000 00/01/17 00/00/00 002120 ABBY 98/09/04 00/00/00 002140 1000 98/09/22 00/00/00 002141 1000 98/09/22 00/00/00 002142 1000 98/09/23 00/00/00 002143 ABBY 98/10/02 CHECK 00/00/00 002144 ABBY 98/10/02 CHECK 00/00/00 002153 1000 98/09/23 BACKORDER 00/00/00 002155 1000 98/09/23 BACKORDER 00/00/00 002156 ABBY 98/09/25 78787 00/00/00 F1 - SCAN FWDS, F5 - CHANGE SEQ, F9 - PRT OPTS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

There is an [F5] key which you may use to change the sequence of the selection.


USER GUIDE

2.13 INVOICE HISTORY TRANSACTION DELETION - SP96This program allows historical information to be deleted in any of the sequences set up in program SP33 - Alternate Sequence.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE HISTORY DELETION SP96 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 08ALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE [ ]CODE DESCRIPTION <-->DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENCE0001 PRODUCT WITHIN CUSTOMERBO01 SP - B/O CONSOLIDATION KEYINVO CO/BR/CUST/DOCPICK CO/BR/DOC/BIN

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN FILE, F10 - CO/BR

ALTERNATE SEQ CODE : 4 charactersEnter the code for the alternate sequence to be deleted.

Press [F1] to scan or [F10] to change CO/BR option.


Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE HISTORY DELETION SP96 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 08ALTERNATE SEQUENCE 0001 PRODUCT WITHIN CUSTOMERCOMPANY/BRANCH [1 /01]TRANSACTION TYPE [1] 1 - INVOICES 2 - CREDIT NOTES 3 - INVOICES FROM JOB COSTING 4 - CREDIT NOTES FROM JOB COSTINGDETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F3 - ACCEPT DETAILS, F10 - SET UP, ESC - EXIT

COMPANY/BRANCH : 2 digits/2 digitsAccept the default or change the data.

TRANSACTION TYPES : [1] Invoice[2] Credit Note[3] Invoice from Job Costing[4] Credit Note for Job Costing

DETAILS OK? : Y/N

Press [F3] to accept or [F10] to return to the previous screen (Set up).


USER GUIDE

Level 3

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE HISTORY DELETION SP96 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 08ALTERNATE SEQUENCE 0001 PRODUCT WITHIN CUSTOMERALTERNATE KEY FROM [0 ] TO [00 ]ALTERNATE KEY SCANCO/BR/DOC #/LINE# DATE ALTERNATE CODE CUST# PRODUCT

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN FILE, F6 - SCAN CODES, F8 - DELETE, F10 - RANGE

Depending on whether you selected the default or alternate sequence, the following will display.

ALTERNATE KEY FROM-TO : 6 digits

OR

DOCUMENT # FROM-TO : 6 digits

Press [F1] to scan the codes or [F10] to return to the range selection on the previous screen. If [F8] is pressed the code will be deleted.


2.14 DELETE EXPIRED TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS - SP97

This program is used to delete time dependent discounts. A date is entered and all discounts due to expire on or have expired before that date will be removed from the Discount File. An audit trail of all deleted discounts is produced.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELETE EXPIRED TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS SP97 11/000CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNEXPIRY DATE [92/01/28]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


EXPIRY DATE : DD/MM/CCYYEnter the expiry date. The date format is selected in program SU30 - Installation Maintenance - Option 1 - Screen 3.


USER GUIDE

2.15 DELIVERY ADDRESS CHANGES CLEARDOWN - SP98You should run this program as part of your month-end procedures. Do so only after you have run SP88 - Delivery Address Changes Print.This program deletes all changes logged by program SP31 - Deliver Address Maintenance.

Enter SP98 to run the program.

When the first screen displays, press [Enter]. The printed changes will be deleted form the file.


2.16 CLEAR INVOICE ANALYSIS FILE - SP99A facility exists in the Sales Analysis system to hold information at document number level in addition to the normal summarised levels. However, this data will take up a large amount of disk space and should be deleted regularly.

Always remember to make a printout of the data using SA70 - Report Print, prior to running this program.


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CLEAR INVOICE ANALYSIS FILE SP99 11/002 COMPANY/BRANCH # [01/01] TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED CAPE TOWNDETAILS OK? (Y/N) []] F6-ALL CO, F7-ALL BR, ESC-EXIT

CO/BR : 2/2 digitsSelect the required Company/Branch combination or press [F6] to clear all Company/Branch combinations, or [F7] to clear all branches for a selected Company.

DETAIL OK? : Y/N.If [Y] is entered all details for all companies and branches will be deleted.


USER GUIDE

3. INPUT MODULE

3.1 THE INPUT MODULE MENUThe Input Module has THREE sections. The programs in the first section are;

SP09 - SUPERVISOR ORDER REVIEW

SP10 - ORDER ENTRY

SP11 - ORDER REVIEW

SP12 - PICKING LIST PRINT

SP13 - INPUT PICKED DETAILS

SP14 - RELEASE PICKED QUANTITY TO INVOICE

SP15 - BATCH INVOICE ENTRY

SP16 - DEMAND INVOICE ENTRY

SP17 - CREDIT NOTE ENTRY

SP171 - CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE ENTRY

SP172 - CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE

SP18 - DEMAND CREDIT NOTE ENTRY

SP182 - CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE & PRINT

SP19 - DEMAND ORDER ENTRY

The Input Module consists of a set of programs which handle the input and review of orders and the input of demand and batch invoices and credit notes.

The module also caters for back-ordering, the release of orders to invoicing, the printing of picking lists and the input of picked details.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 91

In the next section the programs allow you to optionally create picking notes and delivery documents from branch orders. When these orders are released they will result in a inventory transfer and not in a sale.

The programs in this section are;

SP20 - BRANCH ORDER ENTRY

SP21 - BRANCH ORDER REVIEW

SP22 - CANCEL BRANCH ORDER RELEASE

SP23 - PRINT INTRANSIT INFO

SP24 - BRANCH ORDER RELEASE

SP25 - BRANCH ORDER TO ORDER

SP26 - RECEIVE INTER BRANCH TRANSFERS

SP27 - INTER BRANCH STOCK BALANCING

SP28 - BRANCH DEL NOTE PRINT AND RELEASE


USER GUIDE

In the section below the programs read pre-defined flat files used to enter orders and invoices and contains a program which will create purchase orders from back orders.

SP40 - BATCH ORDER UPDATE

SP41 - BACK ORDERS TO PURCHASE ORDERS

SP45 - BATCH INVOICE UPDATE

Enter SP1, SP2 or SP4 to display the Input Module menu.

Enter SP to return to the Sales Order Processing menu or M, to return to the main menu.


3.2 SUPERVISOR ORDER REVIEW - SP09The program enables a supervisor to override system detected violations as specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance. The system will not allow any orders to be released if a supervisor does not delete the warnings.


The Report Destination, Company/Branch/Warehouse combination and Report date may be optionally selected.

ORDER ANALYSIS

Please refer to Appendix A2 of this User Guide for more information regarding this sub-system.

The order analysis must be set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, for the following prompts to be displayed.

ALLOCATE STOCK? (Y/N) : Y/NThe entry here will depend on whether you allocate stock on program SP34 - Create Standing Orders. If you do, then you must not allocate it again in this program.

WEEK # : 2 digitsEnter any value between 0 and 99 to indicate the week number to which the consignment belongs. Usually this will fall between 0 and 52, but is entirely under your control.

DETAILS OK? (Y/N) : Y/NAccept the details entered or enter [N] to change them.


USER GUIDE

Level 1

ORDER # : 6 digitsEnter a number or use the following function keys to scan; [F1] to scan the order file, [F5] to change to an alternate scan sequence.

Only orders which require supervisor overrides will be displayed on the screen.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - SUPERVISOR ORDER REVIEW SP09 11/028CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALORDER# 000013 ACCOUNT # 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRACTING REF# CUS ORD# DATE 92/02/19 <----QUANTITY----> EXCLUSIVEPRODUCT ORDERED TO SUPPLY PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMT001-1WB/WIT 46 2.00 2.00 61.57 123.14 Y001WIT46 4.00 4.00 55.00 220.00 S005/5WIT 46 1.00 1.00 20.04 20.04 Y

WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER SPIRA

F3-END, F4-CAT, F8-DELETE, F10-CUST, R-RESERVE

Once an order is accepted the header is displayed. A message will be displayed if any violations are detected and the supervisor will be required to enter the relevant password.

The order details are displayed after the header has been corrected. Any lines requiring action will be marked with an 'S' at the end of the line. As the supervisor presses [Enter] in that field a password will be requested.

If all warnings have successfully been overridden the order will be available for release.


3.3 ORDER ENTRY - SP10The program enables customer orders to be entered in an on-line real-time mode.

If you charge VAT for any debtor who does not have a VAT registration number on his masterfile, you may enter a VAT registration number when you press [F3] to end the invoice. You will notice an [F4] on the status line that, when pressed, allows you to enter a VAT number. This is merely for printing purposes and will not update the debtor’s masterfile.



The suite of ordering programs allows you to optionally print delivery notes. If you select this option in SP00 - System Record Maintenance , you will use different programs from the ones you use if you do not print delivery notes. The delivery note facility allows you to do part deliveries and invoicing or to print invoices only when everything has been delivered.

Using Delivery Notes Not using Delivery Notes1 SP10 - Order Entry SP10 - Order Entry

2 SP11 - Order Review (optional) SP11 - Order Review (optional)3 SP12 - Picking List Print (this

document is system defined), or SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print

SP12 - Picking List Print (this document is system defined), or SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print

4 SP13 - Input Picked Details SP13 - Input Picked Details 5 SP09 - Supervisor Order Review

(optional)SP09 - Supervisor Order Review (optional)

6 SP83 - Order Release and Print Delivery Note-

SP14 - Order Release or SP78 Order Release and Print

7 SP84 - Release Delivered Quantities to Invoice or SP85 - Release Delivered Qty and Print Invoice.


USER GUIDE

ORDER ANALYSIS



ALLOCATE STOCK? (Y/N) : Y/NThis is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance and you cannot change it here.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/065CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALALLOCATE STOCK? (Y/N) [Y]WEEK # [00]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F10 - PREV, ESC - EXIT


Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/004CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRAL NUMBERING (M/A/S) [A] AUTOMATIC/MANUAL/SEMI-AUTOMATIC BATCH REFERENCE [ ] F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT

NUMBERING (M/A/S) : 1 digitThe default for this is set up and explained in the System Parameter Maintenance section. An alteration to this type will always require a supervisor password to be entered.

BATCH REFERENCE : 12 charactersThis reference is retained on the ORDERS, BORDERS, ORDHIST, SPSTD, INVFIL and INVHIST files. It may be printed via SP70 - Invoice Form Print and SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print.


USER GUIDE

Level 3

ACCOUNT # : 6 charactersEnter the number or scan the file. Press [F1] to begin a scan in account number sequence or [F5] for an alphabetic scan.

The customer numbers, alpha codes, customer account names and address are displayed. Press [F1] to continue the scan. Press [F2] to return to the previous page. Press [Enter] to accept the selection or entry. Press [F7] for alternate display of 4 lines of address or balance.

A warning message "CREDIT STOPPED FOR THIS ACCOUNT" will appear if the stopped indicator has been set on program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance, or if this is a regional account linked to a company level account created in AR39 - Customer Company File Maintenance, which has been stopped. You will not be able to continue and will have to select a different customer number.

A warning message "CREDIT LIMIT EXCEEDED" will appear if this is the case, or where this is an account linked to a company level account created in AR39 - Customer Company File Maintenance, and the overall credit limit has been exceeded. Either enter another customer number or accept the entry. A supervisor override may be required depending on the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

The program overrides the exception message and logs the data to the credit limit exceeded report file. Use program SP73 - Credit Limit/Terms Exceeded to print the credit limit exceeded report.

A warning message "TERMS EXCEEDED" will appear if this is the case. Either enter another customer number or accept the entry. A supervisor override may be required depending on the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

The program overrides the exception message and logs the data to the terms exceeded report file. Use program SP73 - Credit Limit/Terms Exceeded to print this report.


Level 4

The initial order entry screen is displayed with the cursor positioned for entry of the first field specified in the jump table in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

You will see an [F6] – COMMENTS prompt on the status line. If you press this at any time while your cursor is in the header, it will open a new window. You may capture up to 5 comments of 30 characters each. These may for instance be used to capture Waybills, Delivery Notes and so forth. They may all be specified for printing on both the IV and SP form types.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRAL MOTIVE [ ]ACCOUNT # 1115 REFER [ ] CUS ORD# [ ]INVOICE TO: DELIVER TO: CODE DMAR @[ 0.6992 ]D J KEATON [D J KEATON ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] AREA [ ] DEL REF [ ] DISC ROUTE CODE [ ]AR GROUP [ ] NO SUCH CODE DELIVERY ADDRESS # [0000]SALESMAN [ ] INVOICE ADDRESS 0000SA CODE 1 [ ] LOOP THRU 0001-9998SA CODE 2 [ ] INPUT ADDRESS 9999TAX #: NOT REGISTERED CANCEL BYTAX RATE # [1] 14% VAT DATE DELIVERY REQD [21/02/02] [00/00/00]PRICE # [01] PAYMENT METHOD [ ]DISCOUNT # [01] OVERALL% [ 10.0000 ] DELIVERY METHOD [ ] DELIVERY INSTRUTERMS [ ] AGE PERIOD [08] CURRENTALT. FORM # [N]F3-ACCEPT, F6-COMMENTS, F8-DELETE, F10-CUST#, ESC-EXIT

Any of these fields are optionally available for entry depending on this selection.

CURRENCY CODE/RATE : 4.4 digitsThis will only be available for entry if you entered a currency code for this customer in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance. The rate currently on file is displayed but you may change it.


USER GUIDE

REFERENCE CODE : 8 charactersThis prompt is the first to display provided you have specified in AR00 - System Record Maintenance of the Accounts Receivable System, that you are using Reference Types as set up in SU41- Reference File Maintenance. The label for this prompt will be the short description as entered in SU41 for the type specified in AR00 - System Record Maintenance. This code will form part of the transaction record and will be transferred to the Accounts Receivable System via SP91 - Interface to AR and SA. You will also be able to include it in an alternate sequence as set up in program SP33 - Alternate Sequence . It will also be displayed in SP57 - Invoice Enquiry

ORD# : 6 digits

REF # : 8 characters

CUS ORD# : 15 charactersIf duplicates are not allowed, a message will display. It will show the order # by which the order is accessible on the history (ORDHIST) file as well as the form type to distinguish between invoices, credit notes and orders.

PAYABLE OVER [ ] MTHS : 2 charactersThis relates to instalment type debtors and may only be changed if the calculation type is 'I'. If it is 'R' the system will not allow you to change this.

AR GROUP : 4 charactersDisplayed from the Accounts Receivable masterfile but may be altered. Customer groups are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type DG.

SALESMAN : 4 charactersDisplayed from the AR masterfile or from the delivery address but may be altered. Salesmen codes are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type RP.This prompt may be changed to reflect your own terminology. If you require this option, then enter your own terminology in SU30 - Installation Maintenance Option 4 for the Accounts Receivable system. The system will then use the first 3 characters.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 101

S.A. CODE 1 : 4 charactersPress [Enter] to leave this field blank or enter a sales analysis code. These codes are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type S1. This may also automatically be filled by one of your User Codes if specified in SP00 - System record Maintenance.

S.A. CODE 2 : 4 charactersIf the option was selected in program SP00 - System Record Maintenance, this will default to the first four characters of the USER NAME.It may also automatically be filled by one of your User Codes if specified in SP00 - System record Maintenance.Press [Enter] to leave this field blank or enter a sales analysis code. These codes are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type S2.

Sales analysis codes are used to give additional user-defined segmentation of sales in the Sales Analysis system.

TAX # : Display only.Displayed from the customer masterfile. If no tax number is present, the customer will be charged. If program SP00 - System Record Maintenance specifies that zero tax is allowed this may be overridden to zero.

TAX RATE # : 1 digitThe tax rate applicable to this customer is displayed but may be altered or overridden by an SA# 1 code with different defaults. The rates are entered in SU30 - Installation Maintenance Option 2, at the installation stage.(NOT applicable to customers with tax numbers).

PRICE # : 2 digitsThe default price code for this customer is displayed from the masterfile, but may be altered or overridden by an SA# 1 code with different defaults. Enter a number from 0 to 5. (or limit set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance)A supervisor override may be required if specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.


USER GUIDE

DISCOUNT # : 2 digitsThe default discount number for this customer is displayed from the masterfile, but may be altered. Enter a number from 1 to 10. (or limit set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance)A supervisor override may be required if specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

OVERALL % : 3.2 digitsSelected from SP32 - Discount Maintenance discount option 4, but a different percentage may be entered.A supervisor override may be required if specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

TERMS : 4 charactersThe terms code for this customer is displayed from the masterfile, but may be altered. Press [F1] to scan the available terms codes.

ROUTE CODE : 4 charactersEnter a route code number or press [F1] to scan the available codes. Press [Enter] to accept the route number displayed.Route numbers are defined in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under description type RC.The route number may be stored with the delivery address (refer to program SP31 - Delivery Address).

DELIVERY ADDRESS # : 4 digitsAccept the default address [INVOICE ADDRESS 0000] by pressing [Enter] or do the following;[a] Scan the delivery addresses using [F1] and press [Enter] to select the address you want.[b] [LOOP THRU ADDRESS 0001-9998] by entering a number and the message "OK?" Y/N will appear.If [Y] is entered the delivery address corresponding to that number and currently displayed on the screen will be accepted.If [N] is entered the next address on file will be displayed.If 9999 is entered a manual address may be selected (the system will prompt for the address to be saved on file if required, and if so it will be given the next available address number on the delivery address file).If not, it is saved in #9999 and then there can be no subsequent #9999 saved in this run for this customer.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 103

DEL REF : 8 charactersIf you change the delivery address number above, you will also be able to change this delivery reference. Please refer to SP31 - Delivery Address Maintenance for more information regarding this field.

DATE DELIVERY REQD : DD/MM/CCYY.The program pre-loads the current system date, enter another date if required. This date will be used as the default for each line item you capture, but you will be able to change it

If the delivery date is changed on the header after detail lines have been entered, all detail lines which had the same delivery date as the header will also be changed to the new delivery date on the header.

CANCEL BY : DD/MM/CCYYThis defaults to zero but if you enter a date here you will be able to delete orders according to this date via program SP95 - Deletion of Orders.

PAYMENT METHOD : 4 charactersThe method of payment is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type PM.

DELIVERY METHOD : 4 charactersThe method of delivery is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type DI.

AGE PERIOD : 2 digitsThe system defaults to the current period. A change to this field will not have any effect on the order program. It is only intended for use on the credit note header and it is strongly recommended that this field be left out of the jump table relating to orders and invoices.A supervisor override may be required if specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

ALT. FORM # : Y/N.If [Y] is entered the alternate form entered in SP00 - System Record Maintenance will be attached to this order and will be used by program SP78 - Order Release and Pint.


USER GUIDE

HEADER OK? : Y/NPress [Enter] to accept the displayed information. Enter [N] to alter data already entered.

Use the <Down arrow> or <Up arrow> keys to move to the default fields.

The [F3] key may be pressed at any stage and the cursor will move to the above field. It is not necessary to enter all the fields specified on the jump table.

The order may be deleted at this point by pressing [Esc].You may also press [F8] to delete an order. Details of these deletions will be logged as lost orders on the SP72 – Exception Reports report.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 105

ORDER DETAIL LINE ENTRY

The item input screen is displayed.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/084CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRAL ACCOUNT # 1000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. REF# CUS ORD# DATE 93/08/04PRODUCT EXCLUSIVE ORDERED TO SUPPLY ON BO PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMT001-1WB/WIT 46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER SPIRA 5.00 5.00 4.5700 22.85 Y001WIT46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER ADJ. 2.00 2.00 70.4600 140.92 Y005/5WIT 46 WHITE SPIRAFLEX TUBE BLACK CON ON BO 9.00 8.00 20.8800 5.00 0.00 Y012 WIT 46 WHITE CASCADE ADJ/HANDSHOWER 14.00 14.00 21.1400 295.96 Y

TAX ITEM TAX EXEMPT C PRICE#01 GRP:0070 CAT:5000

F3-END, F4-CAT, F8-DELETE, F10-CUST, R-RESERVE

Enter the following fields;

WH : 2 digitsThis will only be available for entry if you specified this requirement in SP00 - System record Maintenance that you wish to enter the warehouse on detail lines thus enabling you to invoice from multiple warehouses.

PRODUCT : 15 charactersEnter a product or press [F1] to scan the inventory file or [F5] to select a different scan sequence. Use [F6] to scan parts of the code if the product has been defined as multi-part in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance.

BAR CODES

If you use bar codes and have entered these in IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance, you may enter the bar code instead of the product code. The system will verify this and then display the product code as normal.


USER GUIDE

SUBSCRIPTION ITEMS

Please refer to the Accounts Receivable System manual appendix for more information regarding the subscription sub-system.

When you invoice a subscription item and the customer does not have a subscription for this item, or if the subscription is expired, then one of the following warnings will display:

CUSTOMER DOES NOT HAVE SUBSCRIPTION (OR SUBSCRIPTION EXPIRED)F3 - CONTINUE, F4 – ALTER, F5 - NEW SUB, RETURN BACK

If you press [F3], you will be able to continue.

If you press [F4], the subscription maintenance screen as per AR30/37 will display and you will be able to alter the expiry date.

If you press [F5], the subscription maintenance screen as per AR30/37 will display and you will be able to enter the subscription..

If you press [Enter] you will be able to select another product.

SUPERSESSIONS/ALTERNATES

If an item has been superseded or there is an alternate for the product you will be advised by the system when you enter the product number. Please refer to Appendix A3 for more information.

Accept the supersession or alternate product by pressing [Enter], or enter another inventory item.

After accepting the product code on normal items, the following fields are displayed;

Description and Extended Description.

Price code, Tax percentage for that product.

Product Group and Sales Category.

Unit of hold, Unit of issue and Conversion code.

Free, Allocated, Physical and On order from vendors and lead time.

If the [F7] key is pressed, back ordered and reserved quantities will be displayed instead of allocated and on order.

If selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, the cost and GP% will also be displayed.

It may be necessary to enter a serial number or sub-stock number if these options have been set on the item masterfile record in program IV33 - Branch Inventory Maintenance.

Press [F4] to alter the conversion code for the item displayed. These codes are set up in program IV35 - Product Weights/Measures Maintenance in the Inventory system. This feature should only be used if the order is placed in a unit of issue other than that normally used.

Press [F1] to scan the codes. Press [F2] to scan backwards.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 107

Select the relevant conversion code. If the unit of hold does not match that on the masterfile, a message "INVALID UNIT OF HOLD" will be displayed and re-entry is required.

If the inventory is to be placed on reserve, release the quantity ordered by pressing [F6]. You will now be able to enter the quantity to be supplied immediately. The difference between the "order quantity" and the "to supply quantity" will be placed on reserve.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/004 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN WH : 01 - CENTRAL ACCOUNT # 100000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. LTD REFE CUS ORD# DATE 98/10/23 PRODUCT INCLUSIVE ORDERED TO SUPPLY ON BO PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMT 107-20 HOSE BIBTAP,PB.(3/4 HOSE UNION SAL: 3610 500.00 INSUFFICIENT FREE CANNOT PART SUPPLY OPTION [0] 1 - BO PART 2 - BO WHOLE 3 - CANCEL 4 - OVERRIDE 5 - NO STOCK 6 - ALT.STK. F4-ALTER CONV CODE, F5-PICK, F6-RESERVE, F7-TOGGLE

QUANTITY ORDERED : 7.4 digitsIf there is sufficient free inventory the program will accept the quantity ordered and display the extended line.When there is insufficient free or physical quantities the system will either automatically take action according to the selection made in SP00 - System Record Maintenance or prompt for the entry of one of the following options as specified in that file.If you wish to supply only part of the order press [F5]. This will allow you to enter the ‘TO SUPPLY’ quantity. The difference between this value and the quantity ordered, will be placed on back order.

When entering the quantity, there is an [F1] key option which allows the user to view stock availability across CO/BR/WH. If the user has no access to BR/WH (via SU38), a message will display saying ACCESS DENIED.

If the supplied quantity is greater than the ordered quantity, the system will display a warning but will allow you to continue. However, if the SP00 - System Record Maintenance option is set to allow supplied quantity greater than ordered quantity in SP13 - Input Picked Details, this warning will not display.


USER GUIDE

OPTION : [1] Back order that part of the order that cannot be supplied.[2] Back order the whole order.[3] Cancel the line.[4] Override the "out of stock" warning, and supply the goods from previously allocated inventory.[5] Print an "out of stock" comment on the invoice.[6] Use an alternate product to fill the order.

Enter the option required or press [F8] to reject the line.

PRICE : The default price (according to the code in the order header) is displayed. If the 'NET' indicator is set on AR30 - Customer File Maintenance, the system will use a selling price entered in SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix, if available, else it will use the default as above.To select another price, which will ONLY be allowed if the 'NET' indicator is [N], move the cursor to the price field or press [P] to go directly to the price field.Press [F1] or [F2] to select the next (or previous) price code, or enter a price not on file. Press [Enter] to accept a price.If the price code is 1, and this differs from the bar code price (where bar codes are used), the bar code price will be used. For all other price codes (2 to 5) the appropriate price will be retrieved from the inventory file.If the price code on the debtor’s masterfile is zero (0), this is regarded as pricing at cost. If there is a negative discount in SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix option 1 per product, then it will be added to the cost, that is the price is cost plus a fixed percentage.If you have the option to retain price history set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, then you will be able to press [F5], and view the last 3 prices for this customer/product combination.

DISCOUNT/SUR % : To change the discount, move the cursor to the discount field or enter [D] at the end of the line. The status line displays the discounts applicable to this customer/product combination. The discounts are maintained in program SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix.The discounts displayed initially are the default discounts. Press [F1] to select the next discount, or [F2] to select a previous discount. The discount may also be altered manually by entering a rate.Where the discount is made up of a combination of quantity and time dependent discounts, you may press [F5] to change either or both of these rates.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 109

DISCOUNT/SUR AMT : To change the discount, move the cursor to the discount field or enter [D] at the end of the line.The status line displays the discounts applicable to this customer/product combination. The discounts are maintained in program SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix.The discounts displayed initially are the default discounts. Press [F1] to select the next discount, or [F2] to select a previous discountThe discount may also be altered manually by entering a rate.Where the discount is made up of a combination of quantity and time dependent discounts, you may press [F5] to change either or both of these rates.

The discount fields will NOT be available for entry if the 'NET' option in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance, is set to [Y]

TAX : The status line displays the tax applicable to this customer/product.To select another tax rate, move the cursor to the tax field or enter [T] at the end of the line.Enter a rate from zero through six.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/004 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN WH : 01 - CENTRAL ACCOUNT # 100000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. LTD REFE CUS ORD# DATE 98/10/23 PRODUCT INCLUSIVE ORDERED TO SUPPLY ON BO PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMT 001WIT46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER ADJ. 98/10/23 SAL 3610 100.00 100.00 47.2864 8.30 0.75 1 4198.40 Y 108-20 HOSE BIBTAP RB (3/4 HOSE) 22mm 98/10/23 SAL 3610 4.00 4.00 21.1400 5.95 1.50 1 71.80 T CANNOT PART SUPPLY TAX 14% VAT PRICE#01 GRP:0010 CAT:4020 COST SA 12.6770 GP% 20.47 REC 12.6770 ASSORTED TAPS TARGET GP% 10.00 F3-END, F4-CAT, F5-COST, F6-DELDATE, F8-DEL, F10-CUST, R-RES

In addition to the above fields any of the others listed below may require entry if you specified them in the SP00 - System Record Maintenance jump table.

Cost Price, Sales Category, Product Group, Representative.

ADDITIONAL REFERENCESIf you have specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance that you require additional references, these will be displayed at the end of the item line, allowing you to enter these references.


USER GUIDE

When the ITEM LINE is complete and the cursor is positioned at the end of an order line, you may now use these function keys to do the following -

[Enter] To accept the line.[N] Move the cursor back to the start of the line to re-enter data.[P] Position the cursor in the Price field.[Q] Position the cursor on the Quantity to Order field.[T] Position the cursor on the Tax field.[D] Position the cursor on the Discount field.[O] Flag the item line for non-printing. You may suppress this in SP00 -

System Record Maintenance.[F4] Enter category[F8] The line is rejected.

When capturing order or invoice lines, the values for date, customer order number, and the 3 soft fields are duplicated from one line to the next, but may be changed.

If you wish to insert a line (and your line number increments in SP00 - System Record Maintenance is greater than 1) enter an I on the line below which you wish to insert a new line.

Continue with item line input until the customer's order is completed. Orders may have up to 9000 item lines. Press [F3] to end the entry of line items.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 111

STATUS LINE

Press one of the following for additional line item entry options.[F1] Scan

transactionsThis allows you to scan all the transactions for the customer. All options are exactly as described in AR50 - Customer File Enquiry/Print of the Accounts Receivable User Guide.

[F4] Duplicate Product Code.

This facility may be used where long, multi-part products are used or where multiple lines of the same product are captured.

[F5] Temporary items

This allows you to create temporary items on the stock file while capturing order details.

Delivery Date

There is a requirement for different delivery dates to be held per line item. You may enter a delivery date per line item by pressing [F6].

When releasing orders to invoicing, the delivery date option will check individual line items when releasing.

[F6] Delivery Date There is a requirement for different delivery dates to be held per line item. You may enter a delivery date per line item by pressing [F6].When releasing orders to invoicing, the delivery date option will check individual line items when releasing.If the delivery date is changed on the header after detail lines have been entered, all detail lines which had the same delivery date as the header will also be changed to the new delivery date on the header.

[F9] Narrative Invoices.

This facility is to be used where narrative type line items are to be captured.

[Enter] Non-stock It may also be required from time to time to invoice non-stock items. The system provides this facility.

[R] Reserve Allow you to place quantities on reserve.[B] Back order This facility allows quantities on back order to be checked

against quantity on hand and to be released from back order if stock is available.

While you are entering item lines, the system may give a warning when certain violations are detected. These may include credit limit exceeded, inventory falling below minimum level, no physical inventory available, net value of the line being below cost. Depending on the options selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, supervisor overrides may be required on any of all of these before you can continue.

Normally values are not calculated for items placed on back order. However, if you enter [Y] here, extended values will include those items placed on back order and tax will be


USER GUIDE

calculated as normal. Thus if you print the order using SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print, the values will represent the full value of the order and may then be used as an order confirmation which your customers can sign. Program SP13 - Input Picked Details, will also ensure that extensions are calculated as above.

Once items have been captured, [F10] or [Esc] out of the order is NOT allowed. The order must either be completed [F3] or deleted [F8].

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 113

TEMPORARY STOCK

Press [F5] to enter temporary stock. If we allowed you to only enter certain limited information you would still be forced to then go to IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance, and IV33 - Branch Inventory Maintenance to add additional information at a later stage.

To make this unnecessary, the following fields are available for entry.Vendor - Optional, will be validatedDescriptionABC ClassificationProduct Group - Mandatory. This will be validated.Sales Category - Mandatory. This will be validated if not blank.Unit of MeasurePrice 1Discount 1Currency Code - Mandatory. This will be validated.Foreign Cost - Optional.

NARRATIVE

Press [F9] to enter narrative items. This option allows a narrative of 30 characters to be entered, followed by the associated price. Any of the fields entered may be altered by using the arrow keys to move the cursor to the field to be changed and then re-entering the data.

Press [Enter] to accept the item line or [F8] to cancel it. Press [F10] to end the entry of narrative lines and enter the value.


USER GUIDE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/065CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALORDER# 000032 ACCOUNT # 1000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC.ORD# 000032 REF# CUS ORD# DATE 93/03/10 <----QUANTITY----> EXCLUSIVEPRODUCT ORDERED TO SUPPLY PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMT001WIT46 100.00 100.00 70.46 7046.00 Y012 WIT 46 4.00 4.00 21.14 5.00 80.33 YNARRATIVE 35.50 1 35.50 Y

INSTALLATION FEE TAX 10% VAT GRP: CAT: COST SA 0.0000 GP%100.00 REC 0.0000F3-END, F4-CAT, F8-DELETE, F10-CUST, R-RESERVE

NON-STOCK ITEM

Press [Enter] to enter a non-stock item. This allows the entry of 30 characters of narrative, followed by a quantity and price as set up in the Jump Table in program SP00 - System Record Maintenance. The fields may be altered by using the arrow keys and then re-entering data.

Press [Enter] to accept the item line or [F8] to cancel it. Press [F3] to end the entry of line items. Use the cursor keys to move to any product on the screen to correct any field required.

After ending the line items press [F3] to display the order sub-total. The system prompts for input of sundry items or comment lines.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 115

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/004 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN WH : 01 - CENTRAL ORDER# 002157 ACCOUNT # 100000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. LTD REFE CUS ORD# DATE 98/10/23 PRODUCT INCLUSIVE ORDERED TO SUPPLY ON BO PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMT 001WIT46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER ADJ. 98/10/23 100.00 100.00 47.2864 8.30 0.75 1 4198.40 Y 108-20 HOSE BIBTAP RB (3/4 HOSE) 22mm 98/10/23 4.00 4.00 21.1400 5.95 1.50 1 71.80 Y NARRATIVE 98/10/23 1 0.00 Y NON-STOCK 1 98/10/23 1.00 1.00 99.0000 1 97.78 Y F3-END, F4-CAT, F5-COST, F6-DELDATE, F8-DEL, F10-CUST, R-RES

Press [F3] to accept the sub-total displayed and to end the order if no further changes are required or proceed as follows;


USER GUIDE

SUNDRY CHARGES

Press [F7] to enter sundry charges.

CODE : 4 charactersPress [F1] to scan the sundry code file. These sundry charges are maintained by program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under the description type SC.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/065CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALORDER# 000032 ACCOUNT # 1000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC.ORD# 000032 REF# CUS ORD# DATE 93/03/10CODE DESCRIPTION AMOUNT T1 RAILAGE 12.30 0Y3 INSURANCE 30.00 0Y

F8 - REJECT LINE, F10 - END SUNDRIES

AMOUNT : 7.2 digitsThis value will be treated according to the set up of the specific sundry code in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance.

TAX RATE : 1 digitPress [F10] to end sundry charges input.

Up to 9 Sundry Item lines may be entered.

COMMENT LINES

Up to 4 lines of 30 characters each. Press [F6] to enter comment lines and [F10] to end the input.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 117

ENDING THE ORDER

Press [F3] to end the order. The order total and internal order number are displayed.

If the Payment Method entered in the header has a Cash Analysis code of Cash, Cheque or Credit Card, then the system will allow you to enter an amount tendered as shown below. The change will be calculated. Please refer to Appendix A4. at the back of this manual for more details regarding the Point-of-Sale features. Please note that this relates only to SP15/16.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENTRY SP10 11/004 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN WH : 01 - CENTRAL ORDER# 002157 ACCOUNT # 100000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. LTD REFE CUS ORD# DATE 98/10/23 PRODUCT INCLUSIVE ORDERED TO SUPPLY ON BO PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMT 001WIT46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER ADJ. 98/10/23 100.00 100.00 47.2864 8.30 0.75 1 4198.40 Y 108-20 HOSE BIBTAP RB (3/4 HOSE) 22mm 98/10/23 4.00 4.00 21.1400 5.95 1.50 1 71.80 Y NARRATIVE 98/10/23 1 0.00 Y NON-STOCK 1 98/10/23 1.00 1.00 99.0000 1 97.78 Y F3-END, F4-CAT, F5-COST, F6-DELDATE, F8-DEL, F10-CUST, R-RES

Press one of the following;

[Enter] to accept the order as entered

[F8] to cancel the order.

[F1] to scan transactions. All the options are exactly as those described for AR50 - Customer File Enquiry/Print in the Accounts Receivable User Guide.

The program returns to customer number input screen. Enter another customer number or press [F10] to return to the company and branch selection screen.

Press [Esc] to end the program.


USER GUIDE

3.4 ORDER REVIEW - SP11The program enables orders that were entered via program SP10 - Order Entry, or SP40 - Batch Order Capture, to be reviewed, amended and deleted.

As a rule, users may only amend their own orders, however, users with a level 9 authority may amend orders captured by someone else.



ORDER ANALYSIS



ALLOCATE STOCK? (Y/N) : Y/NThe entry here will depend on whether you allocate stock on program SP34 - Create Standing Orders. If you do, then you must not allocate it again in this program.



SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 119

Level 1

ORDER # : 6 digitsEnter or scan for the order number.

Use the following function keys to scan the orders on file;

[F1] Scan the order file.[F5] Changes to an alternate scan sequence;

Customer numberCustomer order numberProductDelivery dateBin location

Accept the order to be reviewed by pressing [Enter].

If you selected to enter an operator's name in SP00 - System Record Maintenance in the DEFAULT SA #2 AS OPERATOR field then you will not be able to access the order if it was created by someone else. The SYSADMIN user will have access to all orders.

The first screen of the order is displayed. Move the cursor to the field that needs to be updated. The second screen presents the order detail as originally entered.

Move the cursor to the field to be updated and enter the changes. After completing the review and update press [F3] to end the order review.

During the review process the user may change the existing data, delete item lines using [F8] or add additional item lines, sundry charges and comment lines.

To delete a complete order press [F8] on the last screen displayed.

The system now prompts “DOCUMENT WILL BE DELETED - ARE YOU SURE (Y/N)”. You must enter [Y] for the order to be deleted.

In addition, if the option is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, then the deletion may be disallowed or may require a supervisor override.


USER GUIDE

3.5 PICKING LIST PRINT - SP12Picking lists from orders entered via program SP10 - Order Entry, SP20 - Branch Order Entry or SP40 - Batch Order Capture, may be printed using three option levels. The second level is shown below.



SALES ORDER PROCESSING - PICKING LIST PRINT SP12 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNREPORT SEQUENCE [1] 1 - ORDER # 2 - WAREHOUSE/BIN LOC 3 - CUSTOMER ORDER # 4 - CUSTOMER ACC # 5 - PRODUCT 6 - DELIVERY DATEDETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F9 - PRT OPTS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

REPORT SEQUENCE : [1] Order #.[2] Warehouse/bin loc.[3] Customer order #.[4] Customer account #.[5] Product[6] Delivery date sequence.

DETAILS OK? Y/NAccept the default to continue.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 121

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - PICKING LIST PRINT SP12 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN INCLUDE ZERO PHYSICAL STOCK [Y] ORDER # FROM [000000] TO [999999] DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT

INCLUDE ZERO PHYSICAL STOCK : Y/N

If you enter [Y] then items with zero physical stock will be included in the report. If you enter [N] they will be ignored/

FROM - TO # : Depending on the range selected above.Press [Enter] to accept the options as displayed or enter new options.


USER GUIDE

3.6 INPUT PICKED DETAILS - SP13Quantities of picked orders may be entered and the operator may select the option to immediately release the order to invoicing and to print the resultant document. In addition if the option is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, it will be possible to enter Selling Prices.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INPUT PICKED DETAILS SP13 11/020CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNINVOICE FORM TYPE: [IV ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


This level will only be available if in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, the 'ALLOW AUTOMATIC RELEASE' under SP13 variables, is set to [Y].

INVOICE FORM TYPE : IVxxEnter the required form type. This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

Please note that you can print a second form and route this to another printer provided you have entered the form type in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] duplicate invoices will be printed side by side.

PRINT TEST REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] a test document will be produced to line up pre-printed stationery.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 123

Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INPUT PICKED DETAILS SP13 11/020CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN







USER GUIDE

Level 3

ORDER # : 6 digitsEnter the order number or scan the file to see orders already on file. Press [F1] to scan in order number sequence.

The order numbers, customer order numbers and delivery dates are displayed. Press [F1] to continue the scan. Press [F2] to return to the previous page.

Press [Enter] to accept the selection or entry. An identification screen is displayed, showing brief customer/order details.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INPUT PICKED DETAILS SP13 11/008CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ORDER # [ 2307]PC9913PC9913 SALESMAN 0025AREAAR GROUPTAX NOT REGISTEREDDELIVERY DATE 11/03/99CUSTOMER ORD#PACKAGE-ID [ ] CONTINUE? (Y/N) [Y] F6 - COMMENTS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

Press [Enter] to accept the display or enter [N] to select another order number or to enter details for

PACKAGE ID : 10 charactersYou may select to print this on your delivery notes if you use that facility.

The items printed on the picking list for the order are displayed.

Items marked with B have been partially supplied or are on back order.Items marked with R have been partially supplied or are on reserve.Use [F6] to enter 5 lines of header comments, press [F10] to end the header comments.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 125

Enter the quantities from the picking list for each item picked in the store (See figure below).

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INPUT PICKED DETAILS SP13 11/001 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ACCOUNT # 100000 DEL DATE 98/10/23 INT. ORD # 002157 CUS ORD # BIN WH PRODUCT SUBSTK/SERIAL# QTY O/S PICKED 000001 01 001WIT46 WHITE CASCADE 100.00 100.0000 01 108-20 HOSE BIBTAP R 4.00 4.00 01 SPECIAL INDOOR BRASS TAP 1.00 1.00 F3 - UPDATE, F9 - RELEASE, F10 - ORDER #, ESC - EXIT

WARNING MESSAGES

Any item entered that is less than the quantity ordered will be advised. Press [Enter] to accept the displayed value, or re-enter the quantity. If the "consider complete" option is allowed in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, [C] may be entered here. This last will default to the value entered in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

Any quantity entered that is greater than the quantity ordered will be ignored after the appropriate warning has been given, unless SP00 - System Record Maintenance allows this condition.

After entering the quantities picked, [F3] will update or [F9] will update and release the order and print an invoice or delivery note. This will depend on your selection in SP00 - System Record Maintenance. The program will prompt with the next order number on file.

Repeat the cycle until all orders picked have been entered.

Press [F10] to select a new company/branch or press [Esc] to return to the menu.


USER GUIDE

RELEASE NARRATIVE/SUNDRY LINES

You may also mark those narratives or sundry lines which you do not want to be released yet provided the parameter in SP00 - System Record Maintenance is set to [Y]. The screen below shows an example.

The default for releasing narrative lines is set in SP00 - System record Maintenance.

You must enter either a [Y] or [N] next to narrative lines. If the indicator is left blank, it is treated as a [Y] which means that it will be released

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INPUT PICKED DETAILS SP13 11/102 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ACCOUNT # 1000 DEL DATE 94/02/01 INT. ORD # 000123 CUS ORD # WH PRODUCT SUBSTK/SERIAL# QTY O/S PICKED REL TMP 01 00001 CALCULATORS 2.00 2.00 01 BATTERIES INCLUDED 0.00 Y TMP 01 00005 FOUNTAIN PENS 24.00 B 9.00 01 USE YOUR OWN INK 0.00 N F3 - UPDATE, F9 - RELEASE, F10 - ORDER #, ESC - EXIT

Please note that if you are releasing items to invoices, then the delivery date will not change, but if you are creating delivery notes, then the delivery date will change to the current date.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 127

3.7 ORDER RELEASE - SP14All or selected orders may be released to the invoice print program for invoicing except those which require supervisor overrides of system detected violations as set up in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

Program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance in the Accounts Receivable system also has a PART SUPPLY indicator which governs the release of orders or item lines. Please refer to that User Guide for more information.

An alternative to this program is SP78 - Order Release and Print which will not only release the order to invoicing, but will also immediately produce the invoice document.

In addition this program can optionally create an invoice acknowledgement file provided this is specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance and the file defined in SP33 - Alternate Sequence.



Level 1

ORDER # : 6 digitsEnter or scan for required order number.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER RELEASE SP14 11/012CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER # [000001] RELEASE? (Y/N) [Y]ORDER# CUST# CUST ORD# DEL DATE000001<-->1000 92/02/19000002 1010 92/02/19000003 1050 92/02/19000004 1080 92/02/19000005 1100 92/02/19000006 1000 92/02/19000007 1020 92/02/19000008 1010 92/02/19000012 1010 92/02/19000013 1010 92/02/19000014 1010 92/02/19001676 1000 92/01/14001677 1010 92/01/28124555 1000 2588744 92/01/28

F10 - ORDER#, ESC - EXIT

Orders may be released for invoicing in 3 ways.

(A) A single selected order.

(B) All orders ready for release.

(C) All marked orders ready for release.


USER GUIDE

The status line displays the options available. Press [F5] for the following scan sequences.

Customer account number

Customer order number

Delivery date

Customer alpha sequence

Product

Bin location

To mark the individual orders for release, place the cursor on the required order and press [F7]. Use the [F10] key to go to the 'REL OPT' level.

Please note, this option will only be available if the SP00 - System Record Maintenance, prompt 'ALLOW RELEASE ALL OPTION' for SP14/24 variables is set to [Y].

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER RELEASE SP14 11/012CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER # [124555]ORDER# CUST# CUST ORD# DEL DATE000001 1000 92/02/19000002 1010 92/02/19 ** MARKED **000003 1050 92/02/19000004 1080 92/02/19000005 1100 92/02/19 ** MARKED **000006 1000 92/02/19000007 1020 92/02/19 ** MARKED **000008 1010 92/02/19 ** MARKED **000012 1010 92/02/19000013 1010 92/02/19000014 1010 92/02/19 ** MARKED **001676 1000 92/01/14001677 1010 92/01/28124555<-->1000 2588744 92/01/28 ** MARKED **

F1 - FWDS, F5 - CHANGE SEQ, F7 - MARK, F10 - REL OPT

RELEASE ALL ORDERS? : [Y] Will release all within a specified delivery date range.[M] Will released marked only.[N] Will return to previous level for re-selection.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 129

If the option is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, the operator will be required to enter the picking list number. This will be validated by the system and the program displays the order being released.

If an item on the order has a delivery date greater than the current date, the system will display the following;


USER GUIDE

DELIVER ONLY FOR DD/MM/CCYY .....CONTINUE Y/N [Y]If you enter [N] that line item will not be released. Enter [Y] to release the line item.

The program will prompt for the next order number to be released. Repeat the cycle until all the required orders are released.

SupersessionsThe program will check for supersessions. If it finds a superseded item, this line will only be transferred to the invoice file if the supersession warning was overridden in SP10 - Order Entry, or SP11 - Order Review. if this is not the case, the item will not be transferred but a message will be printed on the audit trail. You will have to use program SP11 - Order Review, to either override, or use the supersession. Please refer to Appendix A3 for more details.Stopped AccountsDepending on the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, for stopped or deleted accounts, the program may stop to warn you that an account has been stopped. If you respond with a [Y], that invoice will be processed, if [N], the invoice will not be processed. However in both cases a warning will be printed on the audit trail.

Press [Esc] to exit, the first and last invoice numbers created are displayed, press [Esc] to return to the menu.

If the payment method is cash or cash type (that is not on account), then the tendered window will display per order.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 131

3.8 BATCH INVOICE ENTRY - SP15The program provides the facility to prepare invoices that do not require picking slips or invoices for which delivery notes have already been produced.

The data input is identical to SP10 - Order Entry. (See those pages for details of the data screens). The only difference between the two programs is once the invoice has been entered and completed, NO REVIEW facilities are available.

The Amount Tendered window displays depending on the payment method.

Errors have to be corrected via programs SP17 - Credit Note Entry or SP18 - Demand Credit Note Entry.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BATCH INVOICE ENTRY SP15 11/024CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALNUMBERING (M/A/S) [M] AUTOMATIC/MANUAL/SEMI-AUTOMATICBATCH REFERENCE [ ]

F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT




USER GUIDE

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 133

3.9 DEMAND INVOICE ENTRY - SP16Invoices may be entered and printed immediately using form type IV. The screen will display both the form type and printer number while these are being captured.

The data input is identical to SP15 - Batch Invoice Entry. If you make use of the Point-of-Sale features and you have entered a cash sale account number in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, then the system will automatically by-pass the invoice header as soon as you enter this number.

If you have stated in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, that you wish the system to default to a quantity of one, this will be done and the system will automatically proceed to the next line without allowing you to change this quantity.

In addition it calls program SP70 - Invoice Form Print, and you will have to enter details as required by that program.

The invoice number is displayed at the creation and printing stage and on completion of the invoice entry, the program prints the invoice immediately.


Enter SP16 to select the program.Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DEMAND INVOICE ENTRY SP16 11/020CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNINVOICE FORM TYPE: [IV ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


INVOICE FORM TYPE : IVxxAccept the default form type as specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance or change it as required. This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.


USER GUIDE

Please note that if you are using the Point-of-Sale features, (refer to Appendix A4. at the back of this manual for more details), you can press [F9] after you have entered the amount tendered. This will allow you to enter a different form number in order to print an invoice showing all the details such as amount tendered and change.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 135

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] duplicate invoices will be printed side by side.


Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DEMAND INVOICE ENTRY SP16 11/007CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CURRENCY CODE OPTION [4] 1 - LOCAL CURRENCY 2 - ORDER CURRENCY 3 - FORWARD COVER RATE (NOT AVAILABLE) 4 - TRANSACTION CURRENCY 5 - SELECT CURRENCY CODE AND RATE DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT


CURRENCY CODE OPTION : 1 digit[1] – Local Currency[2] - Order Currency

[3] - Forward Cover Rate (Not Available)[4] - Transaction Currency[5] - Select Currency Code And Rate

Select the currency code to be used for printing of the invoices.

CURRENCY CODE : 4 charactersThis prompt will only display if you selected option [5] above.Press [Enter] to accept the default currency or [F1] to scan and select. If another currency is selected the document values will be printed in the foreign currency using the rate held on file.

DETAILS OK? : Y/N


USER GUIDE

3.10 BATCH CREDIT NOTE ENTRY - SP17Credit notes may be prepared and captured in batch mode for printing at a later stage.

The data input is identical to SP15 - Batch Invoice Entry using the jump tables set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance for credit notes.

The only additional fields to be input are;

On the headerXREF : 8 digits

This enables you to select a cross reference which may be the same as that for the invoice to which the current credit note relates. There is a scan on this field which displays the transactions for the customer. All options are as described for AR50 - Customer File Enquiry/Print in the Accounts Receivable User Guide.You can also enter a specific invoice number (relating to the same customer) in this field and press [F2]. This will load the invoice details. You can then change the data as required for the credit note.

When using [F2] to load an invoice, and the stock number no longer exists, then the item is changed to a non-stock item and the description to INVALID and the original stock number. You must then either change the stock number or description to be valid.

You must ensure that cross-reference forms part of your jump table. This will help you to enter the correct cross-reference.

On detail lines

An indicator which will determine whether inventory is to be updated or not.

This prompt is

UPD.INV/REF : 1 character[N] will not update stock with the goods returned[Y] will update stock with the goods returned[P] will update stock with the goods returned but you will also be forced to enter a reference number.A Credit note transaction is created returning the stock and a new adjustment record with the reference entered, is created removing the stock.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 137


Please note, the system allows credit notes to be captured against stopped accounts.

Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT NOTE ENTRY SP17 11/024CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALNUMBERING (M/A/S) [M] AUTOMATIC/MANUAL/SEMI-AUTOMATICBATCH REFERENCE [ ]





USER GUIDE

3.11 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE ENTRY - SP171This program forms part of the Credit Note Suspense feature described in the Appendix at the back of the manual. It enables you to enter suspense credit notes that will update inventory records immediately, but the accounting side will only be updated once the credit note is released via program SP172 - Credit Note Suspense Release or SP182 - Credit Note Suspense Release & Print The entry is exactly as that for SP17 - Credit Note Entry.

Enter SP171 to access the program.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 139

3.12 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE - SP172This program forms part of the Credit Note Suspense feature described in the Appendix at the back of the manual. It allows you to release credit notes entered in program SP171 - Credit Note Suspense Entry for update of the accounting records. Before releasing you may add, amend or delete credit note lines or delete the credit note in its entirety.


The screen looks like the one below after you have scanned for credit notes. Select the one you require and make changes or simply save it.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE SP10SF11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CRN # [000147]ORDER - ORDER # SEQUENCE CRN # A/C # CUST ORD# DEL DATE BIN LO PRODUCT#C000147<-->1030 25/09/01 TAKEN: 25/09/01 BY: SYSADMINC000149 1030 26/09/01 TAKEN: 26/09/01 BY: SYSADMIN *** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1-SCAN, F5-SEQUENCE, F10-PREV


USER GUIDE

3.13 DEMAND CREDIT NOTE - SP18The program allows credits notes to be entered and printed immediately.

The data input is identical to SP17 - Credit Note Entry.

In addition it calls program SP71 - Credit Note Form Print, and you will have to enter details as required by that program.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DEMAND CREDIT NOTE ENTRY SP18 11/020CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNINVOICE FORM TYPE: [IV ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


INVOICE FORM TYPE : IVxxAccept the default form type as specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance or change it as required. This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

Please note that if you are using the Point-of-Sale features, (refer to Appendix A4. at the back of this manual for more details), you can press [F9] after you have entered the amount tendered. This will allow you to enter a different form number in order to print a credit note using a different format if required.

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] duplicate credit notes will be printed side by side.


SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 141

Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DEMAND CREDIT NOTE ENTRY SP18 11/007CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CURRENCY CODE OPTION [4] 1 - LOCAL CURRENCY 2 - ORDER CURRENCY 3 - FORWARD COVER RATE (NOT AVAILABLE) 4 - TRANSACTION CURRENCY 5 - SELECT CURRENCY CODE AND RATE DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT






DETAILS OK? : Y/N

The credit note number is displayed at the creation and printing stage and on completion of the credit note entry, the program prints the credit note immediately.


USER GUIDE

3.14 CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE & PRINT - SP182This program forms part of the Credit Note Suspense feature described in the Appendix at the back of the manual. It allows you to release and print credit notes entered in program SP171 - Credit Note Suspense Entry for update of the accounting records.

The data input is identical to SP172 - Credit Note Suspense Release. In addition it calls program SP71 - Credit Note Form Print, and you will have to enter details as required by that program.


SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 143

3.15 DEMAND ORDER INPUT - SP19Sales Orders may be entered and printed immediately using this program. In addition, Purchase Orders may also automatically be created for all items put on back order, provided the option is set in SP00 - System record Maintenance. In this case a window will open, requesting you to input a supplier, cost price and discount. If you change the cost price, this will also be changed on the Sales Order. The final Purchase Order is created only when the Sales Order is updated, until then all details are retained in a temporary file called SPPO.

Program SP50 - Order Enquiry provides an optional scan by Purchase Order.

Ensure that you set the printers for SP and PO as described in SU30 as you can set two separate printers.

The data input is identical to SP10 - Order Entry, with the exception that it also calls SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DEMAND ORDER ENTRY SP19 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER FORM TYPE: [SP ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


ORDER FORM TYPE : SPxxAccept the default form type as specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance or change it as required. This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] duplicate orders will be printed side by side.



USER GUIDE

Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DEMAND ORDER ENTRY SP19 11/007CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CURRENCY CODE OPTION [4] 1 - LOCAL CURRENCY 2 - ORDER CURRENCY 3 - FORWARD COVER RATE (NOT AVAILABLE) 4 - TRANSACTION CURRENCY 5 - SELECT CURRENCY CODE AND RATE DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT






DETAILS OK? : Y/N

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 145

3.16 BRANCH ORDER ENTRY PROGRAMSThe following programs are used to create, amend and release Branch Orders.

These differ from normal orders in that they never become invoices. They would mainly be used to draw stock and generate a consignment note when stock is transferred from one branch/warehouse combination to another.

It also allows you to keep track of In-Transit stock. This mechanism operates as follows;

Enter the items to be transferred in SP20 - Branch Order Entry. The system will ensure that the product code entered exists in both the sending and the receiving branch.

When you run SP24 - Branch Order Release the stock will be deducted from the sending branch, but will NOT be added to the receiving branch. The details will be written to an In-Transit file. These in-transit records may be printed using program SP23 - Print Intransit Info.

When the stock is physically received at the receiving branch, you should use SP26 - Receive Inter Branch Transfers to identify the in-transit document and receive it. This will have the effect of updating stock in the receiving branch. If the exact quantity has been received, the record will also be deleted from the in-transit file.

Where the ending and receiving stock quantities differ, you will have to use program SP27 - Inter Branch Stock Balancing, to post adjustments and delete the details from the in-transit file.

SP28 - Branch Del. Note Print and Release calls SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print to print the branch transfer order and then call SP24 - Branch Order Release.

SP22 - Reverse A Transfer Out Transaction may be used to reverse a transaction which transfers items out.


USER GUIDE

3.16.1BRANCH ORDER ENTRY - SP20Orders from remote branches may be entered and amendments to these orders will be done using SP21 - Branch Order Review.

The orders may be released using SP24 - Branch Order Release.

Releasing a branch order will not create an invoice as in SP14 - Order Release.

The only difference between input for this program and that for program SP10 - Order Entry, is that a valid receiving branch and warehouse must be entered where applicable.

When you wish to record a transfer of stock to a branch/warehouse combination for which no inventory files are held on your computer system you may still do so. When the system detects that you have entered an invalid receiving branch, it will display 'REMOTE BRANCH' and allow you to continue.

When entering detail lines for such orders, you will get the message 'INVALID BR/WH ITEM'. Ensure that you do wish to use the Branch/Warehouse combination entered and press [Enter], you will be allowed to continue. When SP24 - Branch Order Release, is run for this type of record, only details for the sending branch will be updated and an in-transit record will not be created.

You may enter a default IBT account number in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.Orders of this type are prefixed with X where normal orders are prefixed with O.

You should also set up your starting number in SU32 - Numbers File Maintenance, type ‘n’ as this uses a separate range of numbers.

The reference number entered will be moved to the order number in IV50 – Enquiries if it is entered as 6 numeric digits, i.e. either the first or last 6 digits. If these are not numeric then the Internal order number is moved to the ORDER #.


SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 147

3.16.2BRANCH ORDER REVIEW - SP21Orders which were entered via SP20 - Branch Order Entry may be reviewed, amended and deleted.

The data input is identical to SP11 - Order Review.


Select the relevant transfer. A screen showing the details will display as shown below.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BRANCH ORDER REVIEW SP21 11/004 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN 01 WH : 01 - CENTRAL 02 ORDER# 002385 ACCOUNT # FAVCAV 9TH AVENUE REFE CUS ORD# DATE 98/03/10 PRODUCT INCLUSIVE ORDERED TO SUPPLY ON BO PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMT 001-1WB/WIT 46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER SPIRA 98/03/10 1.00 1.00 6666.0000 0 6666.00 Y F3-END, F4-CAT, F5-COST, F6-DELDATE, F8-DEL, F10-CUST, R-RES

Examine the status line for the options available.


USER GUIDE

3.16.3REVERSE A TRANSFER OUT - SP22This function allows you to reverse a transfer out transaction.


Select the required transfer order number. A screen will display as shown below.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CANCEL BRANCH ORDER RELEASE SP22 11/001 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN WH : 01 - CENTRAL TO QUANTITY QUANTITY SENDING INTRANS# PRODUCT # CO/BR/WH DATE SEND RECEIVED BALANCE 001706 001-1WB/WIT 46 01 01 02 1995/08/ 0.13 0.00 0.13 NARRATIVE [ ] DO YOU WANT TO REVERSE THIS ITEM? (Y/N) [Y] ESC-EXIT

Enter [Y] to the prompt. The transfer will be reversed.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 149

3.16.4PRINT IN TRANSIT INFO - SP23All or selected in-transfer documents may be printed using this program, depending on the selections you make. It will only print those in-transfer records captured in SP20 - Branch Order Entry, and created via SP24 - Branch Order Release.



Level 1

WAREHOUSE # : 2 digitsEnter the number of the warehouse for which you wish to extract information.

Level 2

This screen will display either 'RECEIVING BRANCH' or 'SENDING BRANCH'. By using the [F5] key, you may change this. You must indicate whether the information you wish to print, relates to a sending or receiving branch/warehouse combination.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - PRINT INTRANSIT INFO SP23 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALRECEIVING BRANCH INTRANSIT INFORMATION PRINT REQUEST =================================== ALL INTRANSIT INFO [Y] FROM BATCH # [ ] TO BATCH # [ ] FROM BR/WH [ / ] TO BR/WH [ / ] RECEIVED STATUS [ ] A - ALL INTRANS P - PARTIALLY RECEIVED

F5 - CHANGE SEQ, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

ALL INTRANSIT INFO [Y] : Y/N[Y] - will not allow you to enter any of the following range selections, but will cause the cursor to jump to the last prompt on this screen.


USER GUIDE

FROM BATCH # TO BATCH # : 6 digits

Enter the range of transfer documents you wish to print.

FROM BR/WH TO BR/WH : 2/2 digits

If you indicated that you wish to extract details for a sending branch, the entries made here will represent all branch/warehouses to which you have sent stock. If you have indicated that you wish to extract details as a receiving branch, the entries made here will represent all the branch/warehouses, which have sent stock to you.You may select a single branch/warehouse combination.

RECEIVED STATUS : 1 character[A] - will print all in-transit details pertaining to the selections you made.[P] - will print only those items where the quantity sent and received were not the same.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 151

3.16.5BRANCH ORDER RELEASE - SP24All or selected orders, captured via program SP20 - Branch Order Entry, may be released except those which require supervisor overrides of system detected violations as set up in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

This release will result in stock being updated in the sending branch and written to an In-Transit file, where it will remain until the receipt is recorded in SP26 - Receive Inter Branch Transfers for the receiving branch. An invoice record will NOT be created.

The In-transit file will be updated even if the stock item is invalid, provided the relevant option is set in SP00 - System record Maintenance. The data input is similar to SP14 - Order Release. However you may have to enter additional transport information if you indicated that you wish to do so in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

In addition this program can optionally create an invoice acknowledgement file provided this is specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance and the file defined in SP33 - Alternate Sequence.


TRANSPORT TYPE : 10 charactersYou may optionally enter the type of transport used for this consignment, for example 'TRUCK' or 'BY RAIL'.

TRANSPORT NUMBER : 30 charactersYou may use this field to uniquely identify the transport type. For example a truck number or a train identification, date and time.

DRIVER NAME : 20 charactersEnter a driver name if relevant.

TRANSPORT COMPANY : 6 characters.This must be a valid supplier code.If no number is entered, the debtor’s number from the header will be used.


USER GUIDE

The above data is also written to the In-Transit file and may be printed using the Report Writer.

Please note. The program will check for supersessions. If it finds a superseded item, this line will only be transferred to the receiving branch if the supersession warning was overridden in SP20 - Branch Order Entry or SP21 - Branch Order Review. If this is not the case, the item will not be transferred but a message will be printed on the audit trail. You will have to use program SP21 - Branch Order Review, to either override, or use the supersession. If the supersession does not exist in the receiving branch, a message will be printed on the audit trail. Please refer to Appendix A3 for more details.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 153

3.16.6BRANCH ORDER TO ORDER - SP25A branch order may be altered to a normal order, thus enabling invoicing instead of stock transfer to take place.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BRANCH ORDER TO ORDER SP25 11/084CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALORDER # [000001]ORDER - ORDER # SEQUENCE

ORDER# A/C # CUST ORD# DEL DATE BIN PRODUCT#O000001<-->1000 93/01/04X000005 2000 93/08/04X000006 2560 93/08/04O000033 1000 93/08/04O000055 1010 93/08/04O001688 1000 93/08/04

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN FILE, F5 - SEQUENCE, F10 - CO/BR

ORDER # : 6 digits.Enter or scan for the order number.

Use these function keys to scan the orders on file;

[F1] Scan the order file.

[F5] Change to an alternate scan sequence.

The branch orders are displayed with a prefix X to the order number.

Accept the required order and press [Enter]. The header will display and the system will alter the X to an O, thus making it an ordinary order.


USER GUIDE

3.16.7RECEIVE INTER BRANCH TRANSFERS - SP26This program allows branch orders created via SP20 - Branch Order Entry and released via SP24 - Branch Order Release, to be recorded as being received by the receiving branch/warehouse. The effect will be to remove the details from the In-Transit file and to update the stock for the receiving branch.

If the full quantity is not received, the record will not be deleted from the in-transit file and you will have to uses program SP27 - Inter Branch Stock Balancing, to effect the relevant adjustment

You will NOT be able to receive more than was sent.

If an invalid record is encountered and the relevant option is set in program SP00 - System record Maintenance, then the system will create the stock item before posting it.



Level 1

INTRANS# : 6 digitsYou may either enter a number or use the scan facility. The following details are displayed for each in-transit order;'From Co/Br/Wh', Order date, 'Transport Type' and 'Transport Number'.

You may accept a single order or use the [F7] key to mark orders for release and then use the [F10] key to enter the release options. These to keys operate exactly as they do in SP14 - Order Release. When individual orders are released, you will be required to enter the quantity received. When you select to receive all orders, or all marked orders, the system will assume that quantities received for all items are exactly as those sent.

An audit trail of the received data is produced. When all or marked orders have been selected, a second audit trail, containing only errors, will be produced.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 155

3.16.8INTER-BRANCH STOCK BALANCING - SP27This program allows you to delete un-reconciled items from the in-transit system. You will be allowed to affect adjustments in either the sending or the receiving branch. You may also enter a narration such as 'Lost' or 'Damaged', which will print on the resulting audit trail.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INTER BRANCH STOCK BALANCING SP27 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALWAREHOUSE # [01] CENTRALDETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F9 - PRINT OPTIONS, F10 - PREV, ESC - EXIT

WAREHOUSE # : 2 digitsEnter the number of the warehouse for which you wish to extract information.


USER GUIDE

Level 2

This screen will display either 'RECEIVING BRANCH' or 'SENDING BRANCH'. By using the [F5] key, you may change this. You must indicate whether you wish to affect the adjustment in the sending or receiving branch/warehouse combination.

Once you have made the appropriate selection you may use the [F1] key to scan all the in-transfer documents on file. Select the document which you wish to action. If NO stock has been received for an item you will be warned but may continue.

The item lines will be displayed one after the other. You may enter a 15 character narrative to indicate the nature of the adjustment.

This adjustment will have no effect on the stock balance as both a transfer and an adjustment record will be created at the same time. Both will be written to the inventory transaction file. The intransit record will be removed from the in-transit file.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INTER BRANCH STOCK BALANCING SP27 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRAL TO QUANTITY QUANTITY SENDINGINTRANS# PRODUCT # CO/BR/WH DATE SEND RECEIVED BALANCE000066 001-1WB/WIT 46 01 01 02 93/06/30 5.00 4.00 1.00 NARRATIVE [ ]DO YOU WANT TO PROCESS THIS ITEM? Y/N [Y]

ESC - EXIT

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 157

3.16.9BRANCH DEL. NOTE PRINT AND RELEASE - SP28This program allows you to print a Branch Delivery Note, and then releases the order as per SP24 - Branch Order Release.

The data input is similar to SP14 - Order Release.


BATCH ORDER ENTRY PROGRAMS

The following programs read pre-defined flat files that are used to enter orders and invoices.

Details of the flat files are given in the separate Flat File document.


USER GUIDE

3.17 BATCH ORDER UPDATE - SP40The program reads pre-defined input from a user created flat file and updates the Titan order file. Details of the input format are in the separate Flat File document.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BATCH ORDER CAPTURE SP40 11/003

ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE [ ]ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE [ ]WITH PRINT? (Y/N) [Y]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F9 - PRINT OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT

ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE : 8 characters

Enter the name of the flat file containing the order information. This will be written to the Batch Reference field.

ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE : 8 characters

Enter the name of the file to which detected errors should be written.

WITH PRINT? : Y/N.If [Y], SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print program will be invoked and an order will be printed.

Accept the details or enter the correct information. An input audit trail is also produced.

SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 159

3.18 BACK ORDERS TO PURCHASE ORDERS - SP41This program creates Purchase Orders from all back orders on file. The system moves the CANCEL BY DATE to the PROMISED BY DATE on the Purchase Order.


TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT STOCK ITEMS

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDERS TO PURCHASE ORDERS SP41 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALTEMPORARY AND PERMANENT STOCK ITEMSEXCEEDING MINIMUM QTY ORDER ONLY? (Y/N) [Y]

DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [N]


Please note that if the option is set in SP00 - System record Maintenance, then temporary stock items only may be ordered.

EXCEEDING MINIMUM QTY ORDER ONLY? : Y/N

If [Y] orders will be created only where the physical quantity is less than the minimum quantity.If [N] Purchase Orders will be created wherever quantity on order is less than physical stock.

Please note that the above option is not available for temporary items only,


USER GUIDE

3.19 FLAT FILE TAKE-ON FOR SP32 - SP42The program reads pre-defined input from a user created flat file and updates the discount file. This facility may be used where discounts have been captured at a remote branch on another system. Details of the input format are in the separate Flat File document.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - FLATFILE TAKEON FOR SP32 SP42 11/002 ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE [ ] ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE [ ] WITH PRINT? (Y/N) [Y] DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F9-PRT OPTS, ESC-EXIT


Enter the name of the flat file containing the discount information.



WITH PRINT? : Y/N.If [Y], a list of discounts input will be printed.


SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 161

3.20 BATCH INVOICE UPDATE - SP45The program reads pre-defined input from a user created flat file and updates the invoice file. This facility may be used where invoices or credit notes have been captured at a remote branch on another system. Details of the input format are in the separate Flat File document.

Please note that invoices and credit notes should be captured into separate batches. This is essential if you select the 'with print' option.

ORDER/INVOICE COMPARISON

The facility also exists to compare orders originally captured in program SP10 - Order Entry to invoices coming in via SP45 - Batch Invoice Capture. The system will compare all line items. Where the quantity invoiced is less than the quantity ordered the difference will be written away and may be print as lost sales in program SP72 - Exception Reports. The original order is always deleted.

For this option to work the following is required :

- Invoice and order numbers must be identical.

- The 'DELETE ORIGINAL ORDER' in SP00 - System Record Maintenance under SP45 parameters must be set to [Y].

- The original order and subsequent invoice must have the same number of lines and in exactly the same sequence.

Please note, this program takes no note of supersessions but uses the input as it stands.

Errors are output to an error file which may later be used as input. This may cause the system to find duplicate documents. However a warning will be displayed but he operator will be allowed to continue and the next available line number will be used and not the line number on the input file.



USER GUIDE

Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BATCH INVOICE CAPTURE SP45 11/007 ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE [ ] ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE [DEF_OUT ] WITH PRINT? (Y/N) [N] INV OR CRN? (I/C) [I] GENERATE CHECK DIGIT [N] VALIDATE FIRST? [Y] DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F9 - PRINT OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT

If the 'USE FROM AND TO FILENAMES' prompt in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, is set to [N], the following prompts will be displayed.


Enter the name of the flat file containing the invoice information. This will be written to the Batch Reference field.



WITH PRINT? : Y/N.If [Y] the SP70/71 - Invoice/Credit Note Print program will be invoked.

INV OR CRN? (I/C) : I/CEnter [I] for invoices and [C] for credit notes.

GENERATE CHECK DIGIT : Y/NIf you enter [Y] the system will generate a check digit for the item code. If [N] the code will be taken as is.

VALIDATE FIRST : Y/NIf you enter [Y], the system will validate the incoming data without updating the file, allowing you to make corrections before updating.


SP - Input JULY 2006 3 - 163

If the 'USE FROM AND TO FILENAMES' prompt in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, is set to [Y], the following prompts will be displayed.

ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE FROM : 5 characters/3 digits

Enter the first file name of the range of files to be processed. Please note the format of the name, for instance SPBAT001.

ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE TO : 5 characters/3 digits

Enter the last file name of the range of files to be processed.

ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE FROM : 5 characters/3 digits

Enter the name of the file to which the detected errors of the first input file should be written. Please note the format.

ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE TO : 5 characters/3 digits

Enter the name of the file to which the detected errors of the last input file should be written. Please note the format.

WITH PRINT? : Y/N.If [Y] program SP70 - Invoice Form Print/SP71 - Credit Note Form Print, will be invoked.

INV OR CRN? (I/C) : I/CEnter [I] for invoices and [C] for credit notes.



USER GUIDE

4.MAINTENANCE MODULE

4.1 THE MAINTENANCE MODULE MENUThis module consists of the following programs;

SP30 - INVOICE MAINTENANCE

SP31 - DELIVERY ADDRESS MAINTENANCE

SP32 - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX

SP33 - ALTERNATE SEQUENCE MAINTENANCE

SP34 - CREATE STANDING ORDERS

SP35 - REVIEW STANDING ORDERS

SP36 - RELEASE STANDING ORDERS

SP37 - COPY STANDING ORDER TO ORDER

SP38 - STANDING ORDER PRINT

SP39 - DELETION OF STANDING ORDERS

The Delivery Address Maintenance program is used to set up multiple delivery addresses for each customer and these may be printed on invoice and order documents.

The Discount/Price Matrix program allows the entry and maintenance of a full discount matrix, providing sets of discounts at both a customer and inventory item levels. In addition, time dependent discounts may be maintained for special promotions.

It also allows you to maintain a selling price matrix which will be applicable under certain circumstances.

The Alternate Sequence Maintenance program allows alternate sequences to be maintained for invoice history. The Report Writer may be used to print these records in the sequences set in this program.

The Standing Order programs SP34 - 39 allow you to create a standard order and release it into the system periodically, or alternatively, create a template for an order and then copy this template as and when required and alter it accordingly.

Enter SP3 to display the Maintenance Module menu.

SP - Maintenance JULY 2006 4 - 165

4.2 INVOICE MAINTENANCE - SP30This program allows you to make changes to invoice lines. Items such as References, Codes and Narratives may be changed.


Level 1

Scan for the required invoice and then select it. The system will display the invoice header and all details. There are various items which may be changed or added, amongst others a POD (Proof of Delivery) Date.

Press [F4] to change the overall sales category and [F6] to change the comments. Press [F3] to accept the header along with any changes made.

Level 2

All the invoice lines now display. Select the lone you require and enter [N] next to it. A window pops up as shown below. Make the required changes and press [F3] to update.

Press [F3] until your cursor is positioned for entry of the next invoice number. The system will effect the changes.


USER GUIDE

4.3 DELIVERY ADDRESS MAINTENANCE - SP31The program is used to add, amend and delete delivery address details. Each customer may have up to 9999 delivery addresses.

Delivery address changes are written to the CHANGES file. You should print these at month-end using SP88 - Delivery Address Changes Print and then clear them from the file using SP98 - Deliver Address Changes Cleardown.

Delivery address 0000 will always be presented on the screen. This relates to the address held on the Accounts Receivable Masterfile. However, additional information such as route code and narratives may be added.


Level 1

ACCOUNT # : 6 charactersEnter or scan for the number using [F1] to scan in customer number order or [F5] in alphabetic order.

Press [Enter] to proceed to Level 2.

DELIVERY ADDRESS # : 6 digits (2/4)The first two digits represent the warehouse which must be inserted if you selected to use this option in SP00 - System record Maintenance. If you did not select the option, the system will prefix your 4 digit code with “00”.When doing invoicing, the system will ensure that the delivery address code for the current warehouse is used.Press [F1] to scan all delivery addresses on file for the customer entered. To create a new delivery address enter the next number.


4.3.1 ADDING DELIVERY ADDRESSESEnter the following delivery address fields.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELIVERY ADDRESS SP31 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNACCOUNT # 1000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC.DELIVERY ADDRESS # [001] NAME [HOLCHER DARROLL INC ]ADDRESS #1 [23 MAIN ROAD WEST ]ADDRESS #2 [ATLANTA ]ADDRESS #3 [ ]ADDRESS #4 [ ] [GA 30341 ]REFERENCE [REF 88 ]NARRATIVE [STORE OPENS ] MASTERFILEAREA [10 ] SOUTHERN SUBURBS 42SALESMAN [0010] JACK WALTERS 0010ROUTE [0010] SOUTHERN SUBURBSDISCOUNT CODE [ ] #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7DELIVERY DETAILS CODES: [2 ] [3 ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]CONTACT NAMEF3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - A/C #, ESC - EXIT

NAME : 30 characters

ADDRESS # 1 : 30 characters




POST CODE : 15 charactersThe title for this prompt is set up in program SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 4, in the first 'User Terminology' field for the Sales Order Processing system.

REFERENCE : 8 charactersThis reference will be taken through to the Accounts Receivable system and may optionally be printed on statements. This is used for instance where Head Office accounting is used, and then this reference will indicate which branch was involved in the transaction.

NARRATIVE : 30 characters For standard delivery instruction details, for example - 'No deliveries after 4 pm.'


USER GUIDE

AREA : 4 charactersEnter the area for this delivery address. Leave it blank if the customer's default area code is to be used. This default is displayed on the right hand side of this prompt. Area codes and their descriptions are set up in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type AR.

SALESMAN : 4 charactersEnter the code for this delivery address. Leave it blank if the customer's default salesman's code is to be used. This default is displayed on the right hand side of this prompt. Salesman codes and descriptions are set up in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type RP.

ROUTE : 4 charactersEnter the route code for this delivery address or leave it blank. Route codes and descriptions are set up in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type RC.

DISCOUNT CODE : 4 charactersIf you enter a code here and then the same code in SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix option 1 or 5, the system will ensure that the same customer gets different discounts for different delivery addresses. The use of this field is optional.

DELIVERY DETAILS CODES #1 - #7 : 4 characters

Enter the code for these delivery detail codes. The codes and their descriptions are set up in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under types D1 - D7. Please refer to that User Guide for more information.

CONTACT NAME : 30 charactersEnter a contact name for this delivery address.

Press [F3] to update the delivery address file. Continue entering delivery addresses for this customer. To switch to another customer, press [F10] after updating the delivery address.


4.3.2 AMENDING DELIVERY ADDRESSESOn entering the customer number, the first customer address is displayed. The number and the delivery address are displayed, followed by the next available delivery address.

Press [F3] to update the delivery address file. Continue altering delivery addresses for this customer. To move on to another customer, press [F10] after updating the delivery address.

[Esc] ends the program and returns to the menu.

4.3.3 DELETING DELIVERY ADDRESSESAfter entering the customer number or scanning for the customer, the first customer address is displayed. The display shows the number of the delivery address displayed and the next available delivery address number.

Press [F8] to delete delivery addresses. The status line changes :If [F1] is pressed it will delete the address on the screen and [F8] will delete all delivery addresses for the current customer.

Continue deleting delivery addresses for this customer. To switch to another customer, press [F10] after deleting the delivery address.

Press [Esc] to end the program and return to the menu.

UNLESS you enter [N] when the scroll up message appears when you delete a specific delivery address, all subsequent delivery addresses for that customer will be decreased by one. For example, if a customer has 12 delivery addresses on file and address number 8 is deleted, addresses 9 to 12 will become 8 to 11 respectively.


USER GUIDE

4.4 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX - SP32The program maintains the Discount File and enables you to set up and maintain a discount and selling price matrix within the Accounts Receivable and Inventory systems.

The terms discount and surcharge are inter-changeable. A negative discount may be entered at any time thus functioning as a surcharge.

Enter SP32 to select the program.Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP32 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNDISCOUNT TYPE [1] 1 - PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISC 2 - QUANTITY DISC 3 - VALUE DISC 4 - OVERALL DISC 5 - TIME DEPENDENT DISC 6 - PRICE MATRIX 7 - QUANTITY PRICING


DISCOUNT TYPE : [1] Product/Customer[2] Quantity [3] Value [4] Overall [5] Time dependent [6] Price matrix[7] Quantity Pricing

Each discount type is described in detail on the following pages.


4.4.1 PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISCOUNTPress [Enter] to select the product/customer discount option.

Any number of combinations of the following may be set up;

Customer group/product group or

Customer group/product or

Customer/product group or

Customer/product.

According to the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance Sales Categories may be used instead of Product Groups.

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP32 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISCCUSTOMER GROUP [0010] PRODUCT GROUP [ ] OR ORCUSTOMER [ ] PRODUCT [ ]DISCOUNT CODE [A45 ] DISC# DISC % + AMOUNT REF REF DESCRIPTION 01 5.0000 0.2000 1 NORMAL DSCOUNT 02 10.0000 0.0000 2 GOVERNMENT ORDER 03 12.5000 0.0000 3 SPECIAL PROMOTION 04 0.0000 0.0000 05 0.0000 0.0000 06 0.0000 0.0000 07 0.0000 0.0000 08 0.0000 0.0000 09 0.0000 0.0000 10 0.0000 0.0000

F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - SELECTION, ESC - EXIT

CUSTOMER GROUP : 4 charactersEnter a valid customer group to which customer/inventory discounts apply or leave blank.Customer groups are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type DG. These groups are also entered on the customer masterfile in program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance.

CUSTOMER : 6 charactersEnter a valid customer to which customer/inventory discounts apply. If a customer/customer group is not entered, this discount will apply to all customers for this branch. If you enter a valid customer the name will display.


USER GUIDE

PRODUCT GROUP/CATEGORY CODES : 4 characters

Product Groups are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type PG. Sales Categories are maintained in program AR32 - Category File Maintenance. They are also entered in program IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance.

PRODUCT FROM - TO : 15 charactersIf a Product Group/category code is not entered, and a product code is not entered, this discount will apply to all products for this branch. If you enter a valid product code, the description will display. If you enter details in both the from and to fields, all the products within that range will have the same discount details. Where changes are made, the details for the first selected product will display.

Press [F1] or [F2] to scan forwards or backwards through the relevant files or press [F5] to scan by alpha code on the customer file and by internal number on the inventory file.

DISCOUNT CODE : 4 charactersThis is an optional field and is used where a different discount structure is required for different delivery addresses. SP31 - Delivery Address allows a discount code to be attached to each delivery address. This same code is then entered here. The use of this facility is optional.

DISC % : 3.4 digitsUp to ten discount rates may be set for each combination.

+ AMOUNT : 7.4 digitsUp to ten discount amounts may be entered for each combination. This value is per item invoiced and will be multiplied by the number of items on each invoice line to which this applies.

The discount applied will be a combination of these two entries. If both these fields are entered, they will be cumulative.


REF : 4 charactersThis may also be entered on program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type DS. (May be printed on invoices and order documents).

DESCRIPTION : 30 charactersThe description associated with the reference above. (May also optionally be printed on invoices and order documents).

FUNCTION KEY FACILITIES[F3] To update the file.[F8] To delete the discount level.[F10] To enter a new selection.[Esc] To return to the menu.

Continue until all combinations have been completed.


USER GUIDE

4.4.2 PRODUCT QUANTITY DISCOUNTDifferent discounts may apply depending on the quantities bought.

Enter [2] to select this option and use the function keys to scan the files.

Press [F1] or [F2] to scan forwards or backwards through the relevant files, or [F5] to scan by internal number on the inventory file.

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP32 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN QUANTITY DISC PRODUCT SALES CAT [1000] OR PRODUCT FROM [ ] TO [ ] QUANTITY > DISC % + AMOUNT REF REF DESCRIPTION 5.0000 2.0000 0.0000 REF1 NORMAL DISCOUNT 10.0000 2.5000 0.0000 REF2 GOVERNMENT ORDER 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 F1 - SCAN, F10 - DISCOUNT SELECTION, ESC - EXIT

PRODUCT GROUP/SALES CATEGORY : Enter a valid Product Group or Sales Category to which

quantity discounts apply.Product Groups are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type PG. Sales Categories are set up and maintained in program AR32 - Category File Maintenance.These groups and categories are also entered in program IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance.

PRODUCT : 15 charactersIf a Product Group/category code is not entered, and a product code is not entered, this discount will apply to all products for this branch. If you enter a valid product code, the description will display.


Level 3

Enter the following for as many of the ten options that may be applicable;

QUANTITY> : 7.4 digitsAs soon as a customer orders or buys this quantity on a single order or invoice item line, the associated discount rate will be applied. When the next quantity entered is reached, a higher discount will apply.

DISC % : 3.4 digitsDiscount percentage applicable to the quantity entered above.

+ AMOUNT : 7.4 digitsUp to ten discount values may be entered for each combination. This value is per item invoiced and will be multiplied by the number of items on each invoice line to which this applies.

If both these fields are entered, they will be cumulative.

REF : 4 charactersMay be printed on invoices and order documents.

DESCRIPTION : 30 charactersDescription associated with the reference above, may optionally be printed on invoices and order documents.




USER GUIDE

4.4.3 VALUE DISCOUNTDifferent discounts may apply depending on the value of a sale. The discount applicable should be entered using this option.

Enter [3] to select this option.

The files may be scanned using the function keys. Press [F1] or [F2] to scan forwards or backwards through the relevant files, or [F5] to scan by internal number on the inventory file.

Level 2


value discounts apply.Product Groups are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type PG. Sales Categories are set up and maintained in program AR32 - Category File Maintenance.These groups and categories are also entered in program IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance .


Enter the following for as many of the ten options as are applicable;

AMOUNT : 7.4 digitsAs soon as a customer orders or buys for this amount on a single order or invoice item line, the associated discount rate will be applied. When the next amount entered is reached, a higher discount will apply.

DISC % : 3.4 digitsDiscount percentage applicable to the amount entered above.





DESCRIPTION : 30 charactersDescription associated with the reference above. (May also be optionally printed on invoices and order documents).




USER GUIDE

4.4.4 OVERALL DISCOUNTLevel 2

In addition to discounts applied to line items, some customers may receive an additional overall discount. Enter [4] to select this option.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP32 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN OVERALL DISCCUSTOMER GROUP [0010] ORCUSTOMER [ ] DISC# DISC % REF REF DESCRIPTION 01 2.5000 REF1 NORMAL DISCOUNT 02 3.0000 REF2 GOVERNMENT ORDER 03 5.0000 REF3 SPECIAL PROMOTION 04 0.0000 05 0.0000 06 0.0000 07 0.0000 08 0.0000 09 0.0000 10 0.0000




DISC # : 2 digitsThese numbers are specified as defaults in program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance.

DISC % : 3.4 digitsDiscount percentage applicable to the customer or customer group entered above.






Any changes made to overall discount will be reflected in the report produced by AR71 - Customer File Changes Print in the Accounts Receivable system.


USER GUIDE

4.4.5 TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTSCertain time dependent discounts may be applicable to special promotions. The ordering/invoicing programs will check the document date and select the appropriate discount. Where an overlap of dates is found, the highest rate for the overlapping period will be used.

Any number of combinations of the following may be set up;

customer group/product group or

customer group/product or

customer/product group or

customer/product

According to the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, Sales Categories may be used instead of Product Groups.

Level 2







Press [F1] or [F2] to scan forwards or backwards through the relevant files.

Press [F5] to scan by alpha code on the customer file and by internal number on the inventory file.

DISCOUNT CODE : 4 charactersThis is an optional field and is used where a different discount structure is required for different delivery addresses. SP31 - Delivery Address allows a discount code to be attached to each delivery address. This code is then entered here. This facility is optional.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP32 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN TIME DEPENDENT DISCCUSTOMER GROUP [ ] PRODUCT GROUP [0020] OR ORCUSTOMER [1000 ] PRODUCT [ ]DISCOUNT CODE [D876] FROM TO DISC % + AMOUNT REF REF DESCRIPTION[93/01/01][93/01/31] 2.5000 0.0000 REF4 NEW YEAR PROMOTION[93/02/10][93/02/15] 5.0000 0.0000 REF5 ST VALENTINES PROMOTION[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 0.0000


FROM/TO DATE : DD/MM/CCYY.Date range during which the discount will apply.

DISC % : 3.4 digitsUp to ten discount rates may be set for each combination.




USER GUIDE



FUNCTION KEY FACILITIES[F3] To update the file.[F8] To delete the discount level.[F8]Repeat

If the whole record is to be deleted [F8] must be pressed again.

[Enter] If a single line only is to be deleted and subsequent lines "rolled' upwards, [Enter] should be pressed.

[Esc] To return to the menu.



4.4.6 PRICE MATRIXThe prices entered in this program will be used in preference to those held on the inventory masterfiles when the 'NET' indicator as entered in program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance, is set to either [Y], or [G].

These prices are exclusive/inclusive of tax depending on the option set in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance. Any number of combinations of the following may be set up;

customer group/product or

customer/product

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP32 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PRICE MATRIXCUSTOMER GROUP [0010] ORCUSTOMER [ ] PRODUCT [001-1WB/WIT 46 ] FROM TO PRICE[93/01/01][93/01/31] 34.5500[93/02/01][93/06/30] 36.0000[93/07/01][93/07/31] 29.9500[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000[00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000


CUSTOMER GROUP : 4 charactersEnter a valid customer group to which customer/selling prices apply or leave blank.Customer groups are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type DG. These groups are also entered on the customer masterfile in program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance.

CUSTOMER : 6 charactersEnter a valid customer to which customer/selling prices apply. If a customer/customer group is not entered, this selling price apply to all customers for this branch. If you enter a valid customer the name will display.

PRODUCT : 15 charactersIf a product code is not entered, this selling price will apply to all products for this branch. If you enter a valid product code, the description will display.


USER GUIDE

Press [F1] or [F2] to scan forwards or backwards through the relevant files.

Press [F5] to scan by alpha code on the customer file and by internal number on the inventory file.

FROM/TO DATE : DD/MM/CCYY.The date range during which the selling price will apply.For prices which are NOT time dependent use a range of 01/01/01 to 31/12/99.

PRICE : 7.4 digitsUp to 10 time dependent selling prices may be entered.

FUNCTION KEY FACILITIES[F3] To update the file.[F8] To delete the selling price level.[F8]Repeat

If the whole record is to be deleted [F8] must be pressed again.

[Enter] If a single line only is to be deleted and subsequent lines "rolled' upwards, [Enter] should be pressed.

[Esc] To return to the menu.



4.4.7 QUANTITY PRICINGServices may be charged out at a fixed amount plus an amount per quantity exceeding a minimum quantity.

The values entered in this program will be used in preference to those held on the inventory masterfiles when the 'NET' indicator as entered in program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance, is set to [Q].

These prices are exclusive or inclusive of tax depending on the option set in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance. Any number of combinations of the following may be set up;

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP32 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISC AR GROUP [0010] PRODUCT SALES CAT [ ] OR OR CUSTOMER [ ] PRODUCT FROM [ ] TO [ ] DISCOUNT CODE [ ] DISC# DISC % + AMOUNT REF REF DESCRIPTION 01 2.5000 10.0000 REF3 SPECIAL PROMOTION 02 0.0000 0.0000 03 0.0000 0.0000 04 0.0000 0.0000 05 0.0000 0.0000 06 0.0000 0.0000 07 0.0000 0.0000 08 0.0000 0.0000 09 0.0000 0.0000 10 0.0000 0.0000 F1 - SCAN, F10 - DISCOUNT SELECTION, ESC - EXIT

CUSTOMER GROUP : 4 charactersEnter a valid customer group to which customer/selling prices apply or leave blank.Customer groups are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type DG. These groups are also entered on the customer masterfile in program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance.

CUSTOMER : 6 charactersEnter a valid customer to which customer/selling prices apply. If a customer/customer group is not entered, this selling price apply to all customers for this branch. If you enter a valid customer the name will display.


USER GUIDE




The three fields described below may occur five times. The record used will depend on the price number entered for the customer in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance.

0-QUANTITY : 7.4 digitsEnter the minimum quantity for which the fixed amount will be levied.

* AMT : 3.4 digitsEnter the amount to be levied per quantity which exceeds the minimum quantity.

+ AMOUNT : 7.4 digitsEnter the fixed amount

An example of how the above will be used is that if a customer purchases any quantity between 0 and 5, he will be charged a fixed rate of R12.00. Any quantity above 5, will be charged at the fixed rate plus the quantity over five multiplied by the ‘* AMT’.


4.5 ALTERNATE SEQUENCE MAINTENANCE - SP33The program allows alternate sequences to be maintained for orders, back orders, invoices and invoice history. The alternate key is held on the file INVALTF.

SP10 Order Entry optionally creates alternate keys for orders and back orders.

SP13 If a special alternate key is created, using up to 8 fields, and this key is entered in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, then a memo window will display these fields for each order line as they are displayed.

Remember to set the ‘ALL TRANSACTIONS’ option to [N].

SP14 and SP24

Optionally create alternate keys for invoices as well as an optional ASCII file to be used as an invoice acknowledgement file.

SP15 to SP18

Optionally create alternate keys for invoices and credit notes

SP37 Optionally create alternate keys for orders


SP45 Optionally create alternate keys for invoices and credit notes

SP57 Optionally scans invoices in alternate sequence.

SP61 Optionally create alternate keys for backorders

SP67 Optionally prints back orders in alternate sequence.

SP69 Optionally releases back orders in alternate sequence.

SP70 Optionally prints a consolidated picking slip across Companies and Branches. In order to achieve this set up a sequence for invoice details for Company/Branch 00/00, that is do not select company and branch as part of your new key. You may then also select to print the Company name and invoice number in the body of the invoice in SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance, form type [IV].

SP77 (Form type SP). May use the alternate sequence

SP79 This may report on order history in alternate sequence.


SP91 Update Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis optionally creates a history file if the indicator is set in the System Parameter File.

SP93 Optionally create alternate keys for backorders


AP96 Allow the deletion of orders in alternate sequence.

The Report Writer may be used to print these records in the sequences set in this program. Program SP67 - Back Order Report prints the back orders in any selected sequence.



USER GUIDE

Level 1

ALES ORDER PROCESSING - ALTERNATE SEQUENCE SP33 11/004CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNENTER FILE FOR ALTERNATE SEQUENCES [1] 1 - ORDERS DETAILS FILE 2 - BACK-ORDERS DETAILS FILE 3 - INVOICE DETAILS FILE 4 - INVOICE HISTORY FILE

F3 - ACCEPT, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

ENTER FILE FOR ALTERNATE SEQUENCES : [1] Orders Details file

[2] Back-orders Details file[3] Invoice Details file[4] Invoice History FileEnter required file for which an alternate sequence is to be defined.

Please note, that option 3 may also be used to specify the layout of the ASCII file which may optionally be created by SP14 or SP24. Please refer to SP00 for more information regarding this feature.


Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ALTERNATE SEQUENCE SP33 11/001 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ALTERNATE SEQUENCE BOCU DESCRIPTION [ACCUMULATIVE BACK ORDER ] HIERARCHY OF OPTIONS FOR ALTERNATE SEQUENCE : HIGH PART 1 [ 1] 01 COMPANY 11 BIN LOC PART 2 [ 2] 02 BRANCH 12 AR GROUP PART 3 [ 3] 03 WAREHOUSE 13 AREA PART 4 [ 7] 04 SUPPLIER CODE 14 SALESMAN PART 5 [21] 05 TRANSACTION TYPE 15 SA CODE 1 PART 6 [ 0] 06 ORDER # 16 SA CODE 2 PART 7 [00] 07 CUSTOMER # 17 ROUTE CODE LOW PART 8 [00] 08 REFERENCE 18 DELIVERY # 09 CUSTOMER ORDER # 19 DELIVERY ADDRESS 10 DATE 20 DELIVERY METHOD ALL TRANSACTIONS? [Y] DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F1 - DIV, F3 - UPDATE, F5 - TOGGLE OPTS, F8 - DELETE, F10 - PREV, ESC - EXIT

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE : 4 charactersEnter a code for the alternate sequence to be created.

DESCRIPTION : Up to 30 CharactersEnter the description to be associated with the alternate sequence.


USER GUIDE

HIERARCHY OF OPTIONSFOR ALTERNATE SEQUENCE

PART 1 TO 8 : 2 digits

EXAMPLEThese 8 fields constitute the possible components of the alternate key.Enter the number associated with the component in each of the fields. For example, if an alternate key is to consist of the following 5 components (Company, Branch, Warehouse, Customer # and Product Code in Figure 4-9) the entries will be as follows:

Part 1 : 01Part 2 : 02Part 3 : 03Part 4 : 07Part 5 : 21

Where Part 1 is the highest level of sequencing and Part 4 the lowest level (or least important sequence).If required, all or none of the components may be user-defined.The maximum length of the alternate key is 34 characters.

If [F8] is pressed here, all transactions allocated to this code, as well as the code (set up) will be deleted.

ALL TRANSACTIONS? : Y/N.[Y] If alternate sequence applies to all transactions and the alternate sequence will be updated on-line by any programs updating any one of the following files, ORDERS, BORDERS, INVFIL, INVHIST.

If you are using this program to specify the layout of the ASCII file to be created by SP14 or SP24, this should always be [N]

Accept the entries to proceed to the next level.

If the fields you have selected have a combined length of more that 34 characters, the system will warn you of this. The only time you should continue is when you are creating the code to be used for the creation of the ASCII file which may optionally be created by SP14 and SP24.

Press [F5] to toggle the display and view additional options


Level 3

This level defines the start positions and lengths of the components of the alternate key as defined at Level 1. Each of these components may be optionally validated against a pre-defined description type set up in the Description File.

ALTERNATE KEY SET UP

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ALTERNATE SEQUENCE SP33 11/008CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 01ALTERNATE SEQUENCE BOCU ACCUMULATIVE BACK ORDERALTERNATE KEY SET UP : START POSITION LENGTH DESCRIPTION TYPE ALPHA/NUMCOMPANY 01 02 [ ] NBRANCH 03 02 [ ] NWAREHOUSE 05 02 [WH] NCUSTOMER # 07 06 [ ] APRODUCT 13 15 [ ] A

F1 - INVOICES, F3 - UPDATE, F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT

START POSITION : 2 digitsMandatory for as many components as defined at the previous level. Indicates the start position of each of the components of the code.

LENGTH : 2 digitsMandatory if a start position has been entered. Indicates the length of the component and may not exceed 30 characters The sum of all the components including any blanks may not exceed 30 characters.

DESCRIPTION TYPE : 2 charactersOptional if a description is to be attached to the component, enter the description type here. The description code must be present in the descriptions (DESCRIP - SU31) or in the reference (SUREF - SU41) file when entering alternate codes as all entries are validated.


USER GUIDE

ALPHA/NUM : A or N.If a component is defined as being numeric (N) this will be validated at all stages.

If you are setting up the details for the ASCII file which may optionally be created by SP14 or SP24, you should leave a space between each element of the key if you specified a delimiter in SP00 - System Record Maintenance .

Press [F1] to proceed to the next level. If you selected either option [1], [3] or [4] when selecting the file to be read, the following will be displayed and you will be required to make a selection.

COMPANY/BRANCH : 2 digits/2 digits

Accept the default or change the data.TRANSACTION TYPE : 1 digit

[1] - Invoices[2] - Credit Notes[3] - Invoices from Job Costing[4] - Credit Notes from Job CostingOnly the transaction type selected above will be extracted for reporting purposes.

Press [F1] to select which records are to be linked to the current alternate key.


Level 4

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ALTERNATE SEQUENCE SP33 11/022CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN BACK-ORDERS DETAILS FILEALTERNATE SEQUENCE BOCU ACCUMULATIVE BACK ORDERORDER # FROM [001694] TO [001694]ALTERNATE CODE [1 01011000 0002 ] ALTERNATE KEY SCANCO/BR/ORDER#/LINE# ALTERNATE CODE CUST# PRODUCT01/01/001711-0001<-->0101011000 0002 1000 000201/01/001712-0001 0101011000 0002 1000 000201/01/001705-0004 0101011000 0005 1000 000501/01/001706-0001 0101011010 0001 1010 000101/01/001706-0002 0101011010 0002 1010 000201/01/001706-0004 0101011010 0005 1010 000501/01/001707-0003 0101011020 0001 1020 000101/01/001694-0002 0101011020 0002 1020 000201/01/001707-0004 0101011020 0002 1020 000201/01/001707-0001 0101011020 0007 1020 000701/01/001713-0001 0101011400 0001 1400 0001F1 - SCAN FWD, F3 - UPDATE, F5 - SEQ, F6 - SCAN CODES, F8 - DELETE

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE #FROM - TO : The length is user-defined in program SP33 -

Alternate Sequence.Enter or scan for the alternate sequence number using [F1] to scan in the selected alternate scan sequence and [F5] to toggle the scan between alternate sequence and order number sequence.

All the records selected will be linked to the newly defined alternate sequence.


USER GUIDE

4.6 CREATE STANDING ORDERS - SP34This program allows you to create a standard order and release it into the system periodically, or alternatively, create a template for an order and then copy this template as and when required and alter it accordingly. Standing orders are not numbered automatically, you may enter your own range of numbers which are more meaningful for the type of template or standing order being created.

Enter SP34 to select this program.

ORDER ANALYSIS



CONSIGNMENT? (Y/N) : Y/NIf you enter [Y], the stock will be allocated immediately and you will not have to allocate it later when you have copied this standing order to an order.



Level 1

ACCOUNT # : 6 charactersEnter the number or scan the file. Press [F1] to begin a scan in account number sequence or [F5] for an alphabetic scan.

The customer numbers, alpha codes, customer account names and address are displayed. Press [F1] to continue the scan. Press [F2] to return to the previous page. Press [Enter] to accept the selection or entry.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREATE STANDING ORDERS SP34 11/065CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED STD# [ 31]BR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALACCOUNT # 1000 REF # [REF 6P9 ] CUS ORD# [334-987 ] INVOICE NAME/ADDRESS DELIVERY NAME/ADDRESSHOLCHER DARROLL INC. [HOLCHER DARROLL INC. ]414 MARIETTA STREET [414 MARIETTA STREET ]ATLANTA [ATLANTA ] [ ]GA 30341 [ ] AREA 42 [GA 30341 ] DEL REF [ ] DISC ROUTE CODE [ ]AR GROUP [0000] SUNDRY DEBTORS DELIVERY ADDRESS # [000]SALESMAN [0010] JACK WALTERS INVOICE ADDRESS 000S.A. CODE 1 [ ] LOOP THRU 001-998S.A. CODE 2 [ ] INPUT ADDRESS 999TAX #: 456555544584TAX RATE # [1] 10% VAT DATE DELIVERY REQD [93/03/10]PRICE # [01] PAYMENT METHOD [1 ] ON ACCOUNTDISCOUNT # [01] OVERALL% [ 0.0000 ] DELIVERY METHOD [1 ] PER VANTERMS [0010] STANDARD TERMS AGE PERIOD [10] CURRENTALT. FORM # [N] F3 - ACCEPT, F10 - CUST#, ESC - EXIT

Level 2

The initial order entry screen is displayed with the cursor positioned for entry of the first field specified in the jump table in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

STD# : 7 digitsEnter you own standing order number as required.

Any of these fields are optionally available for entry depending on this selection.

MOTIVE : 8 charactersThis option is only available if the option is set in SP10 - Order Entry

REF # : 8 charactersEnter a meaningful reference if required.

CUS ORD# : 10 charactersEnter a customer order number if provided.


USER GUIDE

AR GROUP : 4 charactersDisplayed from the Accounts Receivable masterfile but may be altered. Customer groups are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type DG.

SALESMAN : 4 charactersDisplayed from the Accounts Receivable masterfile or from the delivery address but may be altered. Salesmen codes are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type RP.

S.A. CODE 1 : 4 charactersPress [Enter] to leave this field blank or enter a sales analysis code. These codes are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type S1.

S.A. CODE 2 : 4 charactersIf the option was selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, this will default to the first four characters of the USER NAME.Press [Enter] to leave this field blank or enter a sales analysis code. These codes are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type S2.

Sales analysis codes are used to give additional user-defined segmentation of sales in the Sales Analysis system.

TAX # : Display only.Displayed from the customer masterfile. If no tax number is present, the customer will be charged. If SP00 - System Record Maintenance specifies that zero tax is allowed this may be overridden to zero.

TAX RATE # : 1 digitThe tax rate applicable to this customer is displayed but may be altered or overridden by an SA# 1 code with different defaults. The rates are entered in program SU30 - Installation Maintenance at the installation stage.(NOT applicable to customers with tax numbers).


PRICE # : 2 digitsThe default price code for this customer is displayed from the masterfile, but may be altered or overridden by an SA# 1 code with different defaults. Enter a number from 1 to 5. (or limit set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance)A supervisor override may be required if specified in SP00.

DISCOUNT # : 2 digitsThe default discount number for this customer is displayed from the masterfile, but may be altered. Enter a number from 1 to 10. (or limit set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance)A supervisor override may be required if specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

OVERALL % : 3.2 digitsDisplayed from the customer masterfile, but a different percentage may be entered.A supervisor override may be required if specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

TERMS : 4 charactersThe terms code for this customer is displayed from the masterfile, but may be altered. Press [F1] to scan the available terms codes.

ROUTE CODE : 4 charactersEnter a route code number or press [F1] to scan the available codes. Press [Enter] to accept the route number displayed.Route numbers are defined in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under description type RC.The route number may be stored with the delivery address (refer to program SP31 - Delivery Address).


USER GUIDE

DELIVERY ADDRESS # : 4 digitsAccept the default address [INVOICE ADDRESS 0000 by pressing [Enter] or enter the following;[LOOP THRU ADDRESS 0001-9998] by entering a number and the message "OK?" Y/N will appear.If [Y] is entered the delivery address corresponding to that number and currently displayed on the screen will be accepted.If [N] is entered the next address on file will be displayed.If 9999 is entered a manual address may be entered (the system will prompt for the address to be saved on file if required, and if so it will be given the next available address number on the delivery address file).If not, it is saved in #9999 and then there can be no subsequent #9999 saved in this run for this customer.

DATE DELIVERY REQD : DD/MM/CCYY.The program pre-loads the current system date, enter another date if required.

CANCEL BY : DD/MM/CCYYThis defaults to zero but if you enter a date here you will be able to delete orders according to this date via program SP95 - Deletion of Orders.

PAYMENT METHOD : 4 charactersThe method of payment is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type PM.

DELIVERY METHOD : 4 charactersThe method of delivery is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type DI.

AGE PERIOD : 2 digitsThe system defaults to the current period. A change to this field will not have any effect on the order program. It is only intended for use on the credit note header and it is strongly recommended that this field be left out of the jump table relating to orders and invoices.


ALT. FORM # : Y/N.If [Y] is entered the alternate form entered in SP00 - System Record Maintenance will be attached to this order and will be used by program SP78 - Order Release and Pint.

HEADER OK? : Y/NPress [Enter] to accept the displayed information. Enter [N] to alter data already entered.

Use the <Down arrow> or <Up arrow> keys to move to the default fields.

The [F3] key may be pressed at any stage and the cursor will move to the above field. It is not necessary to enter all the fields specified on the jump table.

The order may be deleted at this point by pressing [Esc].The capture of detail lines are exactly as that for SP10 - Order Entry, please refer to that section of this user guide for details.


USER GUIDE

4.7 REVIEW STANDING ORDERS - SP35This program allows you to edit or add to the standing order created in SP34 - Create Standing Orders. Once a standing order has been released to an invoice via SP36 - Release Standing Orders, then no further changes can be made to that invoice. (Should standing orders need to be copied and then altered, use SP37 - Copy Standing Order to Order to copy the order and SP11 - Order Review to alter the order as required).



4.8 RELEASE STANDING ORDERS - SP36Use this program to release standing orders directly to invoicing. Once a standing order has been released to this program as an invoice it may not be amended. The system will check for sufficient stock, and if insufficient, as the system cannot write the data to a back order, a message will be displayed on screen and this line will not be included in the invoice.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - RELEASE STANDING ORDERS SP36 11/012CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER # [1 ]ORDER# CUST# CUST ORD# DEL DATE000001<-->1010 92/02/19000002 1020 92/02/19000003 1030 92/02/19

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN FILE, F5 - CHANGE SEQ, F7 - MARK, F10 - REL OPT

ORDER # : 6 digits.Press [Enter], [F1] to scan the order number file or [F5] to change to an alternate scan sequence.

Press [F7] to mark the order for release and [F10] for the release option.

Orders may be released for invoicing in 3 ways.(A) A single selected order.(B) All orders ready for release.(C) All marked orders ready for release.

The status line displays the options available.

Press [F5] for the following scan sequences.Customer numberCustomer order numberDelivery dateProductBin location

To mark the individual orders for release, place the cursor on the required order and press [F7]. Use the [F10] key to go to the next level.


USER GUIDE

Level 2

RELEASE ALL ORDERS? : [Y] Will release all orders.[M] Will released marked only.[N] Will return to previous level for re-selection.

Level 3

ORDER # : 6 digitsEnter the order to be released or scan the order file using [F1]. Use [F5] to change the scan sequence.

Press [Enter] to accept the release of that order.





4.9 COPY STANDING ORDER TO ORDER - SP37This program will copy the details of the standing order to a new order and you may use SP11 - Order Review to alter or delete the order as required. This program also checks for sufficient stock, and if insufficient then options are selected as per SP10 - Order Entry except that alternate stock option is not allowed. Should an alternate item be required, this can be entered via SP11 - Order Review once the standing order has been copied to an order.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - COPY STANDING ORDER TO ORDER SP37 11/004CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNCOPYING STD ORDER..000002 1020

F1 - CHANGE CUSTOMER, F10 - PREV. SCREEN

ORDER # : 6 digits.Press [Enter], [F1] to scan the order number file or [F5] to change to an alternate scan sequence.

Once you have selected a Standing Order the program allows you to change the customer number (which cannot be changed in SP11 - Order Review), by entering [F1] however, if it is changed then you must return to SP11 and review the rest of the header details to ensure that they are correct for this customer.


USER GUIDE

ORDER ANALYSIS



ALLOCATE STOCK? (Y/N) : Y/NIf you enter [Y], the stock will be allocated immediately and you will not have to allocate it later when you have copied this standing order to an order.



4.10 STANDING ORDER PRINT - SP38This program will print selected standing orders according to a user-defined form set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - STANDING ORDER PRINT SP38 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER FORM TYPE: [SP ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


ORDER FORM TYPE : SPxxEnter the required form type. This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] duplicate orders will be printed side by side.



USER GUIDE

Level 2




DETAILS OK? : Y/N

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - STANDING ORDER PRINT SP38 11/019CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN

SELECT CURRENCY TO BE USED :CURRENCY CODE [USA ] UNITED STATES DOLLAREXCHANGE RATE # [1 ] 2.6640 = 1 DOLLDETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F10 - PREV. SCRN, ESC - EXIT


Level 3

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - STANDING ORDER PRINT SP38 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE [ ]CODE DESCRIPTION <-->DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENCE

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN, F10 - PREV.SCRN, ESC - EXIT

ALTERNATE SEQ CODE : 4 charactersEnter the code for the alternate sequence to be used.Press [F1] to scan or [F10] to change CO/BR option.

Level 4

ORDER # FROM-TO : 6 digitsEnter the exact range of orders to be printed on the report or press [Enter] for full range.

The above prompt will only be displayed if you selected the default (i.e. blank) alternate sequence code. If you selected a user defined sequence, the following will be displayed.

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM-TO : Variable

Scan all the alternate sequenced records and make the appropriate range selection.


USER GUIDE

4.11 DELETION OF STANDING ORDERS - SP39This program will selectively delete standing orders.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELETION OF STANDING ORDERS SP39 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER # FROM [ 1] TO [ 4]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F1 - SCAN FILE, F9 - PRT OPTS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

ORDER FROM-TO : Enter start and end numbers for standing orders to be deleted.


5.ENQUIRY MODULE

5.1 THE ENQUIRY MODULE MENUThis module consists of the following programs;

SP50 - ORDER ENQUIRY

SP501 - ORDER ENQUIRY - HISTORY

SP51 – DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN

SP52 - ORDERS SCAN

SP53 - DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN

SP56 - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SCAN

SP57 – INVOICE ENQUIRY

The order scan allows a top level enquiry of all orders on file in various sequences.

The delivery address scan provides easy viewing of all delivery addresses.

A quick reference can be made to the discount/price matrix by using the discount/price matrix scan.

Enter SP5 to display the enquiry module menu.


USER GUIDE

5.2 ORDER ENQUIRY - SP50This program enables you to view all orders on file as per SP11 - Order Review but it does not allow any updating.


Level 1

You may select the Company, Branch and warehouse as normal.

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENQUIRY SP50 11/036CO - 01 - HEAD OFFICEBR - 01 - HEAD OFFICE PERIOD - 02WH : 01 - MAIN STOREORDER # [000003]ORDER - ORDER # SEQUENCE ORDER# A/C # CUST ORD# DEL DATE BIN LO PRODUCT#O000003<-->AB001 30/08/99 TAKEN: 30/08/99 BY: SYSADMINO000003 AB001 30/08/99 BIN1 B001 P/O: PO000001 *** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN FILE, F5 - SEQUENCE, F10 - PREV

Use [F1] to scan the orders on file and then select the required one.

You may use the [F5] key to toggle the scan sequence between Purchase Order number, Order number, Customer number, Customer Order number, Product number, Delivery date and Bin location

Level 3

This displays the order header details.

SP - Enquiry JULY 2006 5 - 211

Level 4

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ENQUIRY SP50 11/016CO - 01 - HEAD OFFICEBR - 01 - HEAD OFFICEWH : 01 - MAIN STOREORDER# 000005 ACCOUNT # DP001 DRAPERIES UNLIMITED REFE CUS ORD# DATE 20/04/99PRODUCT INCLUSIVE ORDERED TO SUPPLY ON BO PRICE DISC/SUR % + AMT T NET AMTPRODUCT 2 PRODUCT 2 20/04/99 SAL 1.00 1.00 60.0000 1 60.00 XPRODUCT 1 PRODUCT 1 20/04/99 SAL 1.00 1.00 15.0000 1 15.00 Y F3-END, F4-CAT, F5-COST, F6-DELDATE, F8-DEL, F10-CUST, R-RES

The order detail lines are displayed as shown above.

Press [F3] when you have viewed all the details.


USER GUIDE

5.3 ORDER ENQUIRY - HISTORY - SP501 This program enables you to view the history details for all orders on file as per SP11 - Order Review but it does not allow any updating.

It is like SP50 - Order Enquiry in all respects, except that it reads the order history file for transactions and not the current orders file.



5.4 DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN - SP51This program enables you to view the delivery address file. It provides all the normal scans on the debtors file and an alternate scan by deliver address number or name.


You can see an example of a delivery address screen below.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELIVERY ADDRESS ENQUIRY SP51 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ACCOUNT # [1010 ] ACCOUNT # SEQ WH/DEL # [000001]DEL# NAME ADDRESS 1000001<-->JACKSON CONTROLS 38 SHANNON AVE000002 STEPHENSON CONSTRUCTION 51 JACK RUSSEL STREET000003 F1-SCAN, F5-SEQ, F8-DELETE, F10-A/C #, ESC-EXIT


USER GUIDE

5.5 ORDERS SCAN - SP52This program provides the facility to scan the orders file in the various sequences.



Level 1

The following scan sequences are available;

Order number sequence

Customer number sequence

Customer order number sequence

Delivery date sequence

Product sequence

Cancel by date sequence

Bin location sequence

Cancel by date sequence

Each of these sequences will be detailed in the following pages. The system will default to the Order Number Sequence.

The same sequences are available when scanning the history instead of the current orders file. Use the [F5] key to toggle between the current and history files. When scanning the history file the system will display the invoice number rather than the bin number except in the case where the scan is in bin number sequence.

ORDER NUMBER SEQUENCE

Press [F1] to scan in the sequence currently displayed on the screen or press [F5] to change the sequence.

SCAN FROM ORDER # SEQUENCE : 6 characters

Enter a particular order number, or press [Enter] to start the order number sequence scan at the beginning of the file.

Partially supplied orders are indicated with an asterisk.

Press [F1] to scan forwards in the file, [F2] to scan backwards in the file and [F5] to change the sequence of the scan.

Press [F10] to end the scan or [Esc] to return to the menu.


CUSTOMER NUMBER SEQUENCE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDERS SCAN SP52 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN * QTY O/S - PARTIALLY SUPPLIED ORDERSCAN FROM [1676 ]ORDER # SEQUENCEORDER# CUST # NAME WH CUST ORD # DEL DATE PRODUCT BIN LOC QUANTITY001676 1000 HOLCHER 01 92/01/14 CELLOPHANE 365 200.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 20.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN FILE, F5 - SEQ, F10 - CO/BR

Press [F5] to switch to scanning in customer number sequence.

SCAN FROM CUSTOMER # SEQUENCE : 6 characters

Enter a particular number to start or press [Enter] to start the customer number sequence scan at the beginning of the file.


Press [F1] to scan forwards in the file, [F2] to scan backwards in the file and [F5] to change the scan sequence.



USER GUIDE

CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER SEQUENCE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDERS SCAN SP52 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN * QTY O/S - PARTIALLY SUPPLIED ORDERSCAN FROM [000000]CUSTOMER # SEQUENCEORDER# CUST # NAME WH CUST ORD # DEL DATE PRODUCT BIN LOC QUANTITY001676 1000 HOLCHER 01 92/01/14 CELLOPHANE 365 200.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 20.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00

F1 - SCAN FILE, F5 - SEQ, F10 - CO/BR

Press [F5] to switch to scanning in customer order number sequence.

SCAN FROM CUSTOMER ORDER # SEQUENCE : 15 characters

Enter a particular number to start or press [Enter] to start the customer order number sequence scan at the beginning of the file.


Press [F1] to scan forwards in the file, [F2] to scan backwards in the file and [F5] to change the scan sequence. Press [F10] to end the scan or [Esc] to return to the menu.


DELIVERY DATE SEQUENCE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDERS SCAN SP52 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN * QTY O/S - PARTIALLY SUPPLIED ORDERSCAN FROM [2588744 ]CUST ORD # SEQUENCEORDER# CUST # NAME WH CUST ORD # DEL DATE PRODUCT BIN LOC QUANTITY124555 1000 HOLCHER 01 2588744 92/01/28 001WIT46 000001 10.00124555 1000 HOLCHER 01 2588744 92/01/28 BOTTLE CAPS 2.00

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN FILE, F5 - SEQ, F10 - CO/BR

Press [F5] to switch to scanning in delivery date sequence.

SCAN FROM DELIVERY DATE SEQUENCE : DD/MM/CCYY.

Enter a particular delivery date to start or press [Enter] to start the delivery date sequence scan at the beginning of the file.





USER GUIDE

PRODUCT SEQUENCE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDERS SCAN SP52 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN * QTY O/S - PARTIALLY SUPPLIED ORDERSCAN FROM [00/00/00] YYMMDDDELIVERY DATE SEQUENCEORDER# CUST # NAME WH CUST ORD # DEL DATE PRODUCT BIN LOC QUANTITY001676 1000 HOLCHER 01 92/01/14 CELLOPHANE 365 200.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 20.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00

F1 - SCAN FILE, F5 - SEQ, F10 - CO/BR

Press [F5] to switch to scanning in product sequence.

SCAN FROM PRODUCT SEQUENCE : 15 characters

Enter a particular number to start at or press [Enter] to start the product sequence scan at the beginning of the file.





BIN LOCATION SEQUENCE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDERS SCAN SP52 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN * QTY O/S - PARTIALLY SUPPLIED ORDERSCAN FROM [000000B/WIT 46 ]PRODUCT SEQUENCEORDER# CUST # NAME WH CUST ORD # DEL DATE PRODUCT BIN LOC QUANTITY000004 1080 OMNI CO 01 92/02/19 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 2.00000012 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 1.00000013 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 2.00000014 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 2.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 20.00000013 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 001WIT46 000001 4.00000014 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 001WIT46 000001 1.00001681 1030 GILCHRI 01 92/02/19 001WIT46 000001 3.00124555 1000 HOLCHER 01 2588744 92/01/28 001WIT46 000001 10.00000001 1000 HOLCHER 01 92/02/19 005/5WIT 46 2.00000004 1080 OMNI CO 01 92/02/19 005/5WIT 46 6.00000006 1000 HOLCHER 01 92/02/19 005/5WIT 46 3.00000007 1020 SHEET R 01 92/02/19 005/5WIT 46 6.00000013 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 005/5WIT 46 1.00000001 1000 HOLCHER 01 92/02/19 006S-20-WIT 46 12.00F1 - FWDS, F5 - SEQ, F10 - CO/BR

Press [F5] to switch to scanning in bin location sequence.

SCAN FROM BIN LOCATION SEQUENCE 6 characters

Enter the bin location to start at or press [Enter] to start the sequence scan at the beginning of the file.


USER GUIDE




SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDERS SCAN SP52 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN * QTY O/S - PARTIALLY SUPPLIED ORDERSCAN FROM [000000]BIN LOCAT. SEQUENCEORDER# CUST # NAME WH CUST ORD # DEL DATE PRODUCT BIN LOC QUANTITY000013 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 005/5WIT 46 1.00000014 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 2 HOURS SERVICE 0.00000014 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 WHITE OVAL HAND 3.00001676 1000 HOLCHER 01 92/01/14 CELLOPHANE 365 200.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00001677 1010 JONES G 01 92/01/28 0.00124555 1000 HOLCHER 01 2588744 92/01/28 BOTTLE CAPS 2.00000013 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 001WIT46 000001 4.00000014 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 001WIT46 000001 1.00001681 1030 GILCHRI 01 92/02/19 001WIT46 000001 3.00124555 1000 HOLCHER 01 2588744 92/01/28 001WIT46 000001 10.00000004 1080 OMNI CO 01 92/02/19 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 2.00000012 1010 JONES G 01 92/02/19 001-1WB/WIT 46 000045 1.00F1 - FWDS, F2 - BACK, F5 - SEQ, F10 - CO/BR


5.6 DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN - SP53The program allows the delivery address file to be scanned.

Delivery addresses are set up and maintained in SP31 - Delivery Address.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN SP53 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNCUST # ADD# NAME ADDRESS1000 000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. 414 MARIETTA STREETROUTE ATLANTAAREA 42 KENNEDY PLAZASLSM 0010 JACK WALTERSNARR GA 30341D1-D7 1 11000 001 HOLCHER DARROLL INC 23 MAIN ROAD WESTROUTE 0010 SOUTHERN SUBURBS ATLANTAAREA 10 SOUTHERN SUBURBSSLSM 0010 JACK WALTERSNARR STORE OPENS GA 30341D1-D7 2 31000 002 HOLCHER DARROlL INC 254 EXPLORER ROADROUTE 0020 NORTHERN SUBURBS SANDY SPRINGSAREA 42 KENNEDY PLAZASLSM 0015 PETE PENFOLDNARR STORE OPENS AT 8 AM GA 30341D1-D7 3 2F1 - SCAN FORWARDS, F10 - CUSTOMER #, ESC - EXIT

SCAN FROM CUSTOMER # : 6 charactersEnter a particular number to start from, or press [Enter] to start the scan at the beginning of the file.

The delivery addresses on file are displayed.

Press [F1] to scan forwards and [F2] to scan backwards in the file.

To end the scan press [F10] and [Esc] to return to the menu.


USER GUIDE

5.7 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SCAN - SP56This program allows the operator to view the discounts and selling prices according to type as set up and explained in program SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix. It is also possible to print these discounts and prices using program SP76 - Discount/Price Matrix Print.Enter SP56 to select the program.

Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SCAN SP56 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN DISCOUNT TYPE [7] 1 - PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISC 2 - QUANTITY DISC 3 - VALUE DISC 4 - OVERALL DISC 5 - TIME DEPENDENT DISC 6 - TIME DEPENDENT PRICING 7 - QUANTITY PRICING 8 - ALL DISCOUNTS/PRICES F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

DISCOUNT TYPE : [1] Product/Customer[2] Quantity [3] Value [4] Overall discount[5] Time dependent discount[6] Time dependent pricing[7] Quantity Pricing[8] All discounts/prices

Enter the appropriate selection to proceed to the next level.


PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISCOUNT

Select Option [1] to view the product/customer discount combinations.

Press [F1] to scan the file. All discount combinations will be displayed with discount one percentage. If further details are required, move the arrow to the desired combination and press [Enter]. All the discounts for that combination will be displayed.

Press [F10] to select a different discount type and [Esc] to exit the program.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT SCAN SP56 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ALL DISCOUNTSCUSTOMER GROUP [ ] PRODUCT GROUP [ ] OR ORCUSTOMER [ ] PRODUCT [ ]TYPE CUSTOMER GROUP BRANCH PRODUCT GROUP BRANCH DISC%(1)1 0010 <--> 01 2.504 0010 2.505 4100 0020 2.50

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN FILE, F10 - END SCAN


USER GUIDE

QUANTITY DISCOUNT

Select Option [2] to view the quantity discount combinations.



SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SCAN SP56 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN QUANTITY PRODUCT SALES CAT [ ] OR PRODUCT [ ] PRODUCT CAT BRCH CODE DISC%(1) 3200 1.50 REF1 QTY > 10.00 1.50 % + 100.00 3 QTY > 50.00 7.50 % + 5000.00 F10 - SELECTION, ESC - EXIT


VALUE DISCOUNT

Select Option [3] to view the value discount combinations.



SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT SCAN SP56 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 01 VALUE PRODUCT GROUP [ ] OR PRODUCT [ ] PRODUCT GROUP BRANCH DISC%(1) 5.00 REF1 AMT > 200.00 5.00 % + 0.00 REF2 AMT > 500.00 5.50 % + 0.50 REF3 AMT > 1000.00 7.50 % + 0.00 F10 - SELECTION, ESC - EXIT


USER GUIDE

OVERALL DISCOUNTS

Select Option [4] to view the overall discount combinations.



SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT SCAN SP56 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 01 OVERALL DISCOUNTS CUSTOMER GROUP [ ] OR CUSTOMER [ ] CUSTOMER GROUP BRANCH DISC%(1) 0010 2.50 REF1 1 2.50 REF2 2 3.00 F10 - SELECTION, ESC - EXIT


TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS

Select Option [5] to view the time dependent discount combinations.



SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT SCAN SP56 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 01 TIME DEPENDENT CUSTOMER GROUP [ ] PRODUCT GROUP [ ] OR OR CUSTOMER [ ] PRODUCT [ ] CUSTOMER GROUP BRANCH PRODUCT GROUP BRANCH DISC%(1) 4100 0020 2.50 REF4 01/01/89 TO 15/01/89 2.50 % + 0.00 REF5 10/02/89 TO 20/02/89 5.00 % + 0.00 F10 - SELECTION, ESC - EXIT


USER GUIDE

TIME DEPENDENT PRICING

Select Option [6] to view the time dependent selling price matrix combinations.

Press [F1] to scan the file. All selling price combinations will be displayed with the from date. If further details are required, move the arrow to the desired combination and press [Enter]. All the selling prices and dates for that combination will be displayed.


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SP56 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN TIME DEPENDENT PRICING AR GROUP [ ] OR CUSTOMER [1010 ] PRODUCT FROM [001WIT46 ] JONES GENERAL CONTRACTING [005/5WIT 46 ] FROM TO * AMT PRICE [98/07/01][98/08/31] 15.0000 [98/09/01][98/10/31] 14.0000 [0 /00/00]0/00/00] 0.0000 [00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 [00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 [00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 [00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 [00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 [00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 [00/00/00][00/00/00] 0.0000 F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - SELECTION, ESC - EXIT

QUANTITY PRICING

Select Option [7] to view all quantity selling price combinations.

Press [F1] to scan the file. All quantity selling price combinations will be displayed with the from date. If further details are required, move the arrow to the desired combination and press [Enter]. All the details for that combination will be displayed.



ALL DISCOUNTS/PRICES

Select Option [8] to view the all discount and selling price combinations.

Press [F1] to scan the file. All discount/selling price combinations will be displayed with discount one percentage or the from date in the case of selling prices. If further details are required, move the arrow to the desired combination and press [Enter]. All the details for that combination will be displayed.


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT SCAN SP56 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 01 ALL DISCOUNTS CUSTOMER GROUP [ ] PRODUCT GROUP [ ] OR OR CUSTOMER [ ] PRODUCT [ ] TYPE CUSTOMER GROUP BRANCH PRODUCT GROUP BRANCH DISC%(1) 1 0010 <--> 01 2.50 4 0010 2.50 5 4100 0020 2.50 *** NO MORE ITEMS *** F1 - SCAN FILE, F10 - END SCAN


USER GUIDE

5.8 INVOICE ENQUIRY - SP57This program provides the facility to view the invoices or credit notes in both the current and the history files.



SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE ENQUIRY SP57 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALDOC# [000143]CR NOTE# SEQUENCE - HISTORY DOC# A/C # CUST ORD# DATE ORDER# AMOUNTC000143<-->1130 97/08/27 000355 105.60-C000144 1130 97/08/27 000357 82.85-C000145 100000 97/09/01 000364 155.06-C000146 1200 97/10/08 000379 344.56-C000147 1070 97/10/09 000384 90.00-C000148 1070 97/10/15 000399 200.00-C000151 1010 97/12/08 000448 0.00C000152 1010 97/12/08 000449 0.00C000153 1000 97/12/08 000450 3.60-C000154 1150 98/03/16 000480 30.67- F1 - SCAN FWDS, F5 - SEQUENCE, F6 – ALT DISPLAY, F10 - CO/BR

Use the [F5] key to toggle between the current and history files and invoices and credit notes. The details display as per the screen below.

The [F6] key provides al alternate display where you can view the Proof of Delivery date entered in SP30 – Invoice Maintenance.

Once you have selected a document for display, there is an [F9] – REPRINT option on the status line which will allow SYSADMIN and level 9 users to print documents.


6.PRINT MODULE

6.1 THE PRINT MODULE MENUThis module consists of the following report programs;

SP70 - INVOICE FORM PRINT

SP71 - CREDIT NOTE FORM PRINT

SP72 - EXCEPTION REPORTS

SP73 - CREDIT LIMIT/TERMS EXCEEDED REPORT

SP74 - OUTSTANDING ORDERS REPORT

SP741 - UNRELEASED CREDIT NOTE REPORT

SP75 - DELIVERY ADDRESS PRINT

SP76 - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX PRINT

SP77 - ORDER/DELIVERY NOTE PRINT

SP78 - ORDER RELEASE AND PRINT

SP79 - ORDER ANALYSIS

SP80 - INVOICE PRINT FROM HISTORY

SP81 - CREDIT NOTE PRINT FROM HISTORY

SP83 - RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT DELIVERY NOTE

SP82 – LABEL AND MANIFEST

SP84 - RELEASE DELIVERED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE

SP85 - RELEASE DELIVERED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE

SP86 - CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE

SP87 - CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE

SP88 - DELIVERY ADDRESS CHANGES PRINT

SP89 - DISCOUNT/PRICE CHANGE PRINT

This module makes extensive use of exception-based reporting techniques allowing for extraction and printing of only that data which matches the selection criteria.

Each print program provides an applicable selection range. The selection range is pre-loaded with the most commonly used selection criteria.


USER GUIDE

6.2 INVOICE PRINT - SP70The program prints invoices that have been generated by the system and which are held on the invoice file.

You may also use this program to print user defined reports by using alternate sequences as set up in program SP33 - Alternate Sequence, and user defined layouts as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance, form type 'IV'.

Please note, that if you select to print in any sequence other than the default sequence, the resulting reports will not be regarded as invoices. The system will for instance not be able to flag the invoice header records with a printed flag, nor will it be able to calculate overall discount. You MUST print all invoices in the default sequence for the system to produce documents with the correct layout and calculations and totals. Any user defined reports are exactly that.

In addition, invoices may be e-mailed to customers. To use this facility, you must enter a narrative code in AR00 - System Record Maintenance, and then enter the e-mail address for that narrative in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance.


The Report Destination, Company/Branch combination and Report date may be optionally selected. Please see the GETTING STARTED section at the beginning of this User Guide.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 233

Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE FORM PRINT SP70 11/020CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNINVOICE FORM TYPE: [IV ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


INVOICE FORM TYPE : IVxx.Enter the required form type. (This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance).

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] is entered, duplicate credit notes will be printed side-by-side.

If this option is used, the width of a single document as specified in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance, may not exceed 66 characters

PRINT TEST REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y], a test document will be produced to line up the pre-printed stationery.


USER GUIDE

Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING – INVOICE FORM PRINT SP70 11/007CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CURRENCY CODE OPTION [4] 1 - LOCAL CURRENCY 2 - ORDER CURRENCY 3 - FORWARD COVER RATE (NOT AVAILABLE) 4 - TRANSACTION CURRENCY 5 - SELECT CURRENCY CODE AND RATE DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT



[3] - Forward Cover Rate (Not Available)[4] - Transaction Currency[5] - Select Currency Code And RateSelect the currency code to be used for printing of the documents.


DETAILS OK? : Y/N

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 235

Level 3

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE FORM PRINT SP70 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE [ ] CODE DESCRIPTION <-->DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENC0001 CUSTOMER/PRODUCT INVOICE DETAILS FILECUST CUST BY REF INVOICE DETAILS FILEIDAT INVOICE DATES INVOICE DETAILS FILEISBN ISBN INVOICE DETAILS FILEPICK PICK DOC/BIN INVOICE DETAILS FILE F1-SCAN, F5-SELECT, F7-MARK, F10-BACK, ESC-EXIT

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE : 4 characters

Press [Enter] to accept a blank code which indicates that you wish to print invoices in the default sequence. If you wish to print user defined reports, enter the code for the alternate sequence in which details are to be printed.Press [F1] to scan or [F10] to change CO/BR option.

Press [Enter] to accept the details or [Esc] to return to the menu.


USER GUIDE

Level 4

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE FORM PRINT SP70 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN INVOICE DETAILS FILE SEQUENCE 0001 CUSTOMER/PRODUCT ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM [1 011 ] ALT. KEY SCAN TO [01011 ] CO/BR/DOC # /LINE# ALTERNATE CODE CUST# PRODUCT01/01/000590-0000<-->01011 101/01/000590-0001 01011 000001 1 00000101/01/000029-0000 01011000 100001/01/000029-0001 01011000 001-1WB/WIT 46 1000 001-1WB/WIT 4601/01/000591-0000 01011003 100301/01/000591-0001 01011003 001-1WB/WIT 46 1003 001-1WB/WIT 4601/01/000030-0000 01011010 101001/01/000030-0001 01011010 0070 1010 0070 *** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1-SCAN, F5-SELECT, F7-MARK, F6-CODES, F10-BACK, ESC-EXIT

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM-TO : variable length

The length depends on the definition of the code in SP33 - Alternate Sequence. Select the required range.

Once you have selected an alternate sequence, you will be able to use the [F5] key to toggle the scan between invoice number sequence and alternate sequence. If you are scanning in alternate sequence, you will also be able to use the [F6] key to scan the codes on the description file which form the components of the alternate code.

The [F7] key allows you to mark those invoices you wish to print. Press [Enter] after the last [F7] to accept. The selection list is presented and may be changed.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 237

DOCUMENTS : 6 digitsSelect the range of invoices to be printed. This prompt will display if you selected the default sequence or if you used the [F6] key to toggle the sequence. It also displays those invoices marked using the [F7] key as described above.When entering invoices use the following delimiters:+, & ,; , | - to denote AND-, : - to denote a RANGE* - to denote ALLFor instance, to select documents 01,03, 10 to 15, and 20, you should enter: “01;03;10:15;20” (do not enter the quotations or any spaces).

DOCUMENTS (*,;,+,-) [ ]


USER GUIDE

Level 5

The entries on this screen determine total breaks and page skipping. Two entries pertain to each part of the key. This screen will only be displayed if you selected to print in an alternate sequence.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE FORM PRINT SP70 11/028CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN INVOICE DETAILS FILEALTERNATE SEQUENCE INVO CO/BR/CUST/DOCCONSOLIDATION (Y/N) PAGE SKIP (Y/N)COMPANY [N] [N]BRANCH [N] [N]CUSTOMER # [N] [N]DOCUMENT # [N] [N]

F3 - ACCEPT, F10 - RANGE, ESC - EXIT

CONSOLIDATION (Y/N) : Y/N.A [Y] in this field will cause a total to print at the end of the specified component.

PAGE SKIP (Y/N) : Y/N.A [Y] in this field will cause the program to advance to a new page after this component has been printed.

Press [F3] accept the entries and proceed to the next screen, [F10] to return to the range selection and [Esc] to exit the program.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 239

Level 6

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - INVOICE PRINT SP70 11/006 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 08 INVOICE # FROM 003376 TO 003376 UN-PRINTED FORMS ONLY? (Y/N)[Y] DELIVERY METHOD [ ] Spaces = All DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] ESC - EXIT

"J" INVOICES? : Y/NThis option ONLY displays if this module is linked to the Job Costing program and the option has been set up in SP00 - System Record Maintenance. Prints "i" - numbering sequence - invoices.

UNPRINTED FORMS ONLY? : Y/N.[N] will prevent any previously printed invoices within the selected range from printing.[Y] may require a supervisor password depending on the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

DELIVERY METHOD : 4 CharactersIf a code is entered only invoices with that specific delivery method will be printed.

DETAILS OK? : Y/NAccept the details to print your invoices, or enter [N] to re-enter selections.


USER GUIDE

6.3 CREDIT NOTE PRINT - SP71The program prints credit notes that have been generated by the system and which are held on the invoice file.

You may also use this program to print user defined reports by using alternate sequences as set up in program SP33 - Alternate Sequence, and user defined layouts as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance, form type 'IV'.

Please note, that if you select to print in any sequence other than the default sequence, the resulting reports will not be regarded as credit notes. The system will for instance not be able to flag the credit note header records with a printed flag, nor will it be able to calculate overall discount. You MUST print all credit notes in the default sequence for the system to produce documents with the correct layout and calculations and totals. Any user defined reports are exactly that.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT NOTE FORM PRINT SP71 11/020CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNINVOICE FORM TYPE: [IV ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


INVOICE FORM TYPE : IVxx.Enter the required form type. (This refers to the user-defined form set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance).

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] is entered, duplicate invoices will be printed side by side.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 241


PRINT TEST REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y], a test document will be produced to line up the pre-printed stationery. Accept the details and proceed to the next level.

Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING – CREDIT NOTE FORM PRINT SP71 11/007CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CURRENCY CODE OPTION [4] 1 - LOCAL CURRENCY 2 - ORDER CURRENCY 3 - FORWARD COVER RATE (NOT AVAILABLE) 4 - TRANSACTION CURRENCY 5 - SELECT CURRENCY CODE AND RATE DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT




Select the currency code to be used for printing of the documents.


USER GUIDE


DETAILS OK? : Y/N

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 243

Level 3

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT NOTE FORM PRINT SP71 11/028CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE [ ]CODE DESCRIPTION <-->DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENC0001 PRODUCT WITHIN CUSTOMER INVOICE DETAILS FILEINVO CO/BR/CUST/DOC INVOICE DETAILS FILEPICK CO/BR/DOC/BIN INVOICE DETAILS FILE



Press [Enter] to accept a blank code which indicates that you wish to print credit notes in the default sequence. If you wish to print user defined reports, enter the code for the alternate sequence in which details are to be printed.Press [F1] to scan or [F10] to change CO/BR option.



USER GUIDE

Level 4

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT NOTE FORM PRINT SP71 11/028CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN INVOICE DETAILS FILESEQUENCE INVO CO/BR/CUST/DOCALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM [1 011000 000111] ALT. KEY SCAN TO [01011000 000111]

CO/BR/DOC # /LINE# ALTERNATE CODE CUST# PRODUCT01/01/000111-0000<-->01011000 000111 100001/01/000111-0001 01011000 000111 1000 001-1WB/WIT 4601/01/000111-0002 01011000 000111 1000 001WIT4601/01/000111-0003 01011000 000111 1000 006S-20-WIT 4601/01/000111-0004 01011000 000111 1000 012 WIT 46

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN, F5 - SEQ, F6 - CODES, F10 - ALT.SEQ, ESC - EXIT

CREDIT NOTE # FROM-TO : 6 digitsSelect the range of credit notes to be printed. This prompt will display if you selected the default sequence or if you used the [F5] key to toggle the sequence.



Once you have selected an alternate sequence, you will be able to use the [F5] key to toggle the scan between credit note number sequence and alternate sequence. If you are scanning in alternate sequence, you will also be able to use the [F6] key to scan the codes on the description file which form the components of the alternate code.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 245

Level 5


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT NOTE FORM PRINT SP71 11/028CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN INVOICE DETAILS FILEALTERNATE SEQUENCE INVO CO/BR/CUST/DOCCONSOLIDATION (Y/N) PAGE SKIP (Y/N)COMPANY [N] [N]BRANCH [N] [N]CUSTOMER # [N] [N]DOCUMENT # [N] [N]




Press [F3] to accept the entries and proceed to the next screen, [F10] to return to the range selection and [Esc] to exit the program.


USER GUIDE

Level 6

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT NOTE PRINT SP71 11/006 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 08 CREDIT NOTE # FROM 003376 TO 003376 UN-PRINTED FORMS ONLY? (Y/N)[Y] DELIVERY METHOD [ ] Spaces = All DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] ESC - EXIT

"J" INVOICES? : Y/NThis option ONLY displays if this module is linked to the Job Costing program and the option has been set up in SP00 - System Record Maintenance. Prints "c" - numbering sequence - credit notes.

UNPRINTED FORMS ONLY? : Y/N.[N] will prevent any previously printed credit notes within the selected range from printing.[Y] may require a supervisor password depending on the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

DELIVERY METHOD : 4 CharactersIf a code is entered only credit notes with that specific delivery method will be printed.

DETAILS OK? : Y/NAccept the details to print your credit notes, or enter [N] to re-enter selections.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 247

6.4 NON-STANDARD DISCOUNT/PRICE REPORT - SP72This program is useful to management. It will selectively report on any of the following:

• Non standard prices were charged.

• Non standard discounts were allowed.

• Orders were lost.

• Items were sold below their cost values.

• Invoices were created in spite of the minimum quantity being exceeded.

• Invoices were created in spite of free or physical quantity being exceeded.

• Sales were lost because orders/invoices could only be partially supplied.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - EXCEPTION REPORTS SP72 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN

REPORT FORMAT [1] 1 - NON-STD. PRICES 2 - NON-STD. DISCOUNTS 3 - LOST ORDERS 4 - BELOW COST 5 - MINIMUM QTY EXCEEDED 6 - FREE OR PHYSICAL EXCEEDED 7 - SALES LOST DUE TO SHORT SUPPLYDETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


REPORT FORMAT : [1] Non standard prices[2] Non standard discounts[3] Lost orders[4] Below cost[5] Minimum quantity exceeded[6] Free or physical quantity exceeded[7] Sales lost due to short supply

Press [Enter] to accept the options as displayed or enter new options. Pressing [Esc] will return to the menu and end the program.


USER GUIDE

CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED SALES ORDER PROCESSING - EXCEPTION REPORTS DATE 98/02/19 @ 11:14 PAGE 1BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN NON-STANDARD PRICES SP72 11/001 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ OPERATOR CUST. ORDER INV. <--------SELLING PRICES--------> DATE I/D NO. NAME NO. NO. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WH STANDARD DEFAULT ACTUAL -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. 1 1 006S-20-WIT 46 0070E SELECTA CRAD 01 18.93 18.93 16.00 18.17 17.41 17.03 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRAC 2 2 525CA BIDET SET NO300 CA 01 78.94 75.78 72.00 75.78 72.62 71.04 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRAC 2 2 526CA BIDET MIXER CARINA 01 212.39 203.89 205.00 203.89 195.40 191.15 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRAC 8 8 600M-15 SOLDER FIT SLIP CO 01 0.28 0.26 0.22 0.26 0.25 0.25 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRAC 8 8 601M-22 STRAIGHT COUPLER C 01 0.36 0.35 0.33 0.35 0.33 0.33

92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1050 LUMBER KING 3 3 601M-108 STRAIGHT COUPLER C 01 43.11 43.11 44.00 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1080 OMNI COLD A/C REPAIR 4 4 001-1WB/WIT 46 WHITE CASCADE HAND 01 61.57 55.00 61.57 59.01 57.72 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1080 OMNI COLD A/C REPAIR 4 4 005/5WIT 46 WHITE SPIRAFLEX TU 01 20.88 20.04 12.00 20.04 19.21 18.79 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1100 SPRING CREEK INC. 5 5 D-10RXS3/4X15 REDUCING ELBOW C X 01 4.18 4.18 3.98 4.01 3.84 3.76 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1100 SPRING CREEK INC. 5 5 D-10XS-28 ELBOWS COPP X FEMA 01 6.00 6.00 7.20 5.76 5.52 5.40 NO. OF LINES 14 * * * E N D O F R E P O R T * * *

SP72 - Non-Standard Prices

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 249

6.5 CREDIT LIMIT/TERMS EXCEEDED REPORT - SP73The program prints a report detailing all customers that have exceeded their credit limits or their terms.



SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT LIMIT/TERMS EXCEEDED SP73 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN

REPORT FORMAT [1] 1 - CREDIT LIMIT EXCEEDED 2 - TERMS EXCEEDEDDETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


Level 1

REPORT FORMAT : [1] Credit limit exceeded[2] Terms exceeded.



USER GUIDE

CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CREDIT LIMIT/TERMS EXCEEDED DATE 98/02/19 @ 11:14 PAGE 1BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CREDIT LIMITS EXCEEDED SP73 11/001 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ DATE OPERATOR I/D CUST # NAME ORDER # INVOICE # CREDIT BALANCE CREDIT LIMIT O/S EXCESS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRACTING 2 2 500 2052.78 1552.78 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRACTING 8 8 500 2678.78 2178.78 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1050 LUMBER KING 3 3 1000 2063.51 1063.51 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1080 OMNI COLD A/C REPAIR 4 4 1000 1142.23 142.23 92/02/19 SYSADMIN 1100 SPRING CREEK INC. 5 5 750 1174.50 424.50 NO. OF LINES 5 * * * E N D O F R E P O R T * * *

SP73 - Credit Limits Exceeded

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 251

6.6 OUTSTANDING ORDERS REPORT - SP74The program prints a report detailing all outstanding orders using two option levels.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - OUTSTANDING ORDERS REPORT SP74 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN REPORT SEQUENCE [1] 1 - ORDER # 2 - WH/BIN LOC 3 - CUSTOMER ORDER # 4 - CUSTOMER ACC # 5 - PRODUCT 6 - DELIVERY DATE 7 - CANCEL BY DATE 8 - BY ALTERNATE SEQUNECEORDER # FROM [000000] TO [999999] PAGE BREAK? (Y/N) [N] SHOW PHYS/FREE STOCK? (Y/N) [N]PRINT EXTENDED DESC.? (Y/N) [Y]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F9 - PRINT OPTIONS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

REPORT SEQUENCE : [1] By internal order number[2] By warehouse and bin number[3] By customer order number[4] By customer account number[5] By product[6] By delivery date[7] By cancel by date[8] Alternate sequence

RANGE SELECTION FROM-TO : A range of any of the above sequences may be

selected. The default range is blank to print all outstanding orders or enter a starting and ending number, code or date. If you press [F4] while in the 'TO' field, the 'FROM' number will automatically be entered.

PAGE BREAK : Y/NIf you enter [Y] then you will get a page break.


USER GUIDE

SHOW PHYS/FREE STOCK : Y/NIf you enter [Y] the report will also print the physical and free stock quantities.

PRINT EXTENDED DESC. : Y/NIf you enter [Y] the report will also print the extended description of the items where they exist.


SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 253

CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED SALES ORDER PROCESSING - OUTSTANDING ORDERS REPORT DATE 98/02/19 @ 11:15 PAGE 1BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN INTERNAL ORDER # SEQUENCE SP74 11/002 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ORDER# CUST# CUSTOMER ORDER# CUSTOMER NAME ORD DATE DEL DATE WH BIN# PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SUBSTK/SER# UOM ORDERED SUPPLIED BACK ORDER PRICE GRSS VALUE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRACTING 92/02/19 92/02/19 01 525CA BIDET SET NO300 CARINA EACH 3.00 0.00 0.00 72.00 216.00 01 526CA BIDET MIXER CARINA EACH 2.00 0.00 0.00 205.00 410.00 3 1050 LUMBER KING 92/02/19 92/02/19 01 600M-22 SOLDER FIT SLIP COUPLER 22mm EACH 7.00 0.00 0.00 0.29 2.03 01 601-2M-35X22 FITTING REDUCER MC X C EACH 2.00 0.00 0.00 2.55 5.10 01 601M-108 STRAIGHT COUPLER C X C 108mm EACH 3.00 0.00 0.00 44.00 132.00 4 1080 OMNI COLD A/C REPAIR 92/02/19 92/02/19 01 000045 001-1WB/WIT 46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER SPI EACH 2.00 0.00 0.00 55.00 110.00 01 005/5WIT 46 WHITE SPIRAFLEX TUBE BLACK C EACH 6.00 0.00 0.00 12.00 72.00 5 1100 SPRING CREEK INC. 92/02/19 92/02/19 01 D-10RXS3/4X15 REDUCING ELBOW C X F.I. 15X3 EACH 2.00 0.00 0.00 3.98 7.96 01 D-10XS-28 ELBOWS COPP X FEMALE IRON 28 EACH 5.00 0.00 0.00 7.20 36.00 6 1000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. 92/02/19 92/02/19 01 005/5WIT 46 WHITE SPIRAFLEX TUBE BLACK C EACH 3.00 0.00 3.00 11.00 33.00 7 1020 SHEET ROCK SUPPLY CO 92/02/19 92/02/19 01 005/5WIT 46 WHITE SPIRAFLEX TUBE BLACK C EACH 6.00 0.00 6.00 12.00 72.00 8 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRACTING 92/02/19 92/02/19 01 600M-15 SOLDER FIT SLIP COUPLER 15mm EACH 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.22 0.22 01 601M-22 STRAIGHT COUPLER C X C 22mm EACH 4.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 1.32 1676 1000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. 92/01/14 92/01/14 01 NON-STOCK CELLOPHANE 365 MXXT/W 700MM 200.00 0.00 0.00 430.00 86000.00 1677 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRACTING 92/01/28 92/01/28 01 000045 001-1WB/WIT 46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER SPI EACH 20.00 0.00 0.00 61.57 1231.40 124555 1000 2588744 HOLCHER DARROLL INC. 92/01/28 92/01/28 01 000001 001WIT46 WHITE CASCADE HANDSHOWER ADJ EACH 10.00 0.00 0.00 70.46 704.60 01 NON-STOCK BOTTLE CAPS 2.00 0.00 0.00 0.20 0.40 ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- NO. OF LINES 20 TOTALS 296.00 0.00 9.00 89532.03 ---------- ---------- ---------- * * * E N D O F R E P O R T * * *

SP74 - Outstanding Orders Report


USER GUIDE

6.7 UNRELEASED CREDIT NOTE REPORT - SP741This program forms part of the Credit Note Suspense feature as described in the Appendix at the back of this manual.

It prints details of all Suspense Credit Notes currently on file.



Details to be printed are exactly as those described for program SP74 - Outstanding Orders Report of which this is a synonym.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - UNRELEASED CREDIT NOTES REPORT SP741 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN REPORT SEQUENCE [1] 1 - CRNOTE# 2 - WH/BIN LOC 3 - CUSTOMER ORDER # 4 - CUSTOMER ACC # 5 - PRODUCT 6 - DELIVERY DATE 7 - CANCEL BY DATE 8 - ALTERNATE SEQ.CRN # FROM [000000] TO [999999] PAGE BREAK? (Y/N) [N] SHOW PHYS/FREE STOCK? (Y/N) [N]PRINT EXTENDED DESC.? (Y/N) [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F9-PRT OPTS, F10-CO/BR, ESC-EXIT

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 255

6.8 DELIVERY ADDRESS PRINT - SP75The program prints a list of delivery addresses on file using two option levels.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELIVERY ADDRESS PRINT SP75 11/002CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN FROM A/C # [ ] ACCOUNT SEQ TO A/C # [ ] INCLUDE ACCOUNT ADDRESS [N] DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F1-SCAN, F5-TOGGLE SEQ, F9-PRT OPT, F10-CO/BR, ESC-EXIT

FROM A/C # : 6 digitsTO A/C # : 6 digits

The default is all delivery addresses. Accept the default or enter the starting and ending customer number range. Use the [F5] key to toggle the sequence between account number or alpha sequence.

INCLUDE ACCOUNT ADDRESS : Y/N

If you select [Y], the account address as well as the delivery address will print.

Press [Enter] to accept the options as displayed or enter new options. Press [Esc] to return to the menu and end the program.


USER GUIDE

CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DELIVERY ADDRESS PRINT DATE 98/02/19 @ 11:16 PAGE 2 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN SP75 11/001 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ INTEGRATED GARDEN DESIGN DALE'S CONTRACTORS BUILD IT (PTY) LTD 17 DELORENTZ STREET 285 ANISEED ROAD 25 NEW PARK AVENUE DECATUR SUGAR HILL CARTERSVILLE GA 37174 GA 34142 GA 30392 0040 OUTER CITY EAST 0040 OUTER CITY EAST 0040 OUTER CITY EAST 42 KENNEDY PLAZA 12 INDUSTRIAL CENTER 30 EASTERN SUBURBS 0030 TONY DE SILVA 0030 TONY DE SILVA 0035 DAVID KIRSH 01/01/1020 /001 01/01/1020 /002 01/01/1050 /001 DEL. NOTES ONLY TO WENDY NO DEL. BETWEEN 1 AND 2 PM BEST BEFORE 9 AM FIX IT (PTY) LTD ARCTICA AIR CONDITIONERS OMNI DOWN TOWN BRANCH INNER CIRCLE DRIVE 23 CROSS STREET 165 LONG STREET INDUSTRIA KENNESAW ATLANTA GA 56023 GA 34142 GA 30341 0020 NORTHERN SUBURBS 0030 OUTER CITY LIMITS WEST 0040 OUTER CITY EAST 12 INDUSTRIAL CENTRE 41 WESTERN SUBURBS 20 DOWN TOWN 0015 PETE PENFOLD 0030 TONY DE SILVA 0010 JACK WALTERS 01/01/1050 /002 01/01/1080 /001 01/01/1080 /002 DEL TO KEN CLARK ONLY BETWEEN 8 AND 12 AM NO DELIVERY BETWEEN 1 AND 2 PM SPRING CREEK DUNWOODY BRANCH SPRING CREEK COLLEGE PARK OUTDOOR CREATIONS 55 WOODLAND DRIVE 667 CAMPUS ROAD 99 TWINNING ROAD DUNWOODY COLLEGE PARK VINNINGS GA 30060 GA 30341 GA 37871 0020 NORTHERN SUBURBS 0050 HIGHWAY 10 0010 SOUTHERN SUBURBS 11 NORTHERN SUBURBS 40 UNIVERSITY CAMPUS 10 SOUTHERN SUBURBS 0020 CLIVE RODGERS 0035 DAVID KIRSH 0020 CLIVE RODGERS 01/01/1100 /001 01/01/1100 /002 01/01/1150 /001 NO DELIVERY AFTER 3PM OPEN FROM 7AM TO 6PM ARRANGE BEFORE DELIVERY COTTONS ALPHARETTE 34 LANDS END ROAD ROSWELL GA 30412 0010 SOUTHERN SUBURBS 10 SOUTHERN SUBURBS 0020 CLIVE RODGERS 01/01/1150 /002 NEVER ON SUNDAYS NO. OF ACCOUNTS: 7 NO. OF ADDRESSES: 22 * * * E N D O F R E P O R T * * *

SP75 - Delivery Address Print

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 257

6.9 DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX PRINT - SP76The program prints a list of the discounts and selling prices as entered in program SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix. The report may be printed by discount/price type or for all types.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX PRINT SP76 11/002 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN DISCOUNT TYPE [8] 1 - PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISC 2 - QUANTITY DISC 3 - VALUE DISC 4 - OVERALL DISC 5 - TIME DEPENDENT DISC 6 - TIME DEPENDENT PRICING 7 - QUANTITY PRICING 8 - ALL DISCOUNTS/PRICES F9 - PRINT OPTIONS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

DISCOUNT TYPE : [1] Product/Customer discount[2] Quantity [3] Value [4] Overall [5] Time dependent discount[6] Time dependent pricing[7] Quantity pricing[8] All discounts/prices

Press [Enter] to accept the options as displayed or enter new options. Press [Esc] to return to the menu and end the program.


USER GUIDE

COMPANY : 01 - GREAT TECHNOLOGY CORP SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ALL DISCOUNTS DATE: 19/02/98 @ 09:08 PAGE # 1BRANCH : 01 - CAPE TOWN SP76 11/028 FOR - CUSTOMER: ALL GROUP: ALL PRODUCT: ALL GROUP: ALL------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TYPE CUSTOMER GROUP BRANCH PRODUCT CAT BRANCH <---------DISCOUNTS--------->------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 100 100900 1 14.00 % + 0.00 ALLEN INVALID STOCK ITEM 2 15.00 % + 0.00 3 20.00 % + 0.00

1 100 1200 1 10.00 % + 0.00 ALLEN HAMMER 2 15.00 % + 1.00

1 100 1201 1 10.00 % + 0.00 ALLEN CHISEL 2 0.00 % + 2.00

1 100 3001 1 11.00 % + 0.00 ALLEN LONG LIGHT FITTING 2 17.00 % + 0.00

1 1000 1200 1 14.00 % + 0.00 HOLCHER DARROLL CORP HAMMER 2 18.00 % + 0.00

1 1000 1202 1 25.00 % + 0.00 HOLCHER DARROLL CORP SCREWDRIVER 2 26.00 % + 0.00

1 0001 100 1 21.00 % + 0.00 CASH SALE CUSTOMER POWER TOOLS 2 25.00 % + 0.00 3 28.00 % + 0.00

1 0001 101 1 15.00 % + 19.00 CASH SALE CUSTOMER HAND TOOLS 2 0.00 % + 0.00

1 0003 101 1 15.00 % + 0.00 INSURANCE COMPANIES HAND TOOLS 2 40.00 % + 0.00

5 1000 1200 FROM 01/01/88 TO 01/02/88 1.00 % + 1.00 HOLCHER DARROLL CORP HAMMER FROM 01/02/88 TO 01/03/88 2.00 % + 2.00 FROM 01/03/88 TO 01/04/88 3.00 % + 3.00 FROM 01/04/88 TO 01/05/88 4.00 % + 4.00

5 1000 101 FROM 01/03/88 TO 15/03/88 5.00 % + 1.00 HOLCHER DARROLL CORP HAND TOOLS FROM 00/00/00 TO 00/00/00 0.00 % + 0.00

* * * E N D O F R E P O R T

SP76 - All Discounts

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 259

6.10 CUSTOMER/GROUP PRICE LIST - SP761The program prints a discounted price list of details entered in SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CUSTOMER/GROUP PRICE LIST SP761 10/005CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CCBR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH PERIOD - 08WH : 01 - MAIN WAREHOUSEAR GROUP [ ] ORCUSTOMER [ ] PRODUCT GROUP [ ] ORPRODUCT FROM [ ] TO [ ] COMPANY OR BRANCH DETAILS [B] (C/B) PRINT LONG DESCRIPTION [N] PRINT RETAIL PRICE [N] PRINT DISCOUNT CALC [N] F1-SCAN, F3-PROCESS, F10-BACK, ESC-EXIT

AR GROUP OR CUSTOMER 4 or 8 charactersSelect either to print by Customer Group or by Customer.There are scans on both fields.

PRODUCT GROUP OR PRODUCT: 4 or 15 charactersSelect either to print by Product Group or by Product.If you print by Product, you will be able to select a range of products. There are scans on both fields.

COMPANY OR BRANCH DETAILS: C/BSelect whether to print Company or Branch details.

PRINT LONG DESCRIPTION: Y/NYou may optionally print the long description.


USER GUIDE

PRINT RETAIL PRICE: Y/NYou may optionally print the retail price off the masterfile.

PRINT DISCOUNT CALC: Y/NIf [Y], then the discount percentage and amount used to calculate the discounted price will be used.

Press [F3] to process the report.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 261

6.11 CUSTOMER ORDER PRINT - SP77The program prints order confirmations or user-defined picking notes. In addition you may print Delivery Notes previously printed by SP83 - Order Release and Print Delivery Note provided you have not yet run SP84 - Release Delivered Quantities to Invoice.You may also use this program to print user defined reports by using alternate sequences as set up in program SP33 - Alternate Sequence, and user defined layouts as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance, form type 'SP'.

Please note, that if you select to print in any sequence other than the default sequence, the resulting reports will not be regarded as orders. The system will for instance not be able to calculate overall discount. You MUST print all orders in the default sequence for the system to produce documents with the correct layout and calculations and totals. Any user defined reports are exactly that.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER PRINT SP77 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER FORM TYPE: [SP ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


ORDER FORM TYPE : SPxx.Enter the required form type. This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

DUPLICATE REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] is entered, duplicate orders will be printed side by side.


USER GUIDE



Accept the details and proceed to the next level.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 263

Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING – ORDER/DELIVERY NOTE PRINT SP77 11/007CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CURRENCY CODE OPTION [4] 1 - LOCAL CURRENCY 2 - ORDER CURRENCY 3 - FORWARD COVER RATE (NOT AVAILABLE) 4 - TRANSACTION CURRENCY 5 - SELECT CURRENCY CODE AND RATE DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT



[3] - Forward Cover Rate (Not Available)[4] - Transaction Currency

[5] - Select Currency Code And RateSelect the currency code to be used for printing of the documents.


DETAILS OK? : Y/N


USER GUIDE

Level 3

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER PRINT SP77 11/020CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE [ ]CODE DESCRIPTION <-->DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENCE0001 PRODUCT WITHIN CUSTOMER INVOICE DETAILS FILEINVO CO/BR/CUST/DOC INVOICE DETAILS FILEPICK CO/BR/DOC/BIN INVOICE DETAILS FILE



Press [Enter] to accept a blank code which indicates that you wish to print orders in the default sequence. If you wish to print user defined reports, enter the code for the alternate sequence in which details are to be printed.Press [F1] to scan or [F10] to change CO/BR option.

Do not select an alternate sequence if you wish to reprint delivery notes.


SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 265

Level 4

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER PRINT SP77 11/018CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ORDERS DETAILS FILESEQUENCE ORD CUSTOMER # ORDERALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM [1 0101 ] ALT. KEY SCAN TO [010101 ]

CO/BR/ORDER#/LINE# ALTERNATE CODE CUST# PRODUCT01/01/000001-0000<-->010101 100001/01/000001-0001 010101 100001/01/000001-0002 010101 1000 001-1WB/WIT 4601/01/000001-0003 010101 1000 001WIT4601/01/000001-0004 010101 1000 005/5WIT 4601/01/000001-0005 010101 1000 006S-20-WIT 46

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN, F5 - SEQ, F6 - CODES, F10 - ALT.SEQ, ESC - EXIT

ORDER # FROM-TO : 6 digitsSelect the range of orders to be printed. This prompt will display if you selected the default sequence or if you used the [F5] key to toggle the sequence. If you wish to reprint a delivery note, use [F5] again to toggle between order and delivery note.



Once you have selected an alternate sequence, you will be able to use the [F5] key to toggle the scan between order number sequence and alternate sequence. If you are scanning in alternate sequence, you will also be able to use the [F6] key to scan the codes on the description file which form the components of the alternate code.


USER GUIDE

Level 5


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER PRINT SP77 11/018CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ORDERS DETAILS FILEALTERNATE SEQUENCE ORD CUSTOMER # ORDERCONSOLIDATION (Y/N) PAGE SKIP (Y/N)COMPANY [N] [N]BRANCH [N] [N]WAREHOUSE [N] [N]CUSTOMER ORDER # [Y] [Y]




Press [F3] to print the report, [F10] to return to the range selection and [Esc] to exit the program.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 267

6.12 DEMAND ORDER RELEASE - SP78Depending on the option selected in program SP00 - System Record Maintenance allows all or selected orders to be released to the invoicing with an immediate document print.

It has the same effect as running SP14 - Order Release followed by SP70 - Invoice Form Print.Enter SP78 to select the program.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER RELEASE AND PRINT SP78 11/021CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNINVOICE FORM TYPE: [IV ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


INVOICE FORM TYPE : IVxx.Accept the default form type as specified in SP00 - System Record Maintenance or change it as required. (This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance).




DETAILS OK? : Y/N


USER GUIDE

Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING – RELEASE PICKED QUANTITY AND PRINT INVOICE SP78 11/007CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CURRENCY CODE OPTION [4] 1 - LOCAL CURRENCY 2 - ORDER CURRENCY 3 - FORWARD COVER RATE (NOT AVAILABLE) 4 - TRANSACTION CURRENCY 5 - SELECT CURRENCY CODE AND RATE DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F10-PREV, ESC-EXIT


CURRENCY CODE OPTION : 1 digit[1] – Local Currency[2] - Order Currency[3] - Forward Cover Rate (Not Available)[4] - Transaction Currency[5] - Select Currency Code And RateSelect the currency code to be used for printing of the documents.


DETAILS OK? : Y/N

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 269

Level 3

ORDER # : 6 digitsEnter or scan for required order number.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE SP78 11/003CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ORDER # [ 123] ORDER# CUST# CUST ORD# DEL DATE USERNAME QUANTITY VALUE000123<-->000000 98/10/16 SYSADMIN 5.00 2299.02000124 1000 98/10/16 SYSADMIN 12.00 479.77002106 AAF1 98/08/21 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002107 AAF1 98/08/21 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002111 Y2000 00/01/17 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002120 ABBY 98/09/04 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002140 1000 98/09/22 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002141 1000 98/09/22 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002142 1000 98/09/23 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002143 ABBY CHECK 98/10/02 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002144 ABBY CHECK 98/10/02 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002153 1000 BACKORDER 98/09/23 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002155 1000 BACKORDER 98/09/23 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00002156 ABBY 78787 98/09/25 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 F1 - FWDS, F5 - CHANGE SEQ, F7 - MARK, F10 - REL OPT

Orders may be released for invoicing in 3 ways.

(A) A single selected order.

(B) All orders ready for release.

(C) All marked orders ready for release.

The status line displays the options available.

Press [F5] for the following scan sequences.

Customer number

Customer order number

Delivery date

Product

Bin location

To mark the individual orders for release, place the cursor on the required order and press [F7]. Use the [F10] key to go to the next level.


USER GUIDE

Please note, this option will only be available if the SP00 - System Record Maintenance, prompt 'ALLOW RELEASE ALL OPTION' for SP14/24 variables is set to [Y].

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 271

Level 4

RELEASE ALL ORDERS? : [Y] Will release all orders.[M] Will released marked only.[N] Will return to previous level for re-selection.



SupersessionsThe program will check for supersessions. If it finds a superseded item, this line will only be transferred to the invoice file if the supersession warning was overridden in SP10 - Order Entry, or SP11 - Order Review. If this is not the case, the item will not be transferred but a message will be printed on the audit trail. You will have to use program SP11 - Order Review, to either override, or use the supersession. Please refer to Appendix A3 for more details.Stopped AccountsDepending on the option selected in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, for stopped or deleted accounts, the program may stop to warn you that an account has been stopped. If you respond with a [Y], that invoice will be processed, if [N], the invoice will not be processed. However in both cases a warning will be printed on the audit trail.



USER GUIDE

6.13 ORDER ANALYSIS - SP79This program is used to print reports for Order Analysis. This is a soft form print program and MUST use an alternate sequence to print. (Should the normal order sequence be required then SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print can be used). The alternate sequence must be set up in SP33 - Alternate Sequence. The soft form must be set up in SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance form type "OA" Order Analysis.

Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ANALYSIS SP79 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNFORM TYPE: [OA ]TEST PRINT? (Y/N) [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F9 - PRT OPTS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT

FORM TYPE : "OA "Select the form to be used. These are set up in SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.


SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 273

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ANALYSIS SP79 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE [ ]CODE DESCRIPTION <-->DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENCEOA01 ORDER ANALYSIS DETAIL PRINT ORDERS DETAILS FILE


ALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE : 4 digits

Enter the required sequence or scan and select one.

Level 3

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER ANALYSIS SP79 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ORDERS DETAILS FILESEQUENCE OA01 ORDER ANALYSIS DETAIL PRINTALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM [1 01 001000 ] ALT. KEY SCAN TO [0101 001000 ]

CO/BR/ORDER#/LINE# ALTERNATE CODE CUST# PRODUCT01/01/000001-0000<-->0101 001000 100001/01/000006-0000 0101 001000 100001/01/001676-0001 0101 001000 100001/01/124555-0000 0101 001000 100001/01/124555-0002 0101 001000 100001/01/000002-0000 0101 001010 101001/01/000008-0000 0101 001010 101001/01/000012-0000 0101 001010 101001/01/000012-0001 0101 001010 101001/01/000013-0000 0101 001010 101001/01/000014-0000 0101 001010 1010F1 - FWD, F5 - SEQ, F6 - CODES, F10 - ALT.SEQ, ESC - EXIT

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM-TO : Select the required range for printing. This is where the

required group, class and week number are selected to print on the report. The FROM and TO fields are as per the SP33 - Alternate Sequence key, for example Co/Br/Part1 etc.


USER GUIDE

Level 4

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER/SALES ANALYSIS SP79 11/004 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp10 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ALLOCATE CURRENT ORDERS? (Y/N) [N] ALLOCATE ORDER HISTORY? (Y/N) [N] ALLOCATE CURRENT INVOICES? (Y/N) [N] ALLOCATE INVOICE HISTORY? (Y/N) [N] SUMMARY TOTALS ONLY? (Y/N) [N] DELETE OLD SEQUENCE? (Y/N) [N] DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F3 - ACCEPT DETAILS, F10 - PREV, ESC - EXIT

ALLOCATE CURRENT ORDERS? : (Y/N)

If [Y] existing orders will be allocated to the alternate sequence to ensure that the report is up-to-date. This is used instead of allocating in SP33 - Alternate Sequence.

ALLOCATE ORDER HISTORY? : (Y/N)

If [Y] already invoiced orders will be allocated to the alternate sequence to ensure that the report is for all orders for the year-to-date. This cannot be allocated in SP33 - Alternate Sequence and must be done here if history is required.

ALLOCATE CURRENT INVOICES? : Y/N


SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 275

ALLOCATE INVOICE HISTORY? : Y/N


SUMMARY TOTALS ONLY? : (Y/N)

If [Y] only the totals and the detail lines will be printed.

DELETE OLD SEQUENCE? : (Y/N)Enter [Y] to de-allocate the last alternate sequence that was set up before re-allocating it to ensure up-to-date information. It is recommended that the delete and allocate action is done each time a new batch of reports is required. This need be done once only per report printing period {i.e. it changes only as new orders are added (SP10) or existing orders altered (SP11) or orders released for invoicing (SP14)}. Note as the weeks of the year pass this will take longer as more records are being added daily to the file, therefore it might be useful to run overnight before reports are printed.

DETAILS OK? : (Y/N)


USER GUIDE

6.14 INVOICE PRINT FROM HISTORY - SP80The program re-prints invoices that have been generated by the system and which are held on the invoice history file. (INVHIST).

It operates exactly as SP70 - Invoice Form Print.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 277

6.15 CREDIT NOTE PRINT FROM HISTORY - SP81The program re-prints credit notes that have been generated by the system and which are held on the invoice history file. (INVHIST).

It operates exactly as SP71 - Credit Note Form Print.


USER GUIDE

6.16 LABEL AND MANIFEST - SP82This program enables you to enter the number of cartons and weights per invoice, both for current and those on the history file. It will then print labels (FORM TYPE SL) and a manifest (FORM TYPE SM).



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - LABEL AND MANIFEST SP82 11/001CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CCBR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH LABEL FORM TYPE: (1) [SL ] MANIFEST FORM TYPE: (2) [SM ] PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N] DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y] F3-ACCEPT, F9-PRT OPTS, F10-CO/BR, ESC-EXIT

The above screen requires you to enter the Label and Manifest Form Types and you may also request a print test.

Enter [Y] to continue to the next level.

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 279

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - LABEL AND MANIFEST SP82 11/001CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CCBR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH INV # 000462 DEL DATE 02/12/03 ROUTE CUS ORD #ACC # 1006 JOAN RAYNER GENUINE TOTAL CARTONS [ 5] WEIGHT UNIT [10 ] MANIFEST PRINTED CARTON WEIGHT CARTON WEIGHT CARTON WEIGHT CARTON WEIGHT 1 P[ 1.000 ] 2 P[ 2.000 ] 3 P[ 3.000 ] 4 P[ 2.000 ] 5 P[ 2.000 ] F1-NEXT, F2-BACK, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-BACK, ESC-EXIT

Enter the number of cartons and the weight unit, e.g. Kl (Kilo) Lb (Pound)

Then enter the actual weight for each carton. If you enter details for more than the number of cartons entered, the system will update that value automatically.

Press [F3] to save the details.

The other options on the status line are [F2] to move backwards to a previous screen if you have entered details for more than one screen, [F8] to delete, [F9] to print, [F10] to move to the previous screen where you can select another invoice, and [ESC] to escape from the program.

When you press [F9] to print, the system will print one label for each carton, and one manifest per invoice.


USER GUIDE

6.17 RELEASE PICKED QUANTITY AND PRINT DELIVERY NOTE - SP83

This program will only be used if you wish to print delivery notes for picked items.

You will run this program exactly as we described for SP14 - Order Release. delivery Notes will be printed according to the format you specified in SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.


SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 281

6.18 RELEASE DELIVERED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE - SP84This program will only be used if you wish to print delivery notes for picked items. It reads the delivery note file SPDEL and calculates the amount to be invoiced. An invoice is written to the invoice file for subsequent printing.




USER GUIDE

6.19 RELEASE DELIVERED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE - SP85This program will only be used if you wish to print delivery notes for picked items. It reads the delivery note file SPDEL and calculates the amount to be invoiced. An invoice is written to the invoice file. Program SP70 - Invoice Form Print, is then called to print the invoice.



SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 283

6.20 CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE - SP86

This program is exactly as SP87 - Customer Release Picked Quantities to Invoice except that it immediately calls the Invoicing print program to print the resultant invoices.



Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - ORDER RELEASE AND PRINT CONS BY CUST SP87 11/021CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNINVOICE FORM TYPE: [IV ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


INVOICE FORM TYPE : IVxx.Enter the required form type. (This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance).




DETAILS OK? : Y/N


USER GUIDE

6.21 CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE - SP87

This program is exactly as SP14 - Order Release except that any orders selected for a debtor are consolidated onto a single invoice. In addition you may select to suppress the display of individual orders when the system releases them.

You may also print sub-total per order. Please refer to Appendix B1.1 for a description of the form set-up.


A screen like the one shown below, allows you to select the required orders. This list excludes "proforma" or "on hold" orders.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QUANTITIES TO INVOSP87 11/001 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED ttyp9 BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN CUST # [000000] ORDER# CUST# CUST ORD# DEL DATE USERNAME QUANTITY VALUE 000123<-->000000 98/10/16 SYSADMIN 5.00 2299.02 000124 1000 98/10/16 SYSADMIN 12.00 479.77 002140 1000 98/09/22 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 002141 1000 98/09/22 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 002142 1000 98/09/23 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 002153 1000 BACKORDER 98/09/23 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 *M* 002155 1000 BACKORDER 98/09/23 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 *M* 002157 100000 98/10/23 SYSADMIN 105.00 3891.86 002404 100000 98/05/29 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 002106 AAF1 98/08/21 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 002107 AAF1 98/08/21 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 002120 ABBY 98/09/04 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 002143 ABBY CHECK 98/10/02 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 002144 ABBY CHECK 98/10/02 SYSADMIN 0.00 0.00 F1 - FWDS, F5 - CHANGE SEQ, F7 - MARK, F10 - REL OPT

SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 285

6.22 DELIVERY ADDRESS CHANGES PRINT - SP88This program prints all changes made to delivery addresses. You should print it regularly and then use SP98 - Delivery Address Changes Cleardown to clear the file.



USER GUIDE

6.23 DISCOUNT/PRICE CHANGES PRINT - SP89This program prints all changes made to discounts or prices in SP32 - Discount Maintenance . You should print it regularly and then use SP98 - Delivery Address Changes Cleardown to clear the file.


SP - Print JULY 2006 6 - 287

7.BACK ORDER MODULE

7.1 BACK ORDER MODULE MENUThe programs in the back order module are;

SP61 - BACK ORDER DELETE OR AMEND

SP62 - NARRATIVE COPY PROGRAM

SP67 - BACK ORDER REPORT

SP69 - BACK ORDER RELEASE

The Back Order Module consists of a set of programs to control back orders and generate new orders when Inventory levels allow this.

This module will only be activated if the relevant option is set correctly in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

The normal Sales Order Processing Order Capture and Release programs are used to capture orders and generate back orders as required. These programs are SP10 - Order Entry, SP14 - Order Release and SP40 - Batch Order Capture.

Enter SP6 to display the Back Order Module menu.

Enter SP to return to the Sales Order Processing menu or M to return to the main menu.

Appendix - 288

USER GUIDE

7.2 BACK ORDER DELETE OR AMEND - SP61This program allows back order records to be deleted from the file or quantities on back order to be amended.



Level 1


Scan for or enter the required alternate sequence. These alternate sequences are entered in program SP33 - Alternate Sequence. If no alternate sequence codes have been set up the file will be read in the default sequence which is Company/Branch and Internal Order number.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER DELETE OR AMEND SP61 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE [ ]CODE DESCRIPTION <-->DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENCEBO01 SP - B/O CONSOLIDATION KEY BACK-ORDERS DETAILS FILE


Appendix 289

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER DELETE OR AMEND SP61 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALORDER NUMBER [ 15] LINE NUMBER [1 ] DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENCEORDER# CUSTOMER PRODUCT ORD LINE B/O DATE B/O QUANTITY000015<-->1000 005/5WIT 46 1 92/02/19 12.00000015 1000 006S-20-WIT 46 2 92/02/19 5.00000015 1000 028-WIT 46 3 92/02/19 13.00

*** NO MORE ITEMS ***F1 - SCAN, F8 - DELETE, F10 - ALT.SEQ, ESC - EXIT

ORDER NUMBER : 6 digits Enter or scan for the number using [F1] to scan in the selected alternate scan sequence.The back orders are displayed showing Order #, Customer number, Product Code, back order date and quantity.

LINE NUMBER : 4 digitsScan or select the line number that you would like to access.

Press [Enter] to access the required record.

Appendix - 290

USER GUIDE

Level 3

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER DELETE OR AMEND SP61 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNWH : 01 - CENTRALORDER # 000015 WHITE SPIRAFLEX TUBE BLACK CONCUSTOMER 1000 HOLCHER DARROLL INC.PRODUCT 005/5WIT 46 WHITE SPIRAFLEX TUBE BLACK CONBACK-ORDER DETAILSDATE [92/02/19]QUANTITY [ 12.00 ]COMMENT [AWAITING DELIVERY EX FACTORY ]

F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - PREVIOUS SCREEN, ESC - EXIT

DATE : CCYYMMDD.Accept or alter the date displayed on the screen.

QUANTITY : 7.2 digitsAccept or alter the quantity displayed on the screen.Press [F3] to effect the changes or [F8] to delete the record.

COMMENT : 30 charactersEnter a meaningful comment for this item if required.

The first 4 comments are released to order comments.

The status line displays the available options.

Appendix 291

7.3 NARRATIVE COPY PROGRAM - SP62This program updates identical items with the first narrative found on the Back Orders file for that item.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - NARRATIVE COPY PROGRAM SP62 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN PERIOD - 03WH : 01 - CENTRALPART # FROM [ ] TO [zzzzzzzzzzzzzzz]APPLY ACROSS ALL CO/BR/WH? (Y/N) [Y]UPDATE FIELDS [1] 1 - All Narrative fields 2 - Blank Narrative fields onlyDETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]

F3 - ACCEPT DETAILS, F10 - WH, ESC - EXIT

PART # FROM - TO : 15 digits

APPLY ACROSS ALL CO/BR/WH? : Y/N

If [Y] the charges will be made to all identical items. If [N] the charges will only apply to items in the selected Co/Br/Warehouses.

UPDATE FIELDS : [1] All Narrative fieldsAll subsequent identical items will be updated with the first narrative found for that item.[2] Blank Narrative fields onlyOnly those identical items with a blank narrative will be updated.

DETAILS OK? Y/N

Appendix - 292

USER GUIDE

7.4 BACK ORDER REPORT - SP67The program prints a back order report for a selected range of items, in a selected alternate key sequence with user selected control breaks.



Level 1


Scan for or enter the required alternate sequence. These alternate sequences are entered in program SP33 - Alternate Sequence. If no alternate sequence codes have been set up the file will be read in the default sequence which is Company/Branch and Internal Order number.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER REPORT SP67 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE [ ]CODE DESCRIPTION <-->DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENCEBO01 SP - B/O CONSOLIDATION KEY BACK-ORDERS DETAILS FILE


Appendix 293

Level 2

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER REPORT SP67 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN BACK-ORDERS DETAILS FILESEQUENCE BOCU ACCUMULATIVE BACK ORDERALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM [1 01011000 0002 ] ALT. KEY SCAN TO [0101011000 0002 ]

CO/BR/ORDER#/LINE# ALTERNATE CODE CUST# PRODUCT01/01/001711-0001<-->0101011000 0002 1000 000201/01/001712-0001 0101011000 0002 1000 000201/01/001705-0004 0101011000 0005 1000 000501/01/001706-0001 0101011010 0001 1010 000101/01/001706-0002 0101011010 0002 1010 000201/01/001706-0004 0101011010 0005 1010 000501/01/001707-0003 0101011020 0001 1020 000101/01/001694-0002 0101011020 0002 1020 000201/01/001707-0004 0101011020 0002 1020 000201/01/001707-0001 0101011020 0007 1020 000701/01/001713-0001 0101011400 0001 1400 0001F1 - FWD, F5 - SEQ, F6 - CODES, F10 - ALT.SEQ

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM : The length is user-defined in program SP33 -

Alternate Sequence.

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # TO : The length is user-defined in program SP33 -

Alternate Sequence.Enter or scan for the alternate sequence number using [F1] to scan in the selected alternate scan sequence and [F5] to toggle the scan between alternate sequence and order number sequence.

If [Enter] is pressed in both fields the full range of back orders will be printed, press [Enter] to access the required record.

Appendix - 294

USER GUIDE

Level 3

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER REPORT SP67 11/001CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN BACK-ORDERS DETAILS FILEALTERNATE SEQUENCE BOCU ACCUMULATIVE BACK ORDERCONSOLIDATION (Y/N) PAGE SKIP (Y/N)COMPANY [N] [N]BRANCH [N] [N]WAREHOUSE [N] [N]CUSTOMER # [Y] [Y]PRODUCT [N] [N]


The entries on this screen determine total breaks and page skipping. Two entries pertain to each part of the key.



Press [F3] to print the report, [F10] to return to the range selection and [Esc] to exit the program.

Appendix 295

CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER REPORT DATE 98/09/01 @ 14:57 PAGE 1BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN BOCU ACCUMULATIVE BACK ORDER SP67 50-001 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------- ORDER# CUST# CUSTOMER-ORDER# CUSTOMER NAME ORD DATE DEL DATE WH BIN# PRODUCT DESCRIPTION UOM BACK ORDER PRICE GRSS VALUE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

1706 1010 JONES GENERAL CONTRACTING 89/08/30 89/08/30 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 12.00 0.00 0.00 01 0002 CURTAIN RAIL EACH 20.00 0.00 0.00 01 0005 WINE GLASSES EACH 20.00 0.00 0.00

1707 1020 SHEET ROCK SUPPLY CO 89/08/30 89/08/30 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 12.00 0.00 0.00

1694 1020 87 SHEET ROCK SUPPLY CO 89/08/25 89/08/25 01 0002 CURTAIN RAIL EACH 20.00 0.00 0.00

1707 1020 SHEET ROCK SUPPLY CO 89/08/30 89/08/30 01 0002 CURTAIN RAIL EACH 15.00 0.00 0.00 01 0007 VASES EACH 5.00 55.00 275.00

1713 1400 SMITH PAINTING CONTRACTORS 89/08/31 89/08/31 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 12.00 0.00 0.00

1714 1400 SMITH PAINTING CONTRACTORS 89/08/31 89/08/31 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 24.00 0.00 0.00

1695 2000 67 ALL WEATHER ROOF CO. 89/08/25 89/08/25 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 1.00 0.00 0.00

1708 2000 ALL WEATHER ROOF CO. 89/08/30 89/08/30 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 10.00 20.00 200.00

1710 2000 ALL WEATHER ROOF CO. 89/08/31 89/08/31 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 30.00 0.00 0.00

1695 2000 67 ALL WEATHER ROOF CO. 89/08/25 89/08/25 01 0002 CURTAIN RAIL EACH 3.00 25.00 75.00 01 0004 RODS EACH 10.00 0.00 0.00

1708 2000 ALL WEATHER ROOF CO. 89/08/30 89/08/30 01 0004 RODS EACH 10.00 0.00 0.00 01 0005 WINE GLASSES EACH 12.00 0.00 0.00

1696 2560 87 CROWN MOVING & FREIGHT 89/08/25 89/08/25 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 30.00 0.00 0.00

1697 3000 12 ACE STONE & MARBLE SUPPLY 89/08/25 89/08/25 01 0001 SHOWER CURTAINS EACH 15.00 0.00 0.00 01 0002 CURTAIN RAIL EACH 3.00 0.00 0.00 01 0004 RODS EACH 35.00 0.00 0.00 01 0007 VASES EACH 9.00 55.00 495.00

* * * E N D O F R E P O R T * * *

SP67 - Back Order Report

Appendix - 296

USER GUIDE

7.5 BACK ORDER RELEASE - SP69This program matches back orders against inventory and generates orders for any of the back order items where stock is now available. An order is printed at the same time.

If the option is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance, you may also selectively mark orders and items for release. Where comments have been entered in SP61 - Back Order Delete or Amend the first 4 lines found will be used as comments when releasing a back order.

Please note, this program ignores superseded items and will not transfer them to orders.


Level 1

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER RELEASE SP69 11/006CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWNORDER FORM TYPE: [SP ]DUPLICATE REQUIRED? [N]PRINT TEST REQUIRED? [N]DETAILS OK? (Y/N) [Y]


ORDER FORM TYPE : SPxxEnter the required form type. This refers to the user-defined form as set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

DUPLICATE REQUIRED : Y/N.If [Y] duplicate orders will be printed side by side.

PRINT TEST REQUIRED? : Y/N.If [Y] a test document will be produced to facilitate line up of pre-printed stationery.

DETAILS OK? (Y/N) : Y/N.If [Y] the matching will continue and the order documents will be printed.

Appendix 297

Level 2


SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER RELEASE SP69 11/007CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN





Level 3

ITEMS PER ORDER? : 2 digitsEnter the number of lines each order may contain. The maximum number is 80.

Appendix - 298

USER GUIDE

Level 4

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER RELEASE SP69 11/108CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATEDBR - 01 - CAPE TOWN RELEASE ALL B/ORDERS? (Y/N/M) [N] F10 - BACK, ESC - EXIT

RELEASE ALL B/ORDERS? : Y/N/M

[Y] allows you to select a range of orders to be released, using the alternate sequence i.e. the sequence nominated in SP00 - System Record Maintenance as the consolidation sequence for back orders and set up in SP33 - Alternate Sequence. Only back orders, for which there is enough free stock to satisfy the order, will be released.

[N] gives you the option to scan back orders, either in order number sequence or in the alternate sequence, to mark orders for release using [F7] and to enter the quantity to be released.[M] releases all orders previously marked for release. Only back orders, for which there is enough free stock to satisfy the order, will be released, regardless of the quantity entered.

If you answer [N] to the ‘RELEASE ALL?’ option, you will be able to scan back orders.

Appendix 299

When you have selected the range of items, use [F7] to mark individual items for release.

SALES ORDER PROCESSING - BACK ORDER RELEASE SP69 11/108 CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN ORDER NUMBER [ 1703] LINE NUMBER [0001] DEFAULT MASTERFILE KEY SEQUENC ORDER# CUSTOMER PRODUCT LINE B/O DATE QUANTITY 000124 1000 433 1 29/06/94 88.00 000234 1000 SH007 1 01/07/94 10.00 000322 1000 107-20 1 27/06/94 38.00 000432 1000 126-20R 1 26/09/95 2.00 000446 1000 005/5WIT 46 1 26/09/95 2.00 001688 1000 433 1 01/07/94 60.00 001688 1000 433 2 01/07/94 72.00 001697 1000 001WIT46 1 26/09/95 2.00 001700 1000 SER1 1 23/08/95 9.00 001702 1000 001WIT46 1 26/09/95 1.00 001703<-->1000 001WIT46 1 26/09/95** MARKED ** 12.00 001705 1000 001WIT46 1 26/09/95 3.00 001709 1000 006S-20-WIT 46 1 05/09/95 1.00 001710 1000 107EA-21B 1 05/09/95 100.00 F1 - FWD, F5 - SEQ, F7 - MARK, F10 - REL.OPTS, ESC - EXIT

Appendix - 300

USER GUIDE

APPENDIX A

A.1. ORDER AVAILABILITY/MESSAGE SYSTEMIn SP00 - System Record Maintenance you may select to use an inventory availability and the relevant message facility. This facility is described below. The rules are checked by the Order and Invoicing programs. The relevant messages may be optionally printed on the forms if requested in the set up of SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

The system was written to control the releasing of stock, where sufficient physical stock exists, but under certain circumstances, for instance where a book has been banned, it may not be released.

The four messages set up in SP00 - System Record Maintenance and to be applied to items where insufficient physical stock exist, are as follows;

Rule 1 - Supply (Yes or No)

Rule 2 - Back order (Yes or No)

Rule 3 - Print Invoice and message (Yes or No)

Rule 4 - Release Back order (Yes, No or Cancel)

MESSAGES - IV30

In program IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance you may link a message to a stock item using a three digit code. (The message will be a system message, that is, it will not depend on a particular company/branch or a particular system, but will be available to all Titan systems via a Systems Utility program. A file, SUNAR, which is a general systems narrative file, is used. A Status type will be attached to each message - See program SU33 - Narrative File Maintenance, in the Systems Utilities User Guide).

All messages on file may be scanned in program IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance and the appropriate one selected or a code may be entered or amended without scanning. These codes will always be validated against those entered in SU33. The message codes are also printed in program IV70 - Company/Branch Masterfile Print.

Appendix 301

INVENTORY AVAILABILITY

Options for message type 1 and 2 may be set by yourself in program SP00 - System Record Maintenance. Message type 3 items do not use these options but are handled as all other non-message type items.

Below are examples of how these options may be set and the effect they have.

1. FIXED - NO BACK ORDERS ALLOWED - BANNED PUBLICATIONS

Set up in SU33 - Narrative File Maintenance type 1

Option 1 - [N] Do not supply stock even if sufficient.

Option 2 - [N] Do not back order stock

Option 3 - [Y] Create invoice with zero supplied and message "No back order"

Option 4 - [C] If back orders exist, release what is available, cancel the rest and create an invoice as above.

2. FIXED - BACK ORDERS ALLOWED - TO BE PUBLISHED


Option 1 - [N] Do not supply stock even if sufficient.

Option 2 - [Y] Stock may be back ordered.

Option 3 - [Y] Create invoice with "zero supplied" and message printed with the relevant quantity back ordered.

Option 4 - [N] Back orders must not be released but will be held until such a release is processed.

3. NON-FIXED - AWAITING DELIVERY OF FURTHER STOCK


Stock on hand may be delivered and no message printed.

If insufficient stock on hand, invoice created with zero supplied and message printed. Normal back order options allowed (i.e. stock may or may not be back ordered).

Create invoice with "zero supplied" and message printed with the relevant quantity back ordered.

Back orders must not be released but will be held until such a release is processed.

If you use message type 3, and you specify in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance, that this message should be printed on the invoice, it ALWAYS prints, even where you are supplying the goods, so it really just functions as an additional description.

Appendix - 302

USER GUIDE

A.2 ORDER ANALYSISThis facility has been written for a specific sales analysis. In the case of a company that sells through agents, individual items in a large consignment sent at a target price might be sold on the open market at a higher or lower price. This is especially the case with fresh produce sales, which fluctuate with the demand, freshness etc. The supplier keeps a record on a weekly basis from the information provided by the agent as to quantity sold and the price until the consignment is complete. The supplier then sends an invoice to the agent showing the agent's commission and various levies deducted. The agent will then submit a payment for this amount.

In order to control this situation a data record must be kept of gross average price, quantity sold per type of product, per agent per week. Summary and cumulative reports plus record of payments must also be kept.

These controls may be set up in the Sales Order Processing module as follows.

Stock numbers may be set up as required, for example in three parts - group, class and count such as Golden Delicious Apples 1st Class with count 80 would be GD 1 080.

The order analysis option for SP10 - Order Entry must be set to [Y] in SP00 - System Record Maintenance. The new file ORDHIST must be created using SU00 - Create System Files.

Consignments must be entered as Standing Orders in SP34 - Create Standing Orders. These will show the target price and the number of boxes per count that were sent. SP38 - Standing Order Print will now print out these consignments which are then sent to the dealers/agents. (Consignments are never released as orders but are just held as standing orders and are printed as and when required.) A numbering system for these consignments must be set up.

The agent will send in details of boxes sold and prices received on a weekly basis. These details are entered in SP10 - Order Entry as 'orders' for the first week (and added in SP11 - Order Review each following week until the full consignment has been sold). A system of allocating numbers to these 'orders' to link them with a consignment must be ensured.

On the final screen (order total screen) of SP10 - Order Entry and SP11 - Order Review the Accounts Receivable Transaction file may now be scanned using [F1] SCAN TRANS. This scan will show the un-allocated payments made by the agent for this consignment so far. They will be totalled and displayed below the customer's balance. If the cheques for one consignment only are to be shown, the cross reference when payments are entered in AR11 - Payment Input MUST be the consignment number.

Once the agent has completed the consignment an invoice must be sent to him. The 'order' is completed in SP11 - Order Review by adding negative sundries for the agents commission and various levies as required. This order is then released by SP14 - Order Release as an invoice. As SP14 deletes the order, each order detail line is written to the Order History file (ORDHIST).

Appendix 303

ORDER ANALYSIS REPORT

The reports for the order analysis are printed in SP79 - Order/Sales Analysis using alternate sequences set up in SP33 - Alternate Sequence. This is a soft form print and MUST use an alternate sequence to print. (Should a normal order sequence be required then SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print can be used). The required alternate sequence must be set up in SP33 - Alternate Sequence. In addition an order week number may now be selected as part of a key as well as the three individual parts of the stock number. For example -

Co/Br/Stk part 1 (group) /stk part 2 (class) /week #/customer/stk part 3 (count).

A soft form must be set up in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance. The form type is "OA" Order Analysis.

Please also refer to Appendix B3 for more information regarding the possible fields which may be selected for printing on your form.

EXAMPLE REPORT FORMAT

General - Length 66, width 132, start body 4, end body 62 or similar.

Header 1 - Company/Branch report header line 1 Colm 1.

MATRIX LINE COLUMNBody 1 Alternate sequence number - Part 5 H 5 33

Alternate sequence number - Part 3 H 4 25

Alternate sequence number - Part 4 H 4 46

Body 2 Customer Name B 7 01

Body 3 Ordered Quantity BQ 8 25

Average Price BQ 7 25

Column Heading in Matrix H 6 34

Title 1 GROSS B 7 19

QTY B 8 19

WEEK: H 5 25

Appendix - 304

USER GUIDE

Matrix Print Details

Many lines in body? Y

Next heading line 5 (i.e. break on week#)Next horizontal line 6 (i.e. break on agent)Next column 7 (i.e. break on count)Page break on heading Y/N (Y will give a new page for

every matrix heading)Vertical column total YOverscore YUnderscore YColumn width 9

Matrix Column Details

Column 01 070 *

Column 02 080Column 03 090Column 04 100Column 05 110Column 06 120Column 07 135Column 08 150Column 09 165Column 10 180Column 11 J/P etc.

NOTE; These columns must be the count as per part 3 of the stock code.

EXAMPLE CUMULATIVE REPORT

Another alternate sequence in SP33 - Alternate Sequence - Co/Br/Part 1/Part 2/Customer/Week/Part3.

Program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance set up to change as follows.

MATRIX LINE COLUMNBody 1 Alternate sequence number - Part 6 H 5 46

Title 1 CUMULATIVE TO WEEK: H 5 25

Matrix Print Details

Next Heading Line 4 (i.e. break on week #)

Appendix 305

A.3 SUPERSESSIONSSupersessions are treated in a uniform manner across all Titan applications.

Titan deals with two types of supersessions. The first is a 'Date' type. This will mean that from a certain date a product should no longer be used but its supersession should be used. The second type is a 'Zero quantity' type. This means that the supersession will come into play once the quantity of the superseded item is zero and is date independent.

Superseded items and their supersessions are entered in the Inventory system using program IV34 - Alternative/Supersessions Maintenance. Program IV00 - System Record Maintenance, is also used. Look at the screen called 'INVENTORY TRANSACTION PARAMETERS', there are two columns which pertain to Supersessions. The first is called 'SUPERSESSIONS AUTO OPTION' and the second 'PASSWD'.

The first allows you to specify an automatic action to be taken for the different transaction types, when the system detects that an item has been superseded. In the absence of a specified action, the input programs will stop and wait for operation intervention. The possible actions are as follows;

1. Continue as though there is no supersession and process on the old item.

2. Supply the available quantity on the old item and ignore the remainder.

3. Supply the available quantity on the old item and the remainder for the supersession.

4. Supply everything on the supersession item.

We suggest that options be allowed as below although this is not mandatory.

Option / Transact. Type

Receipts Issues Adjustments

Transfers Goods received

Invoice for Goods received

Option 1 Y Y Y N Y YOption 2 N Y N N N NOption 3 N Y N N N NOption 4 Y Y N N Y Y

If the field is left blank, a second prompt will be displayed. This requires an [N] in any or all of the 4 positions which correspond to the options above. An [N] in any position indicates that this specific option will not be available to an operator at entry stage.

The second new column expects a Y/N response. This is to indicate whether a supervisor password will be required when action is specified at transaction capture stage.

This will be used by the individual Titan applications as follows ;

Appendix - 306

USER GUIDE

SALES ORDER PROCESSING

The following programs will check the options set in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance for Issue parameters and will take suitable action or prompt for operator and/or supervisor intervention. The option selected will be saved on the ORDERS file.

SP10 - ORDER ENTRY SP19 - DEMAND ORDER ENTRY

SP11 - ORDER REVIEW

The following programs will check the options set in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance for Issue parameters and will take suitable action or prompt for operator and/or supervisor intervention.

SP15 - BATCH INVOICE ENTRY SP18 - DEMAND CREDIT NOTE ENTRY

SP16 - DEMAND INVOICE ENTRY SP40 - BATCH ORDER CAPTURE

SP17 - CREDIT NOTE ENTRY

The following programs will check the options set in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance for Transfer parameters and will take suitable action or prompt for operator and/or supervisor intervention.

SP20 - BRANCH ORDER ENTRY SP21 - BRANCH ORDER REVIEW

When the following programs are run, the system checks to see if any supersession decisions were taken in program SP10 - Order Entry, program SP11 - Order Review or program SP20 - Branch Order Entry, or program SP21 - Branch Order Review. If so, it uses the record as it stands. If no check has been performed yet and the item has been superseded, the transfer does not take place and the relevant review programs must be used to change the records with supersessions.

SP14 - ORDER RELEASE SP83 - RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT DELIVERY NOTE

SP24 - BRANCH ORDER RELEASE SP86 - CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE

SP78 - ORDER RELEASE AND PRINT SP87 - CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE

Program SP45 - Batch Invoice Capture does not check for supersessions at all, but use the records as they stand.

Program SP61 - Back Order Delete or Amend and program SP67 - Back Order Report both give a message when an item has been superseded.

Program SP69 - Back Order Release ignores superseded items and does not transfer them to orders.

Program SP90 - Update Orders with Supersessions may be used to update outstanding orders with supersessions.

Appendix 307

INVENTORY CONTROL

Program IV00 - System Record Maintenance must be set for the Automatic and Supervisor Password options as described.

Program IV34 - Alternative/Supersessions Maintenance allows you to maintain supersessions. Please refer to the Maintenance section of the Inventory User Guide for more information.

Program IV10 - Issues/Receipts/Adjustments/Transfers will check the IV00 - System Record Maintenance parameters and will take suitable action or prompt for operator and/or supervisor intervention.

Program IV21 - Interface to Point of Sale and program IV40 - Batch input into IV from flatfile take the action specified in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance. If no automatic option has been specified, the item will be ignored but a warning will be printed on the report.

JOB COSTING

The following programs will check the options set in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance for Issue parameters and will take suitable action or prompt for operator and/or supervisor intervention.

JC10 - JOB COST INPUT

JC19 - CONTRACT INPUT

JC20 - JOB TEMPLATE INPUT

JC21 - JOB MAINTENANCE - FAST MATERIALS INPUT

JC22 - JOB COST INPUT - FAST MATERIALS INPUT

JC30 - JOB/OPERATION MAINTENANCE

The following programs will check the options set in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance for Receipt parameters and will take suitable action or prompt for operator and/or supervisor intervention.

JC17 - CONTRACT INPUT - PURCHASE ORDER

JC18 - CONTRACT INPUT - DEMAND PURCHASE ORDER

Program JC99 - Update Template Supersessions allows you to update all superseded items on your templates with the relevant supersessions. Where the supersession already exists as a line item on the template, a warning will be given on the resulting audit trail and you will have to update the template manually - deleting the superseded item and updating the required qty of the supersession.

Appendix - 308

USER GUIDE

PURCHASE ORDERING

The following programs will check the options set in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance for Receipt parameters and will take suitable action or prompt for operator and/or supervisor intervention.

PO10 - ORDER INPUT

PO11 - ORDER AMENDMENT

PO16 - PURCHASE ORDER ADJUSTMENTS

PO17 - DIRECT RECEIPT OF GOODS

The following programs will give a warning that an item has been superseded. If you wish to receive on the new item, you will have to make the change in PO11.

PO13 - INPUT OF GOODS RECEIVED

PO15 - INPUT OF GOODS AND INVOICE

The following program also gives a warning. However this means that the item was received under the superseded (old) number and therefore it should be invoiced to the same.

PO14 - INVOICE FOR GOODS RECEIVED

Program PO94 - Update Order Supersessions allows you to optionally update Purchase Orders, Recommended Orders, Standing or Temporary Orders with supersessions. No partially received/invoiced orders will be changed.

Please note that none of the programs in the PO4 - RECOMMENDED ORDERS MODULE will allow you to use superseded items.

Appendix 309

A.4 POINT-OF SALETitan provides you with Point-of-Sale features. To make use of these features there are a few prerequisites. These are listed below.

PREREQUISITES1. Program SU31 Description File maintenance, type [PM] must be set up. This allows

you to specify into which total on SP01 - Financials the specific payment method should be accumulated. The default is always on account. You may allow the customer to make use of multiple payment methods, such as part cash and part credit card.

2. You must enter a default Payment Method for each customer in program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance. There is a separate numbering sequence for each payment type.

3. You must select Payment Method on the SP00 - System Record Maintenance Jump Table.

4. A special form type ‘IV’ and/or ‘SP’ should be set up to make use of the ‘Amount Tendered’, ‘Change’ and ‘Customers Balance’ fields. You must also enter ‘999’ in the form length field. This denotes a variable length form and will cause a trailer to print immediately at the end of the body lines after printing one blank line. You may also specify a fixed length trailer by specifying trailer lines in the range 990 to 998. These entries are made in SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance.

5. The Cash Drawer - SU01 Command Number field in program SP00 - System Record Maintenance must indicate the command number entered in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup.

6. You must set an Operating System command which will open your Cash Drawer. Do this in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup, Option 5.

7. There are other options in SP00 - System Record Maintenance which relate to Point-of-Sale. Please examine this program carefully. For instance default a quantity of 1 for the cash account number.

OPERATIONOnce your system is set up correctly for the use of the Point-of-Sale facility, program SP16 - Demand Invoice Entry and all other SP1 programs will execute this command when the Cash Analysis code is CASH, CHEQUE, CREDIT CARD, BUY AID or OTHER and you press [F3] to accept the amount tendered.

SP70 - Invoice Form Print and SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print will print the variable length form if selected.

If you used the tendering facility in SP10 - Order Entry , then program SP14 - Order Release will request input per amount tendered and update the cash analysis totals. This is done by user.

Appendix - 310

USER GUIDE

Program SP91 - Interface to AR and SA generates payment records for all invoices with a Cash Analysis type of MULTIPLE, CASH, CHEQUE, CREDIT CARD, BUY AID OR OTHER. SP92 - Cash Up allows you to enter either cash totals per user (till) or if you are signed on as SYSADMIN, for all users on the system. It then clears the totals either for the whole system or for an individual user (till) as the case may be. It optionally writes details to the SPHANAL file.

Appendix 311

A.5. AUTO ORDERING FOR BM COMPONENTS IN SPWhen selling a finished stock item which is manufactured in-house and has been taken on as a bill in BM30 - Subassembly Maintenance, for example a kit, there is a requirement to raise a Purchase Order for incomplete or back ordered bills. Similarly, for all bills placed on backorder, there is a requirement to raise a Sales Order for the components required to make up the shortfall, so that these can be issued to manufacturing. In some instances there may still be a shortfall of the components to make up the bill. In this case, two orders are required - one for the components to make up as many complete bills for which there is sufficient stock, and one for the components for the shortfall. On the second order, the insufficient stock will be placed on backorder.

Some programs involved in this facility are:

SP00 - System record MaintenanceSet the option to generate bills to [Y]

DU13SCThis marks all stock items which exist in BM as parents with a “P”

BM30 - Subassembly MaintenanceAs a bill is captured, the parent is automatically marked with a “P”

BM33 - Explode A Bill A new option has been added to allow a bill from and to.

AR30 - Customer File Maintenancetake on a customer to be used as the issue customer for manufacturing, for example ‘KITS’.

IV33 - Branch Inventory MaintenanceTake on the issue item for the parents, for example ‘KITS’

SP10 - Order Entry

Once [F3] has been pressed to end an order, an additional order is generated for the components for as many bills as can be completed and another for the difference between what can be completed and the back order quantity. Therefore a maximum of two additional orders may be created. These orders are generated against the issue customer.

BM75 - Manufacturing Bill Report An option has been added to print from and to bill. The available stock is based on the free stock and there is an option to print where there is insufficient stock only.

Appendix - 312

USER GUIDE

A.6 SUSPENSE CREDIT NOTE FEATUREThe Sales Ordering System incorporates a suspense credit note feature. This is useful where you wish to update inventory quantities immediately with credit note information when short supplies are detected, but only want accounting details to be updated after a supervisor has done some investigation and then authorises the credit note by releasing it.

You may enter suspense codes to which program GL46 - Interface Inventory to GL should post details in program IV00 - System record Maintenance (Screen 10).

Suspense credit notes are captured in program SP171 - Credit Note Suspense Entry and the following is done automatically”

The stock is updated and a “CRS” transaction type “C” is created in the inventory transaction file (STOCKENQ)

The suspense accounts set up in IV00 - System record Maintenance are updated, and the transaction total (#12) is updated on IVGL

When either SP172 - Credit Note Suspense Release or SP182 - Credit Note Suspense Release & Print are run the following takes place:

The original “CRS” transaction is reversed.

A new “CRN” transaction type “2” is created in the inventory transaction file (STOCKENQ)

The normal Credit Note type “C” entry is created in the invoice file (INVFIL)

The suspense totals are reversed in IV00 - System record Maintenance The credit note total is updated in IV00 - System record Maintenance.

Details of suspense credit notes may be printed via SP741 - Unreleased Credit Note Report .In addition suspense credit notes may also be viewed in program IV50 - Enquiries and IV52 - Enquiries - Alt Sequence and printed in IV77 - Movements Report. The transaction code used for these is “CRS” and the type is “C”.

You may only use this feature if you are NOT posting details to the general ledger via AR32 - Category File Maintenance/GL42 - Interface From Accounts Receivable, but are using GL46 - Interface Inventory to GL to update inventory details.

Appendix 313

APPENDIX B

B1. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE IVYou must decide which of the available details you wish to print on your Invoices/Credit notes.

You will define these forms in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance. Refer to the System Utilities User Guide for general information.

This form is used by programs SP70 - Invoice Form Print, and SP71 - Credit Note Form Print.

It is advisable to print and file a copy of each form created. This will prove useful if for any reason the forms have to be recreated.

When you have selected form type IV the first set up screen is displayed.

Please refer to Appendix B1.1 for details of sub-totals on multiple orders on the same invoice.

Appendix - 314

USER GUIDE

GENERAL DATA - INVOICE

This section defines the dimensions of the form. The system will ensure that details for the various sections do not fall outside the parameters defined here.

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004GENERAL DATA - INVOICEDESCRIPTION [INVOICE - STANDARD ]FORM LENGTH (Lines): [066]FORM WIDTH (Columns): [264]START OF BODY: [025]END OF BODY: [050]

SUMMARY: HEADER: Line 001 to 024 BODY: Line 025 to 050 TRAILER: Line 051 to 066IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1 - NEXT, F3 - ACCEPT, F8 - DELETE, F9 - PRINT, F10 - NEXT FORM, ESC - EXIT

DESCRIPTION : 20 charactersEnter a form description to identify this document.

FORM LENGTH (Lines) : 3 digitsEnter the total number of lines that can be printed on one page of your stationery. For instance enter 66 if your form is 11 inches long and your printer is set to print 6 lines to the inch.

If you are using the Point-of-Sale features (refer to Appendix A4 for more information) then you may wish to print a variable length invoice. This will have the effect of the invoice trailer printing immediately at the end of the body lines after leaving just one blank line. In this case enter anything in the range of 990 to 999 in the ‘Form Length’ field. In addition to printing a variable length invoice, it will also indicate whether you want a fixed length trailer.

Please examine the following.

990 to 998 This will print a trailer with a fixed length of 1 to 9 lines, with 990 indicating 1 line, 991 indicating 2 lines and so forth up to 998 indicating a fixed length trailer of 9 lines. When specifying line numbers in the trailer section of the form, you must number the lines, 990, 992 and so forth.

999 This will print a variable length body with trailer the specified number of lines indicated in the trailer section of the form, followed by 5 blank lines. In this case you will specify your trailer lines as 51, 52 and so forth.

Appendix 315

FORM WIDTH (Columns) : 3 digitsEnter the number of columns across your form. For instance 120 columns for a 12 inch form printing 10 characters to the inch.

START OF BODY : 3 digitsEnter the starting line on which the body of the form begins, that is where item lines will start printing.

END OF BODY : 3 digitsEnter the last line on which item lines are to be printed, before the printer has to skip to a new page, or before trailer information will start printing.

The following summary information is calculated by the system. Ensure that it is accurate and press [Enter] or [F1] to proceed to the next level.

HEADER : Line 999 to 999

BODY : Line 999 to 999

TRAILER : Line 999 to 999

HEADER DETAILS

Header detail screens will be presented until all header information has been specified. Only then will the detail screens be presented.

In each case below, we give you the maximum length of the field to be printed. We display this immediately after the prompt.

You will notice that there are two fields next to each numeric field, namely DGT and DEC, depicted for instance as [07][02]. The first figure represents the size of the whole number and the second the size of its decimal. These indicate the default field size the program will use when printing the forms. You may change these if you wish. Remember that if you specify the size as 7.2, this field will use 11 characters when it is printed as it includes a decimal and a sign.

The DGT field is also used on alpha fields where you wish to print less than the maximum number of characters of a field. The default is zero (0) which indicates the maximum should be printed, if you wish to print fewer characters, enter the number in his field.

Where you do not have enough space on your stationery for the total size of the field, decrease this to the maximum you will hold on file.

Appendix - 316

USER GUIDE

HEADER 1 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 ttyp9 HEADER 1 - INVOICE FONT LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN ACCOUNT TO: CUSTOMER NAME [ ] [001] [020] ADDRESS (#1) [ ] [002] [020] ADDRESS (#2) [ ] [003] [020] ADDRESS (#3) [ ] [004] [020] POST CODE [ ] [005] [020] CONTACT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DELIVER TO: ADDRESS NUMBER [ ] [ ] [ ] CUSTOMER NAME [ ] [001] [100] ADDRESS (#1) [ ] [002] [100] ADDRESS (#2) [ ] [003] [100] ADDRESS (#3) [ ] [004] [100] ADDRESS (#4) [ ] [005] [100] POST CODE [ ] [006] [100] ROUTE (CODE "RC") [ ] [007] [100] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [007] [107] NARRATIVE (#1) [ ] [008] [100] [ ] [ ] CONTACT [ ] [ ] [ ] AREA (CODE "AR") [ ] [009] [100] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

ACCOUNT TO :

The following details pertain to the customer and the address to which accounts are to be sent.

CUSTOMER NAME : 50 charactersThis name will be read from the customer masterfile record.

ADDRESS (#1) : 25 charactersThis will be read from the customer masterfile record.



POST CODE : 8 charactersThis will be read from the customer masterfile record.

CONTACT : 20 charactersThis will be read from the customer masterfile record.

Appendix 317

DELIVER TO :

The following entries pertain to delivery details for the customer. If the delivery address for this invoice is '000', it indicates that the delivery details must be taken from the Customer masterfile and not the Delivery Address file, in which case details will be printed as above, and not as described below.

ADDRESS NUMBER : 3 digitsThe number of the address entered SP31 - Delivery Address, and allocated to this invoice.

CUSTOMER NAME : 30 charactersThe name as entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address. This is held on the delivery address file.

ADDRESS (#1) : 30 charactersThis field is entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address and held on the delivery address file.




POST CODE : 15 charactersThis is entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address and held on the delivery address file.

ROUTE (CODE "RC") : 4 characters.This is entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address and held on the delivery address file.

ROUTE (DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is the description associated with the code above and is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'RC'.

Appendix - 318

USER GUIDE

NARRATIVE (#1) : 30 characters.This is entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address and held on the delivery address file.

CONTACT : 30 charactersEntered in SP31 - Delivery Address Maintenance

Appendix 319

HEADER 2 -INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004HEADER 2 - INVOICE LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMNWAREHOUSE # [007] [050]ACCOUNT # [001] [050]CUSTOMER ORDER #/ (INVOICE #) [002] [050]DOCUMENT # [003] [050] [ ] [ ]INVOICE DATE [004] [050]CURRENT TIME [ ] [ ]PAGE # [001] [125]CO. REGISTRATION # [006] [020]JOB # [005] [050]ORDER # [006] [050]DEBTORS GROUP (CODE "DG") [007] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [007] [025]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

WAREHOUSE # : 2 digitsThis is the number of the store from where the goods were issued.

ACCOUNT # : 6 charactersThis is the customer account number.

CUSTOMER ORDER #/(INVOICE #) : 15 characters

On invoices this is the customer order number (15 digit) and on credit notes, the original invoice number (6 digits) in respect of which the credit note is issued, will be printed here.

DOCUMENT # : 6 digitsThis is either the invoice or the credit note number. Note that it may be printed in two places. You may wish to print it on either/both the header and the trailer.

INVOICE DATE : CCYYMMDDThe date entered when capturing the documents.

CURRENT TIME : HH:MMThis will print the current system time on the invoice.

Appendix - 320

USER GUIDE

PAGE # : 2 digitsEach new invoice/credit note printed will start on page 1, and pages will be numbered consecutively.

CO. REGISTRATION # : 20 charactersThis is entered in program SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 2.

JOB # : 4 charactersIf you interface the Job Costing system to the Sales Order Processing system, you may optionally print the job number.

ORDER # : 6 digitsThis is an internal order number which is generated every time an invoice is captured. If you first capture orders in program SP10 - Order Entry and then release them via program SP14 - Order Release, this will be the original order number.

AREA (CODE "AR") : 4 charactersThis is either read from the customer masterfile or the delivery address file depending on where delivery details are obtained.

DEBTORS GROUP (CODE "DG") : 4 characters

This is read from the Customer masterfile.

DESCRIPTION : 30 charactersThis is the description associated with the code above and is setup and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'DG'

Appendix 321

HEADER 3 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004HEADER 3 - INVOICE LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMNDELIVERY DETAILS CODE 1 (CODE) [011] [001] (REFERENCE) [011] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [011] [040] CODE 2 (CODE) [012] [001] (REFERENCE) [012] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [012] [040] CODE 3 (CODE) [013] [001] (REFERENCE) [013] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [013] [040] CODE 4 (CODE) [014] [001] (REFERENCE) [014] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [014] [040] CODE 5 (CODE) [015] [001] (REFERENCE) [015] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [015] [040] CODE 6 (CODE) [016] [001] (REFERENCE) [016] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [016] [040]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

DELIVERY DETAILS

The following 2 screens allow you to specify the print positions for any or all of the seven Delivery codes and their details. These codes are linked to individual delivery addresses and are entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address.

The codes with their descriptions and reference fields are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance type 'D1' to 'D7'. In all cases the lengths are as specified below.

CODE : 4 characters

REFERENCE : 10 characters

DESCRIPTION : 30 characters

Appendix - 322

USER GUIDE

HEADER 4 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 HEADER 4 - INVOICE FONT LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN DELIVERY DETAILS CODE 7 (CODE) [ ] [ ] [ ] (REFERENCE) [ ] [ ] [ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [ ] [ ]DELIVERY REFERENCE [ ] [ ] [ ]USERNAME (TELLER) [ ] [ ] [ ]HEADER COMMENTS - 1 [ ] [010] [001] - 2 [ ] [011] [001] - 3 [ ] [012] [001] - 4 [ ] [013] [001] - 5 [ ] [014] [001] GROSS SALES EXCLUDING SUNDRIES AND TAX [ ] [ ] [ ]BATCH REFERENCE [ ] [ ] [ ]CUSTOMER CURRENCY CODE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]INVOICE CURRENCY CODE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]INVOICE CURRENCY RATE [ ][ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

The codes with their descriptions and reference fields are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance type 'D1' to 'D7'. In all cases the lengths are as specified below. The fields on this screen represent type D7.

CODE : 4 characters



DELIVERY REFERENCE : 8 charactersThis is the delivery reference as captured in SP31 - Delivery Address Maintenance.

USERNAME (TELLER) : 8 charactersThis is the name of the teller who captured the transaction.

HEADER COMMENTS : 30 charactersThese 5 comments are entered in SP10 and may be printed here.

GROSS SALES EXCLUDING SUNDRIES AND TAX : 9.4 digits

This represents the total for the invoice.

Appendix 323

BATCH REFERENCE : 12 characterThe batch number optionally entered for each document. In the case of batch invoices taken on via flatfiles, this is the batch name.

CUSTOMER CURRENCY CODE : 4 characters

The currency code held on the debtors masterfile for this customer.

INVOICE CURRENCY CODE : 4 charactersThe currency code used on the invoice.

INVOICE CURRENCY RATE : 5.4 digitsThe rate used on this invoice.

HEADER 5 - INVOICE

CODES and NARRATIVES

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 HEADER 5 - INVOICE :- FONT LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN SU31 TYPE <SET IN AR00> LONG DESCRIP 1 AND 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 3 AND 4 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 5 AND 6 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]AR30 F7 - CODE <SET IN AR00> CODE 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] CODE 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] CODE 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] CODE 4 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] CODE 5 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] CODE 6 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

The fields above enable you to print codes and descriptions defined in program AR00 - System record Maintenance. Please refer to that section of the manual for more information.

SU31 TYPE : 240 charactersEach of the 6 description lines are 40 characters long

F7 CODE : 2 characters

F7 DESCRIPTION : 30 characters

Appendix - 324

USER GUIDE

HEADER 6 - INVOICE

CODES and NARRATIVESSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 6 - IV01-SP INVOICE T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC AR30 F6-NARR CODE (SET IN AR00): CODE 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]

IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT



F6 NARRATIVE : 30 characters

Appendix 325

BODY DETAILS

Body detail screens will be presented until all body information has been specified. Only then will the trailer and title screens be presented.

Please refer to the Systems Utilities manual program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance for more details regarding fonts and currency formatting.

BODY 1 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 1 - INVOICE MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMNEXPORT TARIFF [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]STOCK UPDATED Y/N [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]QUANTITY ORDERED (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [095] ORDERED (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] DELIVERED (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [110] DELIVERED (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [125] ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [140] PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] GROSS (BEFORE DISC/SURCHARGE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE (CODE "DS") [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE % [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [155] AMOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]CALCULATED DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE AMOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE NET (AFTER DISC/SURCHARGE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [170]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

EXPORT TARIFF : 15 charactersThis is read from the company record on the inventory masterfile.

STOCK UPDATED Y/N : 1 characterWhen capturing credit notes you may specify whether stock is to be updated or not. If you print this field you will be able to interrogate this response.

QUANTITIES

The following entries pertain to quantities relating to the item invoiced.

ORDERED (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity ordered by the customer expressed in the unit of issue.

ORDERED (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity ordered by the customer expressed in the unit of hold.

Appendix - 326

USER GUIDE

DELIVERED (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity actually delivered to the customer expressed in the unit of issue.

DELIVERED (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity actually delivered to the customer expressed in the unit of hold.

ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the difference of the quantity originally ordered and that delivered in the unit of issue. This will only be printed if back orders are allowed.

ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the difference of the quantity originally ordered and that delivered in the unit of hold. This will only be printed if back orders are allowed.

SELLING PRICES

The following relates to selling prices.

EXCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price as it relates to the unit of issue before tax has been added.

EXCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price as it relates to the unit of hold before tax has been added.

EXCLUSIVE DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price before tax has been added but after the discount/surcharge has been applied.

GROSS (BEFORE DISC/SURCHARGE) : 9.4 digits

This represents the value of the gross selling price multiplied by the quantity supplied for the unit of issue.

Appendix 327

DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE (CODE "DS) : 4 characters

These codes are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance. They are used where a specific delivery address is subject to a specific discount/surcharge. Delivery addresses entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address may contain this code. The same code is then entered in program SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix and may be printed here.

DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE (DESCRIPTION) : 30 characters

This is the description associated with the code above. These are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance type 'DS'.

DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE % : 3.4 digits

This is the percentage applied to the gross selling price when calculating the net value of the line item.

DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE AMOUNT : 7.4 digits

This is the amount deducted from the selling price before calculating the net value of the line item.

CALCULATED DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE AMOUNT : 7.2 digits

This is the total value of the discount deducted to obtain the net value of the line item.

EXCLUSIVE NET (AFTER DISC/SURCHARGE) : 9.2 digits

This is the value of the line item after the application of discount but before the addition of tax. If this line is exempt of tax an '*' will print after this field.

Appendix - 328

USER GUIDE

BODY 2 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 2 - INVOICE MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMNTAX INCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (INCL OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [023] [125] [07][2] [ ]EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (EXCL OVERALL DISC) [ ] [023] [140] [07][2] [ ]PACK SIZE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]MASS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT OF MASS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]MASS X UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]QTY X UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT MASS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]COST PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]COST VALUE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]OPERATION # [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]UOM CONVERSION - FACTOR [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]UNIT OF MEASURE (ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] (HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]FREE FORMAT EXTENDED SIZE DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

TAX INCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT : 9.4 digits

This is the tax value for this line item calculated after overall discount has been applied.

EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (INCL OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 digits

This is the value for the line item after application of line discount/surcharge and using the tax calculated after overall discount has been applied.If this line is exempt of tax an '*' will print after this field.

TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT : 9.4 digits

This is the tax value for this line item calculated ignoring overall discount.

EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (EXCL OVERALL DISCOUNT) : 9.4 digits

This is the value for this line after line discount/surcharge and using tax calculated ignoring overall discount.If this line is exempt of tax an '*' will print after this field.

Appendix 329

PACK SIZE : 4 charactersThis is the packing reference from the inventory branch masterfile.

MASS : 7.3 digitsThis is the quantity picked times the unit mass of the item which is read from the company record on the inventory masterfile.

UNIT OF MASS : 4 charactersThis is as described on the company record of the inventory masterfile.

MASS X UNIT VOLUME : 7.3 digitsThis is (quantity picked times unit mass) times (unit volume per unit of issue).

QTY X UNIT VOLUME : 7.3 digitsThis is quantity picked times unit volume per unit of issue.

UNIT MASS : 7.3 digitsThis is the unit mass of the item and is read from the company record on the inventory masterfile.

COST PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the cost price converted from cost for unit of hold to unit of issue.

COST PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the cost price in unit of hold.

COST VALUE : 7.4 digitsThis is the quantity picked times the cot price per unit of issue.

OPERATION # : 4 charactersIf you interface the Job Costing system to the Sales Order Processing system, you may optionally print the operation.

Appendix - 330

USER GUIDE

UOM CONVERSION - FACTOR : 2 characters

This factor is held on the company record on the inventory masterfile. These factors are set up in program IV35 - Product Weights/Measures Maintenance.

UNIT OFMEASURE (ISSUE) : 4 characters

This is the unit of issue relating to the factor above.

UNIT OF MEASURE (HOLD) : 4 characters

This is the unit of hold relating to the factor above.

FREE FORMAT EXTENDED SIZE DESCRIPTION : 15 characters

See Appendix A5 at the back of this User Guide regarding free format matters. This is passed to the invoice file via PO93 - Redistribute Goods Received. If a size code beginning with 'R', reads 'RT' record type from the description file. For example R32 will be used to look up the description.

Appendix 331

BODY 3 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 3 - INVOICE MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMNPRODUCT MESSAGE - CODE (IV30) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]PRODUCT CODE - PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [001] - PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]SUB-STOCK/SERIAL # - PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [017] - PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]DESCRIPTIONS - PRODUCT [ ] [ ] [ ] [032] - EXTENDED DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [065] - PRODUCT PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - SUB-PRODUCT PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - RANGE OF SIZES [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]HORIZONTAL TOTAL IF MATRIX PRINT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

PRODUCT MESSAGE - CODE (IV30) : 3 characters

Please refer to Appendix A1 at the back of this User Guide for more information.

PRODUCT MESSAGE - DESCRIPTION : 30 characters

The description relating to the code above.

PRODUCT CODE - PART 1 TO 3 : Up to 15 characters

This depends on the definition of your product code in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance.

SUB-STOCK/SERIAL # - PART 1 TO 3 : Up to 15 characters

Appendix - 332

USER GUIDE

DESCRIPTIONS

The following entries relate to descriptions.

PRODUCT : 30 charactersThis will be read from the stock masterfile, or in the case of a non-stock item from the invoice file.

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION : 30 charactersThis will be read from the supersessions file.

PRODUCT PART 1 TO 3 : 30 charactersEach part of the product code may optionally relate to a code held on the descriptions file if specified in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance. This is the description that relates to that code.

SUB-PRODUCT PART 1 TO 3 : 30 characters

As above.

RANGE OF SIZES : 30 charactersWhen using a matrix this will print the range of sizes.

HORIZONTAL TOTAL IF MATRIX PRINT : 9.2 digits

You will only select this if you are printing a matrix type form.

Appendix 333

BODY 4 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 ttyp9 BODY 4 - INVOICE MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMN INCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE [ ] [019] [001] [07][2] [ ] GROSS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] UNIT DIS/SUR PRICE ( / VOLUME) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] TAX % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] BIN # [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] ALTERNATE BIN [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] USERNAME (TELLER) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] SALES CATEGORY [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] COMPANY NAME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] INVOICE NUMBER [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] ORDER # [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] CUSTOMER ORDER # [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DELIVERY NOTE # [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] DELIVERY NOTE DATE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

INCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price for the unit of issue after the tax has been applied.

INCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price for the unit of hold after the tax has been applied.

DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE : 7.2 digits

This is the selling price after tax and discount have been applied.

GROSS : 7.2 digits

UNIT DIS/SUR PRICE ( / VOLUME) : 7.2 digits

This is the discount or surcharge unit price divided by the volume.

TAX % : 2.2 digitsThis is the tax percentage applied to this line item.

Appendix - 334

USER GUIDE

BIN # : 6 charactersThis is read from the branch record on the inventory masterfile.

ALTERNATE BIN : 6 charactersThis is read from the supersessions file where applicable.

USER NAME : 8 charactersThe name of the teller.

SALES CATEGORY : 4 charactersThe sales category of the item.

UNIT VOLUME : 7.3 digitsThis is read from the IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance record.

COMPANY NAME : 30 charactersYou may use this when printing a consolidated picking slip. Please refer to details regarding SP33 - Alternate Sequence, for more information.

INVOICE NUMBER : 6 digits You may use this when printing a consolidated picking slip. Please refer to details regarding SP33 - Alternate Sequence, for more information.

ORDER NO. : 6 charactersThis prints the order number

CUSTOMER ORDER# : 15 charactersThis prints the Customer order Number entered in SP10/15/16

DELIVERY NOTE : 6 charactersThis prints the delivery note number provided you have the option set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.

DELIVERY NOTE DATE : CCYYMMDDThis prints the date on the delivery note provided you have the option set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance

Appendix 335

BODY 5 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/006 BODY 5 - IV -INVOICE MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMN CUSTOMER ORDER # (BODY) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]DELIVERY DATE (BODY) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]REFERENCES - SOFT TERM 3 (SU30 'SP') [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 4 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 5 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]OVERALL DISC% [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE NET (AFTER OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]TAX (AFTER OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (AFTER OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]MEMO DISC% - QUANTITY [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] - TIME DEPENDENT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] - CUMMULATIVE LESS TIME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]WAREHOUSE # (BODY) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] BATCH REFERENCE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

The fields below are taken from the individual invoice lines and not from the Invoice header.

CUSTOMER ORDER (BODY): 15 characters

On invoices this is the customer order number (15 digit) and on credit notes, the original invoice number (6 digits) in respect of which the credit note is issued, will be printed here

DELIVERY DATE (BODY): CCYYMMDD

The date the item was delivered

REFERENCES SOFT TERM (3 – 5) (SU30 'SP) : 8 characters

In SU30 for SP you can set soft terminology for 3, 4,and 5.In the SP00 jump table you can set these fields to be accepted in the body and print them here.

OVERALL DISC% : 3.2 digitsThe overall discount relating to this line item.

EXCLUSIVE NET (AFTER OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 chrs

The exclusive net value after overall discount has been deducted for this line item

TAX (AFTER OVERALL DISC) :The tax value after overall discount has been deducted for this line item

Appendix - 336

USER GUIDE

EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (AFTER OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 chrs

The exclusive net plus tax value after overall discount has been deducted for this line item

MEMO DISC% - QUANTITY : 3.4 digitsThis is the discount percentage relating to quantity discount.

MEMO DISC% - TIME DEPENDENT : 3.4 digits

This is the discount percentage relating to time dependent discount.

WAREHOUSE # (BODY) : 2 digits

Appendix 337

TRAILER DETAILS

Trailer detail screens will be presented until all trailer information has been specified. Only then will the title screens be presented.

TRAILER 1 - INVOICESYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004 TRAILER 1 - IV02-INVOICE FONT CURR LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN H/O ACCOUNT NUMBER [ ] [063] [020] [00] REFERENCE # [ ] [065] [100] [00]X-REFERENCE # [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]SALESMAN (NUMBER CODE "RP") [ ] [061] [100] [00] (NAME) [ ] [061] [106] [00]METHOD OF DELIVERY [ ] [060] [020] [00]METHOD OF PAYMENT [ ] [061] [020] [00]TERMS (CODE "DT") [ ] [062] [020] [00] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [062] [026] [00] (PERCENTAGE %) [ ][ ] [001] [001] [07][2] (SETTLEMENT DISCOUNT) [ ][ ] [001] [085] [07][2]DELIVERY DATE [ ] [062] [100] [00]TAX NUMBER [ ] [064] [020] [00]SA#1 (CODE "S1") [ ] [065] [020] [00] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [065] [026] [00]SA#2 (CODE "S2") [ ] [066] [020] [00] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [066] [026] [00]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

H/O ACCOUNT NUMBER : 6 charactersThis is read from the customer masterfile.

REFERENCE # : 8 charactersThis is the reference entered in programs SP10/15.

X-REFERENCE # : 8 charactersThis is the cross reference entered in programs SP10/15.

SALESMAN (NUMBER CODE "RP") : 4 characters

At invoicing stage this code is read from the customer masterfile or delivery address file but may then be altered.

(NAME) : 30 charactersThis is associated with the code above and is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'RP'

Appendix - 338

USER GUIDE

METHOD OF DELIVERY : 4 charactersDelivery methods and their descriptions are set up in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'DI'. This may be entered at order capture stage.

METHOD OF PAYMENT : 4 charactersPayment methods and their descriptions are set up in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'PM'. This may be entered at order capture stage.

TERMS (CODE "DT") : 4 charactersThis will be read from the customer masterfile.

(DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is associated with the code above and is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'DT'.

(PERCENTAGE %) : 3.2 digitsThe settlement discount percentage from the customer’s terms record.

(SETTLEMENT DISCOUNT) : 9.2 digitsThe settlement discount for this document.

DELIVERY DATE : CCYYMMDDThe delivery date as captured on the invoice header.

TAX NUMBER : 12 charactersThis will be read from the customer masterfile.

SA#1 (CODE "S1") : 4 charactersThis is the sales analysis code 1 optionally entered on the invoice header.

(DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is associated with the code above and is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'S1'.

SA#2 (CODE "S2") : 4 charactersThis is the sales analysis code optionally entered on the invoice header.

Appendix 339

(DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is associated with the code above and is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance type 'S2'.

TRAILER 2 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 TRAILER 2 - INVOICE FONT LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN TOTAL CALCULATED DISC/SURCHARGE AMT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]NET VALUE TOTAL [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TAX ON OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TAX INCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [049] [070] [07][2]TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]SUB TOTAL (NET + DISCOUNTS + INCL TAX) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]SUB TOT (NET + LINE DISCOUNT + EXCL TAX) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]SUNDRIES TOTAL EXCLUSIVE OF TAX [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]SUNDRIES TOTAL INCLUSIVE OF TAX [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]----------------------------------------GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX INCL OVERALL DISC) [ ] [050] [070] [07][2] [ ] [ ]GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX EXCL OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] [ ]TOTAL COST [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TOTAL INCLUSIVE NET (NET + TAX) [ ] [052] [070] [07][2]OVERALL DISCOUNT (CODE "DS") [ ] [ ] [ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [ ] [ ] % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

The following are the totals of the same items on the invoice lines.

TOTAL CALCULATED DISC/SURCHARGE AMT : 9.4 digits

NET VALUE TOTAL : 9.4 digits

OVERALL DISCOUNT : 9.4 digits

TAX ON OVERALL DISCOUNT : 9.4 digits



SUB TOTAL (NET + DISCOUNT + INCL TAX) : 9.4 digits

SUB TOT (NET + LINE DISCOUNT + EXCL TAX) : 9.4 digits

Appendix - 340

USER GUIDE

SUNDRIES TOTAL EXCLUSIVE OF TAX : 9.4 digits

SUNDRIES TOTAL INCLUSIVE OF TAX : 9.4 digits

GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX INCL OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 digits

GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX EXCL OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 digits

TOTAL COST : 9.4 digits

TOTAL INCLUSIVE NET (NET + TAX) : 9.4 digits

OVERALL DISCOUNT (CODE "DS") : 4 characters

(DESCRIPTION) : 30 characters

% : 2.2 digits

TRAILER 3 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 ttyp9 TRAILER 3 - INVOICE FONT LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN TOTAL QTY [ ] [051] [100] [07][2] TOTAL MASS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] TOTAL QTY X UNIT VOLUME [ ] [052] [100] [07][2] TOTAL MASS X UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] COMMENT (#1) [ ] [051] [001] (#2) [ ] [052] [001] (#3) [ ] [053] [001] (#4) [ ] [054] [001] CURRENCY - CODE [ ] [019] [046] - RATE [ ] [019] [071] [07][2] OVERALL DISCOUNT INCLUSIVE OF TAX [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] SUBTOTAL - NET VALUE TOTAL + SUNDRY TOT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] TOTAL EXCLUSIVE GROSS (BEFORE DISC/SUR) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] NET VALUE TOTAL (INCL OF OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] TOTAL - AMOUNT TENDERED [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] CHANGE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] ACCOUNT BALANCE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

TOTAL QTY : 7.4 digits

TOTAL MASS : 7.3 digits

TOTAL QTY X UNIT VOLUME : 7.2 digits

Appendix 341

TOTAL MASS X UNIT VOLUME : 7.3 digits

COMMENT (#1) TO (#4) : 30 charactersYou may capture up to 4 lines of 30 characters each at invoicing stage and optionally print them.

CURRENCY - CODE : 4 charactersWhen printing invoices, you may select a currency code. All values will then be converted for printing.

CURRENCY - RATE : 5.4 digitsThis is the rate at which values were converted. These currency codes and their rates are set up and maintained in program SU36 - Currency File Maintenance.

Appendix - 342

USER GUIDE

OVERALL DISCOUNT \INCLUSIVE OF TAX : 9.4 digits

This discount includes the tax amount

SUBTOTAL - NET VALUE TOTAL + SUNDRY TOT : 9.4 digits

This value includes the Net total and the Sundry total but excludes the overall discount.

TOTAL EXCLUSIVE GROSS (BEFORE DISC/SUR) : 9.4.digits

This will print the Total exclusive gross before discount/surcharge.

NET VALUE TOTAL (INCL OF OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 digits

The Net value including overall discount

The following 3 items will be used if you make use of the Point-of-Sale features. Please refer to Appendix A4. for more information.

TOTAL -AMOUNT TENDERED : 9.4 digits

This is the amount tendered by the customer.

CHANGE : 9.2 digitsThis is the change given to the customer if applicable.

ACCOUNT BALANCE : 9.2 digitsThis is the balance left on the customer’s account after this transaction.

Appendix 343

TRAILER 4 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 TRAILER 4 - INVOICE FONT LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN AMOUNT TENDERED CASH [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] CHEQUE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] CREDIT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] BUYAID [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] OTHER [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] ON ACCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]ROUNDING AMOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]CALCULATED DISCOUNT % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

AMOUNT TENDERED

The following fields represent the monetary value of the various payment amounts.

CASH : 9. 2 digits

CHEQUE : 9.2 digits

CREDIT : 9.2 digits

BUYAID : 9.2 digits

OTHER : 9.2 digits

ON ACCOUNT : 9.2 digits

ROUNDING AMOUNT : 9.2 digitsIf you are using the round down method for payments, set in SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance, you may print the rounding amount here.

CALCULATED DISCOUNT % : 3.2 digitsThe calculated discount percentage

Appendix - 344

USER GUIDE

TITLE DETAILS

There are numerous screens providing up to 999 titles of 30 characters each. These may be used to make your document more readable. For instance if you have no 'PAGE NUMBER' pre-printed on your form, you may use the titles to print this. Or if legislation requires that you must always print your own VAT Registration number on all documents, you may use this facility rather than go to the expense of having your stationery re- or over-printed.

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/002 TITLES 1 - INVOICE MATRIX LINE COLMN LINE COLMN 1 [DELIVER AFTER 10.00 AM ] [ ] [008] [001]2 [TROLLEY: ] [ ] [ ] [ ]3 [TELLER: ] [ ] [ ] [ ]4 [ITEMS: ] [ ] [ ] [ ]5 [TOTAL ] [ ] [ ] [ ]6 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]7 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]8 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]9 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]10 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]11 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]12 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]13 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]14 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]15 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]16 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]17 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]18 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F5-MORE TEXT, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM

Appendix 345

MATRIX PRINT DETAILSSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004MATRIX PRINT DETAILSMANY LINES IN BODY? (Y/N/C) [N]NEXT HEADING ON CHANGE OF [0] 0 - NO CHECK 1 - PRODUCT PART 1NEXT HORZ. LINE ON CHANGE OF[0] 2 - PRODUCT PART 2 3 - PRODUCT PART 3NEXT COLUMN ON CHANGE OF [0] 4 - SUB-STOCKMATRIX COLUMN VALIDATION [0] 1 - NONE 2 - RANGE (PACKING REF)VERTICAL COLM TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]OVERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]UNDERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]COLUMN WIDTH? [00]UPDATE? (Y/N) [Y]F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

MANY LINES IN BODY? (Y/N/C) : Y/N/C

[Y] - if you require a matrix type form.[N] - no further entries are required.[C] - consolidation will take place.

NEXT HEADING ON CHANGE OF : 1 digit

Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new heading must be printed. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.[1] - product part 1[2] - product part 2[3] - product part 3[4] - sub-stock

NEXT HORZ. LINE ON CHANGE OF : 1 digit

Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new detail line must be printed. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.[1] - product part 1[2] - product part 2[3] - product part 3[4] - sub-stock

The number entered here may not be lower than the one entered for the heading above.

Appendix - 346

USER GUIDE

NEXT COLUMN ON CHANGE OF : 1 digit

Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new column must be printed on the detail line. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.[1] - product part 1[2] - product part 2[3] - product part 3[4] - sub-stock

If an entry other than [0] is entered here, the details on the next screen MUST be completed.

The number entered here may not be lower than the one entered for the horizontal line above.

MATRIX COLUMN VALIDATION : 1 digit

[1] - none[2] - Range (packing reference)

VERTICAL COLM TOTALS? (Y/N) : Y/N

[Y] - if you require your columns to be totalled.[N] - if no totals are required.

OVERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N) : Y/N

[Y] - if you wish to overscore totals.

UNDERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N) : Y/N

[Y] - if you wish to underscore totals.

COLUMN WIDTH ? : 2 digitsThe width of each column may be anything between 1 and 13 characters.

UPDATE? (Y/N) : Y/N[Y] - to write the record away[N] - to allow you to make changes

Appendix 347

B1.1 SUB-TOTALS ON ORDERS ON FORM TYPE IVThis option is ONLY used by programs SP86 – Customer Order Release and Invoice Print and SP87 - Order Release Consolidated By Customer.If you require sub-totals to print please do the following:

Please note that if you use this feature you will NOT be able to use the matrix feature.

Do the above by completing form type IV as follows:

ORDER NO: in the body next to this field put a ‘T’ in the first position of the matrix field and the print position in the matrix line/column. This indicates that you will need sub-totals per order.

OTHER TEXT FIELDS: On any other text field that you wish to print (e.g. Username) also put a ‘T’ in the first position of the matrix field and then the print position in the matrix line/column fields.

VALUE FIELDS If you wish to print a sub-total of a value field per order than put a ‘T1’, ‘T2’ and so forth (up to ‘T9’) in the matrix field of each value you wish to accumulate. Enter the print position of the total in the matrix line/column position.

TITLES You may print a title on the sub-total line. Put a ‘T’ in the first position of the matrix field and the print position in the matrix line/column. This indicates that you will need sub-totals per order.

The sub-total line will use the font specified on the first field to be printed on the sub-total line. If you wish to use a different font, then create a dummy title and specify the desired font here.

Appendix - 348

USER GUIDE

B2. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE SPYou must decide which of the available details you wish to print on your Order Forms.


This form is used by program SP77 - Order/Delivery Note Print.


When you have selected form type SP the first set up screen is displayed.

Appendix 349

GENERAL DATA - SALES ORDER


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004GENERAL DATA - SALES ORDERDESCRIPTION [ORDER DOC (SER# OP#)]FORM LENGTH (Lines): [066]FORM WIDTH (Columns): [132]START OF BODY: [025]END OF BODY: [045]




If you are using the Point-of-Sale features (refer to Appendix A4 for more information) then you may wish to print a variable length invoice. This will have the effect of the invoice trailer printing immediately at the end of the body lines after leaving just one blank line. In this case enter anything in the range of 990 to 999 in the ‘Form Length’ field. In addition to printing a variable length invoice, it will also indicate whether you want a fixed length trailer.

Please examine the following.

990 to 998 This will print a trailer with a fixed length of 1 to 9 lines, with 990 indicating 1 line, 991 indicating 2 lines and so forth up to 998 indicating a fixed length trailer of 9 lines. When specifying line numbers in the trailer section of the form, you must number the lines, 990, 992 and so forth.

999 This will print a variable length body with trailer the specified number of lines indicated in the trailer section of the form, followed by 5 blank lines. In this case you will specify your trailer lines as 51, 52 and so forth.

Appendix - 350

USER GUIDE








HEADER DETAILS






Appendix 351

HEADER 1 - SALES ORDER

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004HEADER 1 - SALES ORDER LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMNACCOUNT TO : CUSTOMER NAME [001] [020] ADDRESS (#1) [002] [020] ADDRESS (#2) [003] [020] ADDRESS (#3) [004] [020] POST CODE [005] [020]DELIVER TO : CUSTOMER NAME [001] [100] ADDRESS (#1) [002] [100] ADDRESS (#2) [003] [100] ADDRESS (#3) [004] [100] ADDRESS (#4) [ ] [ ] POST CODE [005] [100] ROUTE (CODE "RC") [008] [100] (DESCRIPTION) [008] [106] NARRATIVE (#1) [009] [100] AREA [007] [100]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

ACCOUNT TO:








Appendix - 352

USER GUIDE

DELIVER TO :









ROUTE (DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is the description associated with the code above and is setup and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'RC'.


Appendix 353

CONTACT : 30 charactersEnter in SP31 - Delivery Address Maintenance.

AREA : 4 charactersThis is either read from the customer masterfile or the delivery address file depending on where delivery details are obtained.

HEADER 2 -SALES ORDERSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004HEADER 2 - SALES ORDER LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMNACCOUNT NUMBER [007] [020]CUSTOMER ORDER NO. [010] [020]ORDER NO. [011] [020]JOB # [013] [020]WAREHOUSE # [011] [100]CO. REGISTRATION NO. [008] [020]ORDER DATE [012] [020]TRANSFER TO - WH [ ] [ ] - BR [ ] [ ]PAGE NO. [001] [128]PICKING SLIP NO. [012] [100]CROSS REFERENCE [ ] [ ]DATE [013] [100]TIME [014] [100]DEBTORS GROUP (CODE "DG") [009] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [009] [026]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT


CUSTOMER ORDER NO. : 15 charactersThis is the customer order number.

ORDER NO. : 6 digitsThis is an internal order number either generated by the system or entered by yourself.



CO. REGISTRATION NO. : 20 charactersThis is entered in program SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 2.

Appendix - 354

USER GUIDE

ORDER DATE : CCYYMMDDThe date entered when capturing the documents.

TRANSFER TO - WH - BR : 2 digits eachWhen you are using the SP2 suite of programs you may wish to print the warehouse/branch to which goods are being transferred.

PAGE NO. : 3 digits Each new order printed will start on page 1, and pages will be numbered consecutively.

PICKING SLIP NO. : 2 digitsPicking slips may be printed more than once and if required the system will increment this number each time it is printed.

CROSS REFERENCE : 6 charactersThe cross reference entered in SP17 - Credit Note Entry.

DATE : CCYYMMDDThe date on which the document is printed (not captured).

TIME : hh:mmThe time at which the document is printed (not captured).

CANCEL BY DATE : CCYYMMDDThe date when the order will be cancelled.



(DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is the description associated with the code above and is setup and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'DG'.

Appendix 355

HEADER 3 - SALES ORDER

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004HEADER 3 - SALES ORDER LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMNDELIVERY DETAILS CODE 1 (CODE) [015] [001] (REFERENCE) [015] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [015] [040] CODE 2 (CODE) [016] [001] (REFERENCE) [016] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [016] [040] CODE 3 (CODE) [017] [001] (REFERENCE) [017] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [017] [040] CODE 4 (CODE) [018] [001] (REFERENCE) [018] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [018] [040] CODE 5 (CODE) [019] [001] (REFERENCE) [019] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [019] [040] CODE 6 (CODE) [020] [001] (REFERENCE) [020] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [020] [040]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

DELIVERY DETAILS

This screen allows you to specify the print positions for any or all six of the seven Delivery codes and their details. These codes are linked to individual delivery addresses and are entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address.

The codes with their descriptions and reference fields are set up and maintained in program Su31 type 'D1' to 'D7'. In all cases the lengths are as specified below.

CODE : 4 characters



Appendix - 356

USER GUIDE

HEADER 4 - SALES ORDERSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 HEADER 4 - SALES ORDER FONT LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN DELIVERY DETAILS CODE 7 (CODE) [ ] [021] [001] (REFERENCE) [ ] [021] [020] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [021] [040] DELIVERY NOTE # [ ] [001] [001]PACKAGE ID [ ] [ ] [ ] TOTAL QUANTITY [ ] [010] [090] [07][2]TOTAL VALUE [ ] [010] [100] [07][2]USERNAME (TELLER) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] HEADER COMMENTS - 1 [ ] [022] [001] - 2 [ ] [023] [001] - 3 [ ] [024] [001] - 4 [ ] [025] [001] - 5 [ ] [026] [001]BATCH REFERENCE [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

DELIVERY DETAILS

This screen allows you to specify the print positions for the seventh Delivery code and its details. These codes are linked to individual delivery addresses and are entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address.

CODE : 4 characters



DELIVERY NOTE# : 6 characters Available if using the delivery note option.

PACKAGE ID : 15 charactersEntered in SP13 - Input Picked Details.

TOTAL QUANTITY : 9.4 digits

TOTAL VALUE : 9.4 digits

USER NAME (TELLER) : 8 charactersThe name of the operator who captured the transaction.

HEADER COMMENTS : 30 charactersThese 5 comments are printed in SP10 and may be printed here.

Appendix 357


HEADER 5 - SALES ORDERSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/003 HEADER 5 - SALES ORDER FONT CURR LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN CUSTOMER CURRENCY CODE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]ORDER CURRENCY CODE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] RATE [ ][ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

CUSTOMER CURRENCY CODE : 4 characters

The currency code held on the debtors masterfile for this customer.

ORDER CURRENCY CODE : 4 charactersThe currency code used on the order.

RATE : 5.4 digitsThe rate used on this order

Appendix - 358

USER GUIDE

BODY DETAILS



BODY 1 - SALES ORDER

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 1 - SALES ORDER MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMNQUANTITY OUTSTANDING (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [103] OUTSTANDING (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] ORDERED (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [058] ORDERED (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] DELIVERED (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [073] DELIVERED (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [088] ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OR HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [118] (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGED PRICE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]GROSS (BEFORE DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE (CODE "DS") [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] AMOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]CALCULATED DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE AMOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE NET (AFTER DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [07][2] [125]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

QUANTITIES

The following entries relate to quantities relating to the item invoiced.

OUTSTANDING (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity ordered but not yet delivered, in the unit of issue.

OUTSTANDING (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity ordered but not yet delivered, in the unit of hold.

ORDERED (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity ordered by the customer expressed in the unit of issue.

Appendix 359

ORDERED (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity ordered by the customer expressed in the unit of hold.

DELIVERED (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity actually delivered to the customer expressed in the unit of issue.

DELIVERED(UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the quantity actually delivered to the customer expressed in the unit of hold.

ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the difference of the quantity originally ordered and that delivered in the unit of issue. This will only be printed if back orders are allowed.

ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the difference of the quantity originally ordered and that delivered in the unit of hold. This will only be printed if back orders are allowed.

SELLING PRICES

The following relates to selling prices.

EXCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price as it relates to the unit of issue before tax has been added.

EXCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price as it relates to the unit of hold before tax has been added.

EXCLUSIVE DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price before tax has been added but after the discount/surcharge has been applied.

Appendix - 360

USER GUIDE

GROSS (BEFORE DISC/SURCHARGE) : 9.4 digits

This represents the value of the gross selling price multiplied by the quantity supplied for the unit of issue.

DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE (CODE "DS) : 4 characters

These codes are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance. They are used where a specific delivery address is subject to a specific discount/surcharge. Deliver addresses entered in program SP31 - Delivery Address may contain this code. The same code is then entered in program SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix and may be printed here.

DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE (DESCRIPTION) : 30 characters

This is the description associated with the code above. These are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'DS'.

DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE % : 3.4 digits

This is the percentage applied to the gross selling price when calculating the net value of the line item.

DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE AMOUNT : 7.4 digits

This is the amount deducted from the selling price before calculating the net value of the line item.

CALCULATED DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE AMOUNT : 7.4 digits

This is the total value of the discount deducted to obtain the net value of the line item.

EXCLUSIVE NET (AFTER DISC/SURCHARGE) : 9.4 digits

This is the value of the line item after the application of discount but before the addition of tax.

Appendix 361


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 2 - SALES ORDER MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMNUNIT OF MEASURE (ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [050] (HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]PACK SIZE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]MASS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT OF MASS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]UOM CONVERSION - FACTOR [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]COST PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]COST VALUE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]GP % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]BIN # [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]ALTERNATE BIN - 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]MASS X UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]QTY X UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT MASS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]5 SUPERVISOR PASSWORD OVERRIDE KEYS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

UNIT OF MEASURE (ISSUE) : 4 charactersThis is the unit of issue for this item.

UNIT OF MEASURE (HOLD) : 4 charactersThis is the unit of hold for this item.

PACK SIZE : 4 charactersThis is the packing reference from the inventory branch masterfile.

MASS : 7.3 digitsThis is the quantity picked * the unit mass of the item which is read from the company record on the inventory masterfile.

UNIT OF MASS : 4 charactersThis is as described on the company record of the inventory masterfile.

UOM CONVERSION - FACTOR : 2 characters

This factor is held on the company record of the inventory masterfile. These factors are set up in program IV35 - Product Weights/Measures Maintenance.

Appendix - 362

USER GUIDE

COST PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.2 digits

This is the cost price converted from the cost for unit of hold to unit of issue.

COST PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.2 digits

This is the cost price in unit of hold.

COST VALUE : 7.2 digitsThis is the quantity times the cost per unit of issue.

GP % : 9.2 digitsThis is (Net - Cost value) times 100/Net.

BIN # : 6 charactersThis is read from the branch record on the inventory masterfile.

ALTERNATE BIN 1 -3 : 6 charactersThis is read from the supersessions file where applicable.

MASS X UNIT VOLUME : 7.3 digitsThis is (quantity picked times unit mass) times (unit volume per unit of issue).

QTY X UNIT VOLUME : 7.3 digitsThis is quantity picked times unit volume per unit of issue.

UNIT MASS : 7.2 digitsThis is the unit mass of the item and is read from the company record on the inventory masterfile.

5 SUPERVISOR PASSWORD OVERRIDE KEYS : 5 characters

This indicates where supervisor action may be required before the order can be released for invoicing. Refer to the section in this User Guide where program SP00 - System Record Maintenance is discussed.

Appendix 363


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/106 CONBODY 3 - SALES ORDER MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMNPRODUCT CODE - PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]PHYSICAL STOCK QTY [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]SUB-STOCK/SERIAL # - PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]OPERATION # [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]DESCRIPTIONS - PRODUCT [ ] [ ] [ ] [010] - EXTENDED DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - PRODUCT PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - SUB-PRODUCT PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - RANGE OF SIZES [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]HORIZONTAL TOTAL IF MATRIX PRINT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

PRODUCT CODE - PART 1 TO 3 : Up to 15 characters

This depends on the definition of your product code in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance.

PHYSICAL STOCK QTY : 7.2 digitsThis is the quantity on hand for this item at the time of printing the order.

SUB-STOCK/SERIAL # - PART 1 TO 3 : Up to 15 characters

OPERATION # : 4 charactersIf you interface the Job Costing system to the Sales Order Processing system, you may optionally print the operation.

DESCRIPTIONS

The following entries relate to descriptions.

PRODUCT : 30 charactersThis will be read from the stock masterfile, or in the case of a non-stock item from the invoice file.

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION : 30 charactersThis will be read from the supersessions file.

Appendix - 364

USER GUIDE

PRODUCT PART 1 TO 3 : 30 charactersEach part of the product code may optionally relate to a code held on the description file if specified in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance. This is the description relating to that code.

SUB-PRODUCT PART 1 TO 3 : 30 characters

As above.

RANGE OF SIZES : 30 charactersWhen using a matrix this will print the range of sizes.

HORIZONTAL TOTAL IF MATRIX PRINT : 9.2 digits

You will only select this if you are printing a matrix type form.

Appendix 365


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/106 CONBODY 4 - SALES ORDER MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMNPRODUCT SALES CATEGORY [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]PRODUCT SALES CATEGORY DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]PRODUCT MESSAGE - CODE (IV30) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]MEMO DISC% - QUANTITY [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] - TIME DEPENDENT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]INCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] (UNIT OF HOLD) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]INCLUSIVE DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGED PRICE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]TAX INCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [05][2] [058]EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (INCL OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ] [05][2] [068]TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (EXCL OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]TAX % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]INCLUSIVE GROSS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]EXPORT TARIFF [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

PRODUCT SALES CATEGORY : 4 characters

Each product contains a sales category. These are set up in program AR32 - Category File Maintenance.

PRODUCT SALES CATEGORY DESCRIPTION : 30 characters

This relates to the code above and is held on the descriptions file for type 'DR'.

PRODUCT MESSAGE - CODE (IV30) : 3 characters

Please refer to Appendix A1 at the back of this User Guide for more information.

PRODUCT MESSAGE - DESCRIPTION : 30 characters

The description relating to the code above.

MEMO DISC% - QUANTITY : 3.4 digitsThis is the discount percentage relating to quantity discount.

Appendix - 366

USER GUIDE

MEMO DISC% - TIME DEPENDENT : 3.4 digits


MEMO DISC% - CUMULATIVE LESS TIME : 3.4 digits


INCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE) : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price for the unit of issue after tax has been applied.

INCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD) : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price for the unit of hold after the tax has been applied.

INCLUSIVE DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE : 7.4 digits

This is the selling price after the tax and discount have been applied.


EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (INCL OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 digits


EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (EXCL OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 digits

TAX % : 2.2 digits

INCLUSIVE GROSS : 9.4 digits

EXPORT TARIFF : 15 charactersThis is read from the company record on the inventory masterfile.

Appendix 367


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 BODY 5 - SALES ORDER MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMN COMPANY NAME (BODY) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]ORDER NUMBER (BODY) [ ] [ ] [ ] [033]WAREHOUSE (BODY) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]TOTAL QUANTITY DELIVERED [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]TOTAL QUANTITY INVOICED [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT OF VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]DELIVERY DATE [ ] [ ] [ ] [001] PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER [ ] [ ] [ ] [001] VENDOR [ ] [ ] [ ] [001] DISCOUNT 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [001] DISCOUNT 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [001]BATCH REFERNCE [ ] [ ] [ ] [001]CUSTOMER ORDER NO. (BODY) [ ] [ ] [ ] [001]VENDOR STOCK CODE [ ] [ ] [ ] [001]VENDOR STOCK DESCRIPTION (STKMAS) [ ] [ ] [ ] [001] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

The first three fields below will be printed from individual item lines and not from the Order Header.

COMPANY NAME (BODY) : 30 charactersThis is printed from SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 2 details

ORDER NUMBER (BODY) : 6 charactersThis prints the order number

WAREHOUSE (BODY) : 2 digitsPrints the warehouse number.

TOTAL QUANTITY DELIVERED : 9.4 characters

This will print the TOTAL quantity delivered.

TOTAL QTY INVOICED : 9.4 digitsThis will print the TOTAL quantity invoiced.

UNIT VOLUME : 7.2 digitsThis is the unit volume if that facility is used.

UNIT OF VOLUME : 4 characterThis is the unit of the volume such as LITR, and so forth.

DELIVERY DATE : CCYYMMDDThe delivery date will print if specified here.

Appendix - 368

USER GUIDE

PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER : 6 digitsIf you the purchase order number to print, specify this here,

VENDOR : 6 charactersThe vendor number can be printed if required.

DISCOUNT 1 & 2 : 7.4 digitsDiscounts 1 and 2 will print if you specify this.

BATCH REFERENCE : 8 charactersWhere a batch number is applicable, you may specify that it should be printed.

CUSTOMER ORDER NO. (BODY) : 6 characters

This is the order number entred in the body of the order as opposed to on the order header.

VENDOR STOCK CODE : 16 charactersThe vendor stock code held on the masterfile.

VENDOR STOCK DESCRIPTION : 30

The stock description used by the vendor -

Appendix 369

BODY 6 - SALES ORDERSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/005 BODY 6 - SP -SALES ORDER MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY COLMN LENGTH [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT OF LENGTH [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]WIDTH [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT OF WIDTH [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]DEPTH [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT OF DEPTH [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]AREA [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]UNIT OF AREA [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]LONG DESCRIPTION 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 4 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 5 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 6 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]SUNDRY DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]REFERNCES – SOFT TERM 3 – (SU30 SP) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 4 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 5 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

The codes and units may be printed for each of the following:

Length, Width, Depth and Area.

Codes are xx characters and units are w chracters.

LONG DESCRIPTION 1- 6 : 240 characters (6 x 40)You can print the long description as entred in IV30 - Company Inventory Maintenance as required.

SUNDRY DESCRIPTION : 30 charactersThe description of any sundry items captured. If this field is left blank, and you do have sundry items, those descriptions will appear where the normal stock description normally prints.

REFERNCES – SOFT TERM 3 – (SU30 SP) : 10 characters

You may print the soft codes 3 to 5 entered in program SU30 - Installation Maintenance, option 4, System SP.

Appendix - 370

USER GUIDE

TRAILER 1 - SALES ORDER

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004TRAILER 1 - SALES ORDER LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMNH/O ACCOUNT NUMBER [060] [020]REFERENCE [061] [020]SALESMAN (NUMBER "RP") [062] [020] (NAME) [062] [025]METHOD OF DELIVERY [063] [020]METHOD OF PAYMENT [064] [020]DELIVERY DATE [060] [070]SALES TAX NUMBER [061] [070]SA#1 (CODE "S1") [062] [070] (DESCRIPTION) [062] [075]SA#2 (CODE "S2") [063] [070] (DESCRIPTION) [063] [075]TERMS (CODE "DT") [064] [070] (DESCRIPTION) [064] [075]TOTAL CALCULATED DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE [060] [110] [07][2]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT


REFERENCE : 8 charactersAs entered in SP10 - Order Entry.

SALESMAN (NUMBER "RP") : 4 characters



METHOD OF DELIVERY : 4 charactersDeliver methods and their descriptions are set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'DI'. This may be entered at order/invoice capture stage.

METHOD OF PAYMENT : 4 charactersPayment methods and their descriptions are set up in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'PM'. This may be entered at order/invoice capture stage.

DELIVERY DATE : CCYYMMDD

Appendix 371

The delivery date as captured on the invoice header.

SALES TAX NUMBER : 12 charactersThis will be read from the customer masterfile.





TERMS (CODE "DT") : 4 charactersThis will be read from the customer masterfile

(DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is associated with the code above and is set up and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'DT'.

TOTAL CALCULATED DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE : 9.4 digits

Appendix - 372

USER GUIDE


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004TRAILER 2 - SALES ORDER LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMNNET VALUE TOTAL [061] [110] [07][2]OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TAX ON OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]SALES TAX INCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT [062] [110] [07][2]SALES TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]SUB TOTAL (NET + DISCOUNTS + INCL TAX) [063] [110] [07][2]SUB TOT (NET + LINE DISCOUNT + EXCL TAX) [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]SUNDRIES TOTAL [064] [110] [07][2]GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX INCL OVERALL DISC) [065] [110] [07][2]GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX EXCL OVERALL DISC) [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TOTAL MASS [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TOTAL QTY [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TOTAL COST VALUE [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TOTAL MASS X UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TOTAL QTY X UNIT VOLUME [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]OVERALL DISCOUNT (CODE "DS") [ ] [ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ] [ ] % [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

The following are the totals of the same items on the order lines.

NET VALUE TOTAL : 9.4 digits

OVERALL DISCOUNT : 9.4 digits

TAX ON OVERALL DISCOUNT : 9.4 digits

SALES TAX INCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT : 9.4 digits

SALES TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT : 9.4 digits

SUB TOTAL (NET + DISCOUNTS + INCL TAX) : 9.4 digits

SUB TOT (NET + LINE DISCOUNT + EXCL TAX) : 9.4 digits

SUNDRIES TOTAL : 9.4 digits

GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX INCL OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 digits

Appendix 373

GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX EXCL OVERALL DISC) : 9.4 digits

TOTAL MASS : 7.3 digits

TOTAL QTY : 7.4 digits

TOTAL COST VALUE : 9.4 digits

TOTAL MASS X UNIT VOLUME : 7.3 digits

TOTAL QTY X UNIT VOLUME : 7.4 digits

OVERALL DISCOUNT (CODE "DS") : 4 characters

(DESCRIPTION) : 30 characters

% : 2.2 digits

Appendix - 374

USER GUIDE


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/104TRAILER 3 - SALES ORDER LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMNCOMMENT (#1) [045] [001] (#2) [046] [001] (#3) [047] [001] (#4) [048] [001]CURRENCY - CODE [023] [025] - RATE [023] [063] [07][2]SUBTOTAL - NET VALUE TOTAL + SUNDRY TOT [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]AMOUNT TENDERED [050] [001] [07][2]CHANGE [050] [015] [07][2]ACCOUNT BALANCE [050] [030] [07][2]

IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

COMMENT (#1) TO (#4) : 30 charactersYou may capture up to 4 lines of 30 characters each at ordering stage and optionally print them.

CURRENCY - CODE : 4 charactersWhen printing orders, you may select a currency code. All values will then be converted for printing.

CURRENCY - RATE : 5.4 digitsThis is the rate at which values were converted. These currency codes and their rates are set up and maintained in program SU36 - Currency File Maintenance.

SUBTOTAL - NET VALUE TOTAL + SUNDRY TOT : 9.4 digits

This value includes the Net total and the Sundry total but excludes the overall discount.

Appendix 375

The following 3 items will be used if you make use of the Point-of-Sale features. Please refer to Appendix A4. for more information.

AMOUNT TENDERED : 9.2 digitsThis is the amount tendered by the customer.

CHANGE : 9.2 digitsThis is the change given to the customer if applicable.

ACCOUNT BALANCE : 9.2 digitsThis is the balance left on the customer’s account after this transaction.

GP% : 3.2 digitsThis is the Gross Profit percentage on the order as a whole.

Appendix - 376

USER GUIDE

TRAILER 4 - INVOICE

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/001 ttyp9 TRAILER 4 - INVOICE FONT LINE COLMN DGT/DEC LINE COLMN AMOUNT TENDERED CASH [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] CHEQUE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] CREDIT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] BUYAID [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] OTHER [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] ON ACCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

AMOUNT TENDERED

The following fields represent the monetary value of the various payment amounts.

CASH : 9. 2 digits

CHEQUE : 9.2 digits

CREDIT : 9.2 digits

BUYAID : 9.2 digits

OTHER : 9.2 digits

ON ACCOUNT : 9.2 digits

Appendix 377

TITLE DETAILS


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/002 TITLES 1 - SALES ORDER MATRIX LINE COLMN LINE COLMN 1 [CODE ] [ ] [027] [001]2 [ITEM ] [ ] [027] [017]3 [UNIT ] [ ] [027] [050]4 [ORDERED ] [ ] [027] [058]5 [DELIVERED ] [ ] [027] [073]6 [ON B/O ] [ ] [027] [088]7 [EXCL SELL ] [ ] [027] [118]8 [NET ] [ ] [027] [125]9 [O/S ] [ ] [027] [103]10 [TRAILER ] [ ] [040] [001]11 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]12 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]13 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]14 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]15 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]16 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]17 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]18 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F5-MORE TEXT, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM

Appendix - 378

USER GUIDE

MATRIX PRINT DETAILS

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004MATRIX PRINT DETAILSMANY LINES IN BODY? (Y/N/C) [N]NEXT HEADING ON CHANGE OF [0] 0 - NO CHECK 1 - PRODUCT PART 1NEXT HORZ. LINE ON CHANGE OF[0] 2 - PRODUCT PART 2 3 - PRODUCT PART 3NEXT COLUMN ON CHANGE OF [0] 4 - SUB-STOCKMATRIX COLUMN VALIDATION [0] 1 - NONE 2 - RANGE (PACKING REF)VERTICAL COLM TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]OVERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]UNDERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]COLUMN WIDTH? [00]UPDATE? (Y/N) [Y]F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT


[Y] - if you require a matrix type form.[N] - no further entries are required.[C] - consolidation will take place.


Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new heading must be printed. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the part.[1] - product part 1[2] - product part 2[3] - product part 3[4] - sub-stock


Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new detail line must be printed. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.[1] - product part 1[2] - product part 2[3] - product part 3[4] - sub-stock

The number entered here may not be lower than the one entered for the heading above.

Appendix 379


Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new column must be printed on the detail line. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.[1] - product part 1[2] - product part 2[3] - product part 3[4] - sub-stock


The number entered here may not be lower than the one entered for the horizontal line above.

MATRIX COLUMN VALIDATION : 1 digit

[1] - none[2] - Range (packing reference)







COLUMN WIDTH ? : 2 digitsThe width of each column may be anything between 1 and 13 characters.


Appendix - 380

USER GUIDE

B3. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE OAYou must decide which of the available details you wish to print on your Order Analysis Forms.

These forms are used for program SP79 - Order/Sales Analysis. The matrix/table option is available for use.



When you have selected form type OA the first set up screen is displayed.

Appendix 381

GENERAL DATA - ORDER ANALYSIS


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004GENERAL DATA - ORDER ANALYSISDESCRIPTION [ORDER ANALYSIS ]FORM LENGTH (Lines): [066]FORM WIDTH (Columns): [060]START OF BODY: [025]END OF BODY: [060]







Appendix - 382

USER GUIDE





HEADER DETAILS






Appendix 383

HEADER 1 - ORDER ANALYSIS

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004HEADER 1 - ORDER ANALYSIS LINE COLMN DGT/DECCO/BR REPORT HEADER (3 LINES) [ ] [ ]REPORT NAME [ ] [ ]


CO/BR REPORT HEADER (3 LINES) : 3 lines

This is the normal Titan report heading and will take up 3 lines of print.

REPORT NAME : 20 charactersThis is the report description entered on the previous screen.If the Titan report heading above is printed, this report name will be part of that heading and you need not print it again.

BODY DETAILS






Appendix - 384

USER GUIDE


BODY 1 - ORDER ANALYSIS

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 1 - ORDER ANALYSIS MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DECALTERNATE SEQUENCE NUMBER - PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 4 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 5 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 6 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 7 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 8 [ ] [ ] [ ]ALTERNATE SEQ DESCRIPTION - PART 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 3 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 4 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 5 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 6 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 7 [ ] [ ] [ ] - PART 8 [ ] [ ] [ ]ALTERNATE CODE [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

ALTERNATE SEQUENCE NUMBER - PART 1 TO PART 8 : User dependent

The length of each field depends on which component was selected in program SP33 - Alternate Sequence.

ALTERNATE SEQ DESCRIPTION - PART 1 TO PART 8 : 30 characters

Each component part may optionally be linked to a description type. These descriptions may optionally be printed.

ALTERNATE CODE : 4 charactersThis is the code which determines in which alternate sequence the form is printed.

Appendix 385


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 2 - ORDER ANALYSIS MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DECCOMPANY [ ] [ ] [ ]BRANCH [ ] [ ] [ ]ORDER LINE DESCRIPTION [ ] [ ] [ ]ORDER LINE TYPE [ ] [ ] [ ]ORDER NUMBER [ ] [ ] [ ]ORDER LINE NUMBER [ ] [ ] [ ]CUSTOMER NUMBER [ ] [ ] [ ]CUSTOMER ORDER REFERENCE [ ] [ ] [ ]CUSTOMER NAME [ ] [ ] [ ]DELIVERY DATE [ ] [ ] [ ]ITEM ORDERED [ ] [ ] [ ]WAREHOUSE [ ] [ ] [ ]BIN [ ] [ ] [ ]ORDER DATE [ ] [ ] [ ]DELIVERY ADDRESS NUMBER [ ] [ ] [ ]REFERENCE [ ] [ ] [ ]AREA CODE [ ] [ ] [ ]GROUP CODE [ ] [ ] [ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

COMPANY : 2 digitsThis is the number of the company generating this form.

BRANCH : 2 digitsThis is the number of the branch associated with the company above.

ORDER LINE DESCRIPTION : 30 characters

This is the description of the order line - usually the product description.

ORDER LINE TYPE : 1 character[O] - order header, which also holds the overall discount.[I] - item lines[S] - sundry lines[C] - comment lines

ORDER NUMBER : 6 digitsThe number of this order.

ORDER LINE NUMBER : 4 digitsThe line number of the order. The header is always '0000', item lines start at '0001', sundry lines start at '9001' and comment lines at '9991'.

Appendix - 386

USER GUIDE

CUSTOMER NUMBER : 6 charactersThe customer for whom the order is being processed.

CUSTOMER ORDER REFERENCE : 15 characters

The number the customer uses to identify this order.

CUSTOMER NAME : 50 charactersThe name of the customer as held on the customer masterfile and entered in program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance.

DELIVERY DATE : CCYYMMDDThe delivery date entered on the order header.

ITEM ORDERED : Up to 15 charactersThe product code of this item line.

WAREHOUSE : 2 digitsThe warehouse from which the stock is drawn.

BIN : 6 charactersThis is held on the branch record of the inventory masterfile and indicates where in the store the product is located.

ORDER DATE : CCYYMMDDThe date the order was captured.

DELIVERY ADDRESS NUMBER : 4 digits

The number associated with the address to which the goods are to be delivered. These addresses are captured in program SP31 - Delivery Address.

REFERENCE : 8 charactersThis is the order reference captured on the order header.

AREA CODE : 4 charactersThis is the area code as captured on the order header.

GROUP CODE : 4 charactersThis is the debtors group as captured on the order header.

Appendix 387


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 3 - ORDER ANALYSIS MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DECPRICE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]COST [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]ORDERED QUANTITY [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]GROSS (QTY X PRICE) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]TOTAL QUANTITY [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]AVERAGE PRICE (ONLY AVAILABLE IF GROSS) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] (AND TOTAL QTY PRINTED )NET (QTY X PRICE - DISCOUNT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]QUANTITY: SUPPLIED [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] ON B/ORDER [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] ON HAND [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]INVOICE # [ ] [ ] [ ] INVOICE DATE [ ] [ ] [ ] CUMULATIVE TO WEEK (IF APPLICABLE) [ ] [ ] [ ]REPRESENTATIVE CODE [ ] [ ] [ ]COLUMN HEADING IN MATRIX [ ] [ ] [ ]HORIZONTAL TOTAL OF COLUMNS IN MATRIX [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

PRICE : 7.4 digitsThis is the price as entered on the order line.

COST : 7.4 digitsThis is the item cost as entered on the order line.

ORDERED QUANTITY : 7.4 digitsThis is the ordered quantity as captured on the order line.

GROSS (QTY X PRICE) : 9.4 digitsThis is calculated and represents the value of the selling price multiplied by the quantity without applying discount. It also includes tax.

TOTAL QUANTITY : 9.4 digitsThis is the total of all the quantities for this order.

AVERAGE PRICE (ONLY AVAILABLE IF GROSS) (AND TOTAL QTY PRINTED) : 9.4 digits

This is calculated by dividing the gross value by the quantity.

Appendix - 388

USER GUIDE

NET (QTY X PRICE - DISCOUNT: 9.4 digitsThis is the net value of the item, calculated as quantity times price, less the discount.

QUANTITIESThe following three fields refer to quantities of the item being ordered.

SUPPLIED : 7.4 digits

ON B/ORDER : 7.4 digits

ON HAND : 7.4 digits

INVOICE # : 6 digits

INVOICE DATE : CCYYMMDD

CUMULATIVE TO WEEK (IF APPLICABLE) : 2 digits

If week # formed part of the alternate key used in selecting the data to print, the 'TO WEEK' number will print here.

REPRESENTATIVE CODE : 4 charactersThis is the representative code as entered on the order header.

COLUMN HEADING IN MATRIX : Variable

The length is the number of columns specified * the column width specified.This prints a heading for the columns, which will be the codes specified on the last screen of matrix details in this program.

HORIZONTAL TOTAL OF COLUMNS IN MATRIX : 9.2 digits

If a horizontal total of matrix columns is required, enter the print position here.

Appendix 389


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004BODY 4 - ORDER ANALYSIS MATRIX LINE COLMN DGT/DECTOTAL: QTY SUPPLIIED [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] QTY ON B/ORDER [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] ON HAND [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] GROSS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] QTY ORDERED [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] NET [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ]


TOTALS

You can optionally print the totals of the following items.

QTY SUPPLIED : 7.4 digits

QTY ON B/ORDER : 7.4 digits

ON HAND : 7.4 digits

GROSS : 7.4 digits

QTY ORDERED : 7.4 digits

NET : 7.4 digits

TITLE DETAILS


Appendix - 390

USER GUIDE

MATRIX PRINT DETAILS

This allows you to print your data in matrix or table format. The content of the rows and columns of the table are selected here.

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004MATRIX PRINT DETAILSMANY LINES IN BODY? (Y/N/C) [N]NEXT HEADING ON CHANGE OF [0] 0 - NO CHECK 1-8 - SEQUENCE ACCOUNT CODE PARTS 1 TO 8NEXT HORZ. LINE ON CHANGE OF[0]NEXT COLUMN ON CHANGE OF [0]

PAGE BREAK ON HEADING? (Y/N)[N]VERTICAL COLM TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]OVERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]UNDERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N) [N]COLUMN WIDTH? [00]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT


[Y] - if you require a matrix type form.[N] - no further entries are required.[C] - consolidation will take place. (this option should not be used if printing via SP79 - Order/Sales Analysis).


Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new heading must be printed. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.[1] - [8] sequence account code parts 1 to 8.


Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new detail line (or row of the table) must be printed. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.[1] - [8] sequence account code parts 1 to 8.

The number entered here may not be lower than the one for the heading above.

Appendix 391


Enter the part of the code which will determine whether a new column must be printed on the detail line. A [0] will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.[1] - [8] sequence account code parts 1 to 8.


The number entered here may not be lower than the one for the horizontal line above.

PAGE BREAK ON HEADING? (Y/N) : Y/N

[Y] - will print each matrix header on a new page.[N] - will continue printing till page is full and only then go to a new page.







COLUMN WIDTH ? : 2 digitsThe width of each column may be up to 13 characters.


Appendix - 392

USER GUIDE

MATRIX COLUMN DETAILS

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/004MATRIX COLUMN DETAILSENTER CODES PER COLUMN FOR PART 1 :COLUMN 01 [XXX-X-X-XX] 02 [XXXXXXXXXX] 03 [XXXXX-X-X-] 04 [X---XXX--X] 05 [----------] 06 [----------] 07 [----------] 08 [----------] 09 [XXX-X-XXX-] 10 [--X-X-X-X-] 11 [X-X-X-XXXX] 12 [X-X--XXXX-] 13 [X-X--XXXXX] 14 [X-X-X-X---] 15 [----------] 16 [XXXXXXXXXX] 17 [XXXXXXXXX-] 18 [----------] UPDATE? (Y/N) [Y]F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT

ENTER CODES PER COLUMN FOR PART '99' : This depends on the length of the part defined.

'99' represents the part you defined to indicate that a change of column is to be printed. Enter the codes to be printed in the various columns. For instance, if a code is structured as 999/99/9999 and you defined a change of column on part 1, you may enter '100', '200', '300', etc. in the columns. Thus details for a code having '100' in the first part will print in column 1 and so forth.

UPDATE? (Y/N) : Y/N[Y] - to write the record away.[N] - to allow you to make changes.

Appendix 393

B4. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE SLYou must decide which of the available details you wish to print on your Labels.

These forms are used in program SP82 – Label and Manifest. You will define these forms in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance. Refer to the System Utilities User Guide for general information.


When you have selected form type SL the first set up screen is displayed.

Appendix - 394

USER GUIDE

GENERAL DATA - LABELSSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 GENERAL DATA - SL01-SP LABEL DESCRIPTION [LABELS ] FORM LENGTH (Lines): [020] FORM WIDTH (Columns): [030] START OF BODY: [002]END OF BODY: [015] SUMMARY: HEADER: Line 001 to 001 BODY: Line 002 to 015 TRAILER: Line 016 to 020 IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F3-ACCEPT, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT







Appendix 395





HEADER DETAILS






Appendix - 396

USER GUIDE

HEADER 1 – LABEL

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 1 - SL01-SP LABEL T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC ACCOUNT TO: CUSTOMER NAME [ ][ ] [001][004][00] ADDRESS (#1) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#2) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#3) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] POST CODE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]CONTACT [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]DELIVER TO: ADDRESS NUMBER [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CUSTOMER NAME [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#1) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#2) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#3) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#4) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] POST CODE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ROUTE (CODE "RC") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE (#1) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CONTACT [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

ACCOUNT TO:








CONTACT : 30 charactersThe contact from the Debtors file

Appendix 397

DELIVER TO :












Appendix - 398

USER GUIDE

HEADER 2 - LABELSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 2 - SL01-SP LABEL T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC WAREHOUSE # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ACCOUNT # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CUSTOMER ORDER # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] INVOICE # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] INVOICE DATE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]CURRENT TIME [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] JOB # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]ORDER # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]AREA (CODE "AR") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]DEBTORS GROUP (CODE "DG") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT




INVOICE # : 6 digitsThis is either the invoice number. Note that it may be printed in two places.




Appendix 399



(DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is the description associated with the code above and is setup and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'AR'.




Appendix - 400

USER GUIDE

HEADER 3 - LABELSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 3 - SL01-SP LABEL T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC DELIVERY DETAILS CODE 1 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 2 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 3 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 4 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 5 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 6 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

DELIVERY DETAILS



CODE : 4 characters



Appendix 401

HEADER 4 – LABELSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 4 - SL01-SP LABEL T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC DELIVERY DETAILS CODE 7 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]DELIVERY REFERENCE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]USERNAME (TELLER) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]HEADER COMMENTS - 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] - 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] - 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] - 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] - 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] BATCH REFERENCE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

DELIVERY DETAILS


CODE : 4 characters



DELIVERY REFERENCE : 6 characters Available if using the delivery note option.




Appendix - 402

USER GUIDE

HEADER 5 – LABELSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 5 - SL01-SP LABEL T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC SU31 TYPE (SET IN AR00) LONG DESCRIP: 1 AND 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] 3 AND 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] 5 AND 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]AR30 F7-CODE TYPE (SET IN AR00): CODE 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT





Appendix 403

HEADER 6 – LABELSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 6 - SL01-SP LABEL T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC AR30 F6-NARR CODE (SET IN AR00): CODE 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] LABEL # [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]NO. OF LABELS [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]WEIGHT [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]WEIGHT UOM [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

The fields above enable you to print codes and descriptions defined in program AR00 - System record Maintenance. Please refer to that section of the manual for more information. In addition there is label information available.




LABEL # : 4 digits

WEIGHT : 7.3The weight of the accompanying package

WEIGHT UOM : 4 charactersThe unit of measure of the weight.

ORDER CURRENCY CODE : 4 charactersThe currency code used on the invoice.

RATE : 5.4 digitsThe rate used on this invoice

Appendix - 404

USER GUIDE

TRAILER DETAILS


TRAILER 1 – LABELSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 TRAILER 1 - SL01-SP LABEL T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC H/O ACCOUNT NUMBER [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] REFERENCE # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]X-REFERENCE # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]SALESMAN (NUMBER CODE "RP") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (NAME) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]METHOD OF DELIVERY [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]METHOD OF PAYMENT [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DELIVERY DATE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]TAX NUMBER [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]SA#1 (CODE "S1") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]SA#2 (CODE "S2") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT







Appendix 405









Appendix - 406

USER GUIDE

8.B5. DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE You must decide which of the available details you wish to print on your manifests.

These forms are used in program SP82 – Label and Manifest. You will define these forms in program SU35 - Customised Form Maintenance. Refer to the System Utilities User Guide for general information.


When you have selected form type SM the first set up screen is displayed.

Appendix 407

GENERAL DATA - MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 GENERAL DATA - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST DESCRIPTION [MANIFEST ] FORM LENGTH (Lines): [020] FORM WIDTH (Columns): [030] START OF BODY: [004]END OF BODY: [015] SUMMARY: HEADER: Line 001 to 003 BODY: Line 004 to 015 TRAILER: Line 016 to 020 IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F3-ACCEPT, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT







Appendix - 408

USER GUIDE





HEADER DETAILS






Appendix 409

HEADER 1 – MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 1 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC ACCOUNT TO: CUSTOMER NAME [ ][ ] [002][001][00] ADDRESS (#1) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#2) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#3) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] POST CODE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]CONTACT [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]DELIVER TO: ADDRESS NUMBER [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CUSTOMER NAME [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#1) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#2) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#3) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ADDRESS (#4) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] POST CODE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ROUTE (CODE "RC") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE (#1) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CONTACT [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

ACCOUNT TO:








CONTACT : 30 charactersThe contact from the Debtors file

Appendix - 410

USER GUIDE

DELIVER TO :












Appendix 411

HEADER 2 - MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 2 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC WAREHOUSE # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] ACCOUNT # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CUSTOMER ORDER # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] INVOICE # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] INVOICE DATE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]CURRENT TIME [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]PAGE NO. [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] JOB # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]ORDER # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]AREA (CODE "AR") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]DEBTORS GROUP (CODE "DG") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT




INVOICE # : 6 digitsThis is either the invoice number. Note that it may be printed in two places.



PAGE # : 2 digitsThe page number of the manifest


Appendix - 412

USER GUIDE



(DESCRIPTION) : 30 charactersThis is the description associated with the code above and is setup and maintained in program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance under type 'AR'.




Appendix 413

HEADER 3 – MANIFEST

SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 3 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC DELIVERY DETAILS CODE 1 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 2 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 3 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 4 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 5 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 6 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

DELIVERY DETAILS



CODE : 4 characters



Appendix - 414

USER GUIDE

HEADER 4 – MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 4 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC DELIVERY DETAILS CODE 7 (CODE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (REFERENCE) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]DELIVERY REFERENCE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]USERNAME (TELLER) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]HEADER COMMENTS - 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] - 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] - 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] - 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] - 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] BATCH REFERENCE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

DELIVERY DETAILS


CODE : 4 characters



DELIVERY REFERENCE : 6 characters Available if using the delivery note option.




Appendix 415

HEADER 5 – MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 5 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC SU31 TYPE (SET IN AR00) LONG DESCRIP: 1 AND 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] 3 AND 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] 5 AND 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]AR30 F7-CODE TYPE (SET IN AR00): CODE 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DESCRIPTION 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT





Appendix - 416

USER GUIDE

HEADER 6 – MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 HEADER 6 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC AR30 F6-NARR CODE (SET IN AR00): CODE 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 1 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 2 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 3 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 4 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 5 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] CODE 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] NARRATIVE 6 [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

The fields above enable you to print codes and descriptions defined in program AR00 - System record Maintenance. Please refer to that section of the manual for more information. In addition there is label information available.




Appendix 417

BODY 1 – MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 BODY 1 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY COL DGT/DEC LABEL # [ ][ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]WEIGHT [ ][ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]WEIGHT UOM [ ][ ] [ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

LABEL # : 4

WEIGHT : 7.3The weight of the accompanying package

WEIGHT UOM : 2 charactersThe unit of measure of the weight.

Appendix - 418

USER GUIDE

TRAILER DETAILS


HEADER 6 – MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 TRAILER 1 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC H/O ACCOUNT NUMBER [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] REFERENCE # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]X-REFERENCE # [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]SALESMAN (NUMBER CODE "RP") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (NAME) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]METHOD OF DELIVERY [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]METHOD OF PAYMENT [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] DELIVERY DATE [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]TAX NUMBER [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]SA#1 (CODE "S1") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]SA#2 (CODE "S2") [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] (DESCRIPTION) [ ][ ] [ ][ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT







Appendix 419









Appendix - 420

USER GUIDE

HEADER 6 – MANIFESTSYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 TRAILER 2 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST T# FN CY LINE COL DGT/DEC TOTAL LABELS [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]TOTAL WEIGHT [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ][ ] IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y] F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

TOTAL LABELS : 3 digitsThe number of labels associated with this manifest.

TOTAL WEIGHT : 7.3The total weight of the packages for this manifest.

Appendix 421

TITLE DETAILS


SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE SU35 11/008 TITLES 1 - SM -SP LABEL MANIFEST FN LINE COL CHARS 1 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]2 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]3 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]4 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]5 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]6 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]7 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]8 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]9 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]10 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]11 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]12 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]13 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]14 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]15 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]16 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]17 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]18 [ ] [ ] [ ][ ][ ]IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N) [Y]F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F5-MORE TEXT, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT

Appendix - 422

USER GUIDE

INDEX

"N" FOR OPTIONS NOT ALLOWED...............................................................................................17, 28, 39% 338, 371 (DESCRIPTION)..................................................................336, 337, 338, 352, 369, 371, 397, 403, 410, 417(NAME)............................................................................................................................. 335, 368, 402, 416(PERCENTAGE %).................................................................................................................................. 336(SETTLEMENT DISCOUNT).................................................................................................................... 336* AMT...................................................................................................................................................... 185+ AMOUNT.............................................................................................................................................. 185+ AMOUNT....................................................................................................................... 171, 174, 175, 1800-QUANTITY............................................................................................................................................ 1855 SUPERVISOR PASSWORD OVERRIDE KEYS.....................................................................................360

A

ACCEPT/INCREMENT PICK LIST #...........................................................................................................35ACCESS.................................................................................................................................................... 19ACCOUNT #.................................................................................................98, 165, 194, 317, 351, 396, 409ACCOUNT BALANCE....................................................................................................................... 340, 373ACKNOWLEDGE FILENAME..................................................................................................................... 38ADD SUNDRY TO AR50 SALES................................................................................................................48ADDING DELIVERY ADDRESSES...........................................................................................................166ADDRESS # 1.......................................................................................................................................... 166ADDRESS # 2.......................................................................................................................................... 166ADDRESS # 3.......................................................................................................................................... 166ADDRESS # 4.......................................................................................................................................... 166ADDRESS (#1)....................................................................................314, 315, 349, 350, 394, 395, 407, 408ADDRESS (#2)....................................................................................314, 315, 349, 350, 394, 395, 407, 408ADDRESS (#3)....................................................................................314, 315, 349, 350, 394, 395, 407, 408ADDRESS (#4)....................................................................................314, 315, 349, 350, 394, 395, 407, 408ADDRESS NUMBER................................................................................................................................ 315AGE PERIOD................................................................................................................................... 103, 197ALL DISCOUNTS..................................................................................................................................... 228ALL INTRANSIT INFO [Y]........................................................................................................................ 148ALL TRANSACTIONS?............................................................................................................................ 189ALLOCATE CURRENT INVOICES?.........................................................................................................272ALLOCATE CURRENT ORDERS.............................................................................................................272ALLOCATE INVOICE HISTORY?.............................................................................................................273ALLOCATE ORDER HISTORY................................................................................................................. 272ALLOCATE STOCK Y/N............................................................................................................................ 27ALLOCATE STOCK? (Y/N)....................................................................................................93, 96, 118, 203ALLOW AUTOMATIC RELEASE................................................................................................................32ALLOW 'O' TO SUPPRESS PRINT?..........................................................................................................22ALLOW ORDERS TO BE DELETED..........................................................................................................30ALLOW PICKED > ORDERED................................................................................................................... 32ALLOW PICKED > PHYSICAL...................................................................................................................32ALLOW RELEASE ALL OPTION................................................................................................................36ALLOW TEMPORARY STOCK ITEMS?.....................................................................................................21ALPHA/NUM............................................................................................................................................ 191ALT. FORM #................................................................................................................................... 103, 198ALTERNATE BIN..................................................................................................................................... 332ALTERNATE BIN 1 -3.............................................................................................................................. 360ALTERNATE CODE................................................................................................................................. 382ALTERNATE FORM................................................................................................................................... 46

Appendix 423

ALTERNATE KEY FROM-TO..................................................................................................................... 86ALTERNATE KEY SET UP....................................................................................................................... 190ALTERNATE SEQ CODE...................................................................................................................84, 206ALTERNATE SEQ DESCRIPTION - PART 1 TO PART 8.........................................................................382ALTERNATE SEQUENCE........................................................................................................................188ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM..........................................................................................................291ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # FROM-TO..............................................................192, 206, 235, 243, 264, 271ALTERNATE SEQUENCE # TO...............................................................................................................291ALTERNATE SEQUENCE CODE........................................................................234, 242, 263, 271, 286, 290ALTERNATE SEQUENCE MAINTENANCE..............................................................................................186ALTERNATE SEQUENCE NUMBER - PART 1 TO PART 8......................................................................382AMENDING DELIVERY ADDRESSES......................................................................................................168AMOUNT................................................................................................................................................. 116AMOUNT TENDERED............................................................................................................................. 373AMOUNT>............................................................................................................................................... 175APPEND ORDER# TO REF# POS.............................................................................................................19APPEND WH TO SALES CATG.................................................................................................................24APPLY ACROSS ALL CO/BR/WH?...........................................................................................................289AR GROUP................................................................................................................................. 50, 100, 195AR GROUP OR CUSTOMER...................................................................................................................258AREA............................................................................................................................................... 167, 351AREA (CODE "AR").................................................................................................................. 318, 397, 410AREA CODE............................................................................................................................................ 384AUTO ALLOCATE SUB-STOCK? (Y/N)......................................................................................................22AUTO OPTION ON B/O UPDATING..........................................................................................................42AUTO OPTION ON EXCEEDED'S............................................................................................17, 27, 36, 39AUTO ORDERING FOR BM COMPONENTS IN SP.................................................................................309AUTO RELEASE BO QTY....................................................................................................................31, 36AUTOMATIC # FOR TEMPORARY STOCK FROM POSITION...................................................................21AUTOMATIC # PREFIX FOR TEMPORARY STOCK..................................................................................22AUTOMATICALLY B/O (Y/N)..................................................................................................................... 70AUTOMATICALLY PRINT.......................................................................................................................... 49AVERAGE PRICE (ONLY AVAILABLE IF GROSS)(AND TOTAL QTY PRINTED.......................................385

BB/O QTY AVAILABLE AS FREE................................................................................................................. 24B/O UPDATE ON ALTERNATE SEQUENCE..............................................................................................41BACK ORDER ALLOWED.......................................................................................................................... 51BACK ORDER DELETE OR AMEND........................................................................................................286BACK ORDER MODULE MENU...............................................................................................................285BACK ORDER RELEASE......................................................................................................................... 294BACK ORDER REPORT..........................................................................................................................290BACK ORDERS TO PURCHASE ORDERS..............................................................................................158BACKUP.................................................................................................................................................... 66BATCH CREDIT NOTE ENTRY................................................................................................................135BATCH INVOICE ENTRY.........................................................................................................................130BATCH INVOICE UPDATE......................................................................................................................160BATCH ORDER UPDATE........................................................................................................................ 157BATCH REFERENCE...........................................................................97, 130, 136, 321, 355, 366, 399, 412BELOW COST PRICE............................................................................................................................... 59BIN.......................................................................................................................................................... 384BIN #................................................................................................................................................ 332, 360BIN LOCATION SEQUENCE....................................................................................................................218BODY........................................................................................................................313, 348, 380, 393, 406BRANCH.................................................................................................................................................. 383BRANCH ORDER ENTRY........................................................................................................................ 145BRANCH ORDER ENTRY PROGRAMS...................................................................................................144BRANCH ORDER RELEASE....................................................................................................................150BRANCH ORDER REVIEW...................................................................................................................... 146BRANCH ORDER TO ORDER................................................................................................................. 152

Index - 424

USER GUIDE

BUYAID............................................................................................................................................ 341, 374

CCALCULATED DISCOUNT %...................................................................................................................341CALCULATED DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE AMOUNT........................................................................325, 358CANCEL BY..................................................................................................................................... 103, 197CANCEL BY DATE.................................................................................................................................. 352CAPTURE TRANSPORT DETAILS.............................................................................................................37CASH............................................................................................................................................... 341, 374CASH ACCOUNT NUMBER....................................................................................................................... 23CASH ANALYSIS?..................................................................................................................................... 23CASH DRAWER - SU01 COMMAND #.......................................................................................................23CASH UP................................................................................................................................................... 75CHANGE.......................................................................................................................................... 340, 373CHANGE TO CUSTOMER OVERALL DISC #............................................................................................58CHANGE TO CUSTOMERS DEFAULT DISC #..........................................................................................57CHANGE TO CUSTOMERS DEFAULT PRICE...........................................................................................57CHANGE TO NUMBERING METHOD........................................................................................................55CHANGE TO SEMI-AUTO DOC.NO...........................................................................................................55CHECK FOR DUPL ORD........................................................................................................................... 26CHECK FOR DUPLICATE CUST ORD.......................................................................................................25CHEQUE.......................................................................................................................................... 341, 374CLEAR DETAILED INVOICE ANALYSIS FILE............................................................................................89CO. REGISTRATION #............................................................................................................................ 318CO. REGISTRATION NO.........................................................................................................................351CO/BR REPORT HEADER (3 LINES).......................................................................................................381CODE..........................................................................................116, 319, 320, 353, 354, 398, 399, 411, 412COLUMN HEADING IN MATRIX..............................................................................................................386COLUMN WIDTH ?................................................................................................................... 344, 377, 389COMMENT.............................................................................................................................................. 288COMMENT (#1) TO (#4)................................................................................................................... 339, 372COMMENT LINES................................................................................................................................... 116COMPANY............................................................................................................................................... 383COMPANY NAME.................................................................................................................................... 332COMPANY NAME (BODY).......................................................................................................................365COMPANY OR BRANCH DETAILS..........................................................................................................258COMPANY/BRANCH.................................................................................................................... 14, 85, 191CONSIDER COMPLETE FOR B/O.............................................................................................................33CONSIGNMENT? (Y/N)............................................................................................................................ 193CONSOLIDATE ORDERS WITH................................................................................................................81CONSOLIDATE SUBSTKS ON SP70.........................................................................................................43CONSOLIDATION (Y/N)....................................................................................................237, 244, 265, 292CONSOLIDATION OF BACK ORDERS......................................................................................................79CONTACT..................................................................................................314, 316, 351, 394, 395, 407, 408CONTACT NAME.................................................................................................................................... 167COPY STANDING ORDER TO ORDER....................................................................................................202COST...................................................................................................................................................... 385COST DISPLAY/ACCEPT.......................................................................................................................... 20COST PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD)........................................................................................................327, 360COST PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE).......................................................................................................327, 360COST VALUE................................................................................................................................... 327, 360CREATE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FILE......................................................................................................38CREATE DELIVERY NOTES.....................................................................................................................32CREATE NARRATIVES FOR LONG DESC................................................................................................26CREATE P/O FOR B/O.............................................................................................................................. 25CREATE SP FOR BM COMPONENTS......................................................................................................26CREATE STANDING ORDERS................................................................................................................193CREATION OF SERIAL NUMBERS...........................................................................................................55CREDIT............................................................................................................................................ 341, 374CREDIT LIMIT EXCEEDED........................................................................................................................ 56

Appendix 425

CREDIT LIMIT/TERMS EXCEEDED REPORT..........................................................................................248CREDIT NOTE # FROM-TO.....................................................................................................................243CREDIT NOTE PRINT............................................................................................................................. 239CREDIT NOTE PRINT FROM HISTORY..................................................................................................275CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE ENTRY.........................................................................................................137CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE....................................................................................................138CREDIT NOTE SUSPENSE RELEASE & PRINT......................................................................................141CROSS REFERENCE.............................................................................................................................. 352CUMULATIVE TO WEEK (IF APPLICABLE).............................................................................................386CURRENCY - CODE........................................................................................................................ 339, 372CURRENCY - RATE......................................................................................................................... 339, 372CURRENCY CODE.........................................................80, 123, 134, 140, 143, 205, 233, 241, 262, 267, 295CURRENCY CODE OPTION.......................................................................134, 140, 143, 233, 240, 262, 267CURRENCY CODE/RATE.......................................................................................................................... 99CURRENT DATE AS ORDER DATE..........................................................................................................30CURRENT TIME....................................................................................................................... 317, 396, 409CUS ORD#....................................................................................................................................... 100, 194CUSTOMER............................................................................................................................................ 177CUSTOMER...................................................................................................................... 170, 179, 182, 184CUSTOMER # FROM-TO........................................................................................................................... 81CUSTOMER CURRENCY CODE......................................................................................................321, 355CUSTOMER GROUP.................................................................................................170, 177, 179, 182, 184CUSTOMER NAME.....................................................................314, 315, 349, 350, 384, 394, 395, 407, 408CUSTOMER NUMBER............................................................................................................................. 384CUSTOMER NUMBER SEQUENCE........................................................................................................214CUSTOMER ORDER #/(INVOICE #).........................................................................................................317CUSTOMER ORDER (BODY).................................................................................................................. 333CUSTOMER ORDER NO..........................................................................................................351, 396, 409CUSTOMER ORDER NO. (BODY)...........................................................................................................366CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER SEQUENCE...........................................................................................215CUSTOMER ORDER PRINT....................................................................................................................260CUSTOMER ORDER REFERENCE.........................................................................................................384CUSTOMER ORDER#............................................................................................................................. 332CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE...................................................................281CUSTOMER RELEASE PICKED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE....................................................................282CUSTOMER/GROUP PRICE LIST...........................................................................................................258

D

DAILY PROCEDURES............................................................................................................................... 68DATE............................................................................................................................................... 288, 352DATE DELIVERY REQD................................................................................................................... 103, 197DEBTORS GROUP (CODE "DG")......................................................................................318, 352, 397, 410DEFAULT BIN LOCATION FOR TEMPORARY STOCK..............................................................................22DEFAULT NORMAL/PROFORMA/HOLD...................................................................................................23DEFAULT QUANTITY TO 1....................................................................................................................... 23DEFAULT RELEASE OPTION................................................................................................................... 31DEFAULT SA #2 AS OPERATOR..............................................................................................................20DEFAULT SA#2 AS USER 1 2 3 4..............................................................................................................21DEFAULT STOCK REF# AS SOFT 3 4 5....................................................................................................24DEFAULT WH# AS REFERENCE#.............................................................................................................24DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE IV.............................................................................................................311DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE OA............................................................................................................378DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE SL.............................................................................................................391DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE SM............................................................................................................404DEFINITION OF FORM TYPE SP............................................................................................................346DEL REF................................................................................................................................................. 103DELETE EXPIRED TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS................................................................................87DELETE HISTORY BEFORE..................................................................................................................... 76DELETE OLD SEQUENCE?.....................................................................................................................273DELETE ORIGINAL ORDER......................................................................................................................40

Index - 426

USER GUIDE

DELETING DELIVERY ADDRESSES.......................................................................................................168DELETION OF ORDER HISTORY.............................................................................................................82DELETION OF ORDERS........................................................................................................................... 83DELETION OF STANDING ORDERS.......................................................................................................207DELIMITED BY.................................................................................................................................... 38, 45DELIVERED (UNIT OF HOLD)..........................................................................................................324, 357DELIVERED (UNIT OF ISSUE)..................................................................................................324, 357, 358DELIVERY ADDRESS #............................................................................................................102, 165, 197DELIVERY ADDRESS CHANGES CLEARDOWN.......................................................................................88DELIVERY ADDRESS CHANGES PRINT.................................................................................................283DELIVERY ADDRESS MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................165DELIVERY ADDRESS NUMBER..............................................................................................................384DELIVERY ADDRESS PRINT..................................................................................................................254DELIVERY ADDRESS SCAN............................................................................................................212, 220DELIVERY DATE...............................................................................................336, 365, 368, 384, 403, 417DELIVERY DATE (BODY)........................................................................................................................ 333DELIVERY DATE SEQUENCE................................................................................................................. 216DELIVERY DETAILS CODES #1 - #7.......................................................................................................167DELIVERY METHOD.........................................................................................................103, 197, 238, 245DELIVERY NOTE............................................................................................................................. 332, 354DELIVERY NOTE DATE.......................................................................................................................... 332DELIVERY REFERENCE..........................................................................................................320, 399, 412DEMAND CREDIT NOTE......................................................................................................................... 139DEMAND INVOICE ENTRY...................................................................................................................... 132DEMAND ORDER INPUT......................................................................................................................... 142DEMAND ORDER RELEASE...................................................................................................................266DESCRIPTION 172, 174, 176, 178, 181, 188, 312, 318, 319, 320, 347, 353, 354, 379, 392, 398, 399, 405, 411,

412DESCRIPTION TYPE............................................................................................................................... 190DETAILS OK?............................................................................................................................................ 89DIS. BY GROUP OR CATEGORY..............................................................................................................18DISC #..................................................................................................................................................... 177DISC %......................................................................................................................171, 174, 175, 177, 180DISCOUNT #.................................................................................................................................... 102, 196DISCOUNT 1 & 2..................................................................................................................................... 366DISCOUNT CODE.................................................................................................................... 167, 171, 180DISCOUNT TYPE..................................................................................................................... 169, 221, 256DISCOUNT/PRICE CHANGES PRINT......................................................................................................284DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX..................................................................................................................... 169DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX PRINT..........................................................................................................256DISCOUNT/PRICE MATRIX SCAN..........................................................................................................221DISCOUNT/SUR %.................................................................................................................................. 108DISCOUNT/SUR AMT.............................................................................................................................. 109DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE %............................................................................................................325, 358DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE (CODE "DS)............................................................................................325, 358DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE (DESCRIPTION).....................................................................................325, 358DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE AMOUNT................................................................................................325, 358DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE........................................................................................................331DOCUMENT #......................................................................................................................................... 317DOCUMENT # FROM-TO.......................................................................................................................... 86DOCUMENTS.......................................................................................................................................... 236DRIVER NAME........................................................................................................................................ 150DUPLICATE REQUIRED.................................................................................................................... 79, 294DUPLICATE REQUIRED?....................................................122, 134, 139, 142, 204, 232, 239, 260, 266, 281

E

EMAIL ORDERS (Y/N/C)............................................................................................................................ 44EMAIL SP70 INVOICES............................................................................................................................. 44END OF BODY..........................................................................................................313, 348, 379, 392, 405ENDING THE ORDER............................................................................................................................. 117

Appendix 427

ENQUIRY MODULE MENU...................................................................................................................... 208ENTER CODES PER COLUMN FOR PART X..........................................................................................390ENTER CUSTOMER ORD.........................................................................................................................33ENTER FILE FOR ALTERNATE SEQUENCES........................................................................................187ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE.............................................................................................157, 159, 161ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE FROM.................................................................................................162ENTER NAME OF ERRORS FILE TO.......................................................................................................162ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE.................................................................................................157, 159, 161ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE FROM......................................................................................................162ENTER NAME OF INPUT FILE TO...........................................................................................................162ENTER NARRATIVE (Y/N/M).....................................................................................................................33ENTER PRICE........................................................................................................................................... 33ENTER SALESMAN................................................................................................................................... 34ENTER WH PER LINE ITEM...................................................................................................................... 26ENTRY MODE........................................................................................................................................... 73ERRORS FILE......................................................................................................................................... 161EXCEEDING MINIMUM QTY ORDER ONLY?..........................................................................................158EXCLUSIVE DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE............................................................................324, 357EXCLUSIVE NET (AFTER DISC/SURCHARGE)...............................................................................325, 358EXCLUSIVE NET (AFTER OVERALL DISC).............................................................................................333EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (AFTER OVERALL DISC)..................................................................................334EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (EXCL OVERALL DISC)....................................................................................364EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (EXCL OVERALL DISCOUNT)...........................................................................326EXCLUSIVE NET + TAX (INCL OVERALL DISC)...............................................................................326, 364EXCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD)................................................................................324, 357EXCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE)...............................................................................324, 357EXPAND A BILL Y/N.................................................................................................................................. 27EXPIRY DATE........................................................................................................................................... 87EXPORT TARIFF............................................................................................................................. 323, 364EXT. DESC. IN SCAN................................................................................................................................ 18EXTEND BO LINES................................................................................................................................... 33EXTENDED DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................................330, 361

F

F6 CODE................................................................................................................................................. 322F6 NARRATIVE....................................................................................................................................... 322F7 CODE................................................................................................................... 321, 400, 401, 413, 414F7 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................321, 400, 401, 413, 414FINANCIALS.............................................................................................................................................. 65FLAT FILE TAKE-ON FOR SP32..............................................................................................................159FOR WAREHOUSES................................................................................................................................. 72FORM LENGTH (Lines)..............................................................................................312, 347, 379, 392, 405FORM TYPE............................................................................................................................................ 270FORM WIDTH (Columns)...........................................................................................313, 348, 379, 392, 405FREE FORMAT EXTENDED SIZE DESCRIPTION...................................................................................328FREE OR PHYSICAL STOCK EXCEEDED................................................................................................59FROM - TO #........................................................................................................................................... 121FROM A/C #............................................................................................................................................ 254FROM BATCH # TO BATCH #.................................................................................................................. 149FROM BR/WH TO BR/WH........................................................................................................................149FROM ORDER.......................................................................................................................................... 69FROM/TO DATE.............................................................................................................................. 180, 183

GGENERATE CHECK DIGIT...................................................................................................................... 161GP %....................................................................................................................................................... 360GP%........................................................................................................................................................ 373GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX EXCL OVERALL DISC).........................................................................338, 371GRAND TOTAL (WITH TAX INCL OVERALL DISC)..........................................................................338, 370GROSS............................................................................................................................................ 331, 387

Index - 428

USER GUIDE

GROSS (BEFORE DISC/SURCHARGE)...........................................................................................324, 358GROSS (QTY X PRICE)........................................................................................................................... 385GROSS SALES EXCLUDING SUNDRIES AND TAX................................................................................320GROUP CODE........................................................................................................................................ 384

H

H/O ACCOUNT NUMBER..................................................................................................335, 368, 402, 416HEADER....................................................................................................................313, 348, 380, 393, 406HEADER COMMENTS............................................................................................................................. 320HEADER COMMENTS 1 to 5.....................................................................................................354, 399, 412HEADER OK?.................................................................................................................................. 104, 198HIERARCHY OF OPTIONS FOR ALTERNATE SEQUENCE....................................................................189HORIZONTAL TOTAL IF MATRIX PRINT..........................................................................................330, 362HORIZONTAL TOTAL OF COLUMNS IN MATRIX....................................................................................386

IIBT ACC#.................................................................................................................................................. 23INCLUDE ACCOUNT ADDRESS..............................................................................................................254INCLUDE LINE.......................................................................................................................................... 38INCLUDE ZERO PHYSICAL STOCK........................................................................................................121INCLUSIVE DISCOUNTED/SURCHARGE PRICE....................................................................................364INCLUSIVE GROSS................................................................................................................................. 364INCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF HOLD).................................................................................331, 364INCLUSIVE SELLING PRICE (UNIT OF ISSUE)................................................................................331, 364INPUT MODULE MENU............................................................................................................................. 90INPUT PICKED DETAILS.........................................................................................................................122INTER-BRANCH STOCK BALANCING.....................................................................................................154INTRANS#............................................................................................................................................... 153INV OR CRN? (I/C)........................................................................................................................... 161, 162INV OR DEL DATE ON IV/AR TRS.............................................................................................................19INVENTORY MESSAGE OPTIONS (SU33/IV30)........................................................................................51INVOICE #................................................................................................................................ 386, 396, 409INVOICE CURRENCY CODE...................................................................................................................321INVOICE CURRENCY RATE................................................................................................................... 321INVOICE DATE................................................................................................................. 317, 386, 396, 409INVOICE ENQUIRY................................................................................................................................. 229INVOICE FORM TYPE..............................................................................................................122, 132, 139INVOICE HISTORY TRANSACTION DELETION........................................................................................84INVOICE MAINTENANCE........................................................................................................................ 164INVOICE NUMBER.................................................................................................................................. 332INVOICE NUMBERING (M/A/S/W).............................................................................................................18INVOICE PRINT....................................................................................................................................... 231INVOICE PRINT FROM HISTORY...........................................................................................................274ITEM ORDERED...................................................................................................................................... 384ITEMS PER ORDER?.........................................................................................................................81, 295

JJ INVOICES?................................................................................................................................... 238, 245JOB #................................................................................................................................ 318, 351, 396, 409

K

KEEP PRICE OVERRIDES........................................................................................................................ 35KEEP SP10 COST PRICE..........................................................................................................................36

LLABEL #........................................................................................................................................... 401, 415LABEL AND MANIFEST........................................................................................................................... 276LENGTH.................................................................................................................................................. 190LINE NUMBER......................................................................................................................................... 287LINE NUMBER INCREMENT..................................................................................................................... 16

Appendix 429

LONG DESCRIPTION 1- 6....................................................................................................................... 367

MMAINTENANCE MODULE MENU............................................................................................................163MANY LINES IN BODY? (Y/N/C)...............................................................................................343, 376, 388MASS............................................................................................................................................... 327, 359MASS X UNIT VOLUME................................................................................................................... 327, 360MATRIX COLUMN VALIDATION.......................................................................................................344, 377MEMO DISC% - CUMULATIVE LESS TIME.............................................................................................364MEMO DISC% - QUANTITY.............................................................................................................334, 363MEMO DISC% - TIME DEPENDENT................................................................................................334, 364MEMO WINDOW - SP33 SEQ...................................................................................................................33METHOD OF DELIVERY...................................................................................................336, 368, 403, 417METHOD OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................336, 368, 403, 417MINIMUM STOCK EXCEEDED.................................................................................................................. 59MONTH-END DATE................................................................................................................................... 72MONTH-END- PROCEDURES................................................................................................................... 68MOTIVE................................................................................................................................................... 194

NN/STK DESC TO PART # IN 'SA'...............................................................................................................47NAME...................................................................................................................................................... 166NARRATIVE............................................................................................................................... 55, 113, 166NARRATIVE (#1)...............................................................................................................316, 350, 395, 408NARRATIVE COPY PROGRAM...............................................................................................................289NET......................................................................................................................................................... 387NET (QTY X PRICE - DISCOUNT............................................................................................................386NET VALUE TOTAL.......................................................................................................................... 337, 370NET VALUE TOTAL (INCL OF OVERALL DISC)......................................................................................340NEXT COLUMN ON CHANGE OF............................................................................................344, 377, 389NEXT HEADING ON CHANGE OF............................................................................................343, 376, 388NEXT HORZ. LINE ON CHANGE OF........................................................................................343, 376, 388NO. OF OVERALL DISCOUNTS................................................................................................................17NO. OF STD. PRICES............................................................................................................................... 16NON-STANDARD DISCOUNT................................................................................................................... 58NON-STANDARD DISCOUNT/PRICE REPORT.......................................................................................246NON-STANDARD PRICE........................................................................................................................... 58NON-STOCK............................................................................................................................................. 55NON-STOCK ITEM.................................................................................................................................. 114NUMBER "RP")....................................................................................................................................... 368NUMBERING (M/A/S)................................................................................................................. 97, 130, 136

OON ACCOUNT................................................................................................................................. 341, 374ON B/ORDER.......................................................................................................................................... 386ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF HOLD).................................................................................................324, 357ON BACK ORDER (UNIT OF ISSUE)................................................................................................324, 357ON HAND......................................................................................................................................... 386, 387OPERATION #................................................................................................................................. 327, 361OPTION................................................................................................................................................... 108ORD#...................................................................................................................................................... 100ORDER #................................................................94, 119, 124, 127, 152, 200, 201, 202, 268, 318, 397, 410ORDER # FROM-TO.............................................................................................................82, 83, 206, 264ORDER ANALYSIS.......................................................................................................................... 270, 300ORDER ANALYSIS REPORT................................................................................................................... 301ORDER ANALYSIS? (Y/N).........................................................................................................................26ORDER AVAILABILITY/MESSAGE SYSTEM...........................................................................................298ORDER CURRENCY CODE.............................................................................................................355, 401ORDER DATE.................................................................................................................................. 352, 384ORDER DETAIL LINE ENTRY..................................................................................................................105

Index - 430

USER GUIDE

ORDER ENQUIRY................................................................................................................................... 209ORDER ENQUIRY - HISTORY.................................................................................................................211ORDER ENTRY......................................................................................................................................... 95ORDER FORM TYPE..................................................................................................79, 142, 204, 260, 294ORDER FROM-TO................................................................................................................................... 207ORDER LINE DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................... 383ORDER LINE NUMBER........................................................................................................................... 383ORDER LINE TYPE................................................................................................................................. 383ORDER NO............................................................................................................................................. 345ORDER NO...................................................................................................................................... 332, 351ORDER NUMBER............................................................................................................................ 287, 383ORDER NUMBER (BODY........................................................................................................................365ORDER NUMBER SEQUENCE................................................................................................................213ORDER NUMBERING (M/A/S)...................................................................................................................18ORDER RELEASE................................................................................................................................... 127ORDER REVIEW..................................................................................................................................... 118ORDER TEMP STOCK ITEMS ONLY.........................................................................................................40ORDER, INVOICE AND CREDIT NOTE JUMP TABLE.........................................................................52, 53ORDERED (UNIT OF HOLD)............................................................................................................323, 357ORDERED (UNIT OF ISSUE)...........................................................................................................323, 356ORDERED QUANTITY............................................................................................................................. 385ORDERS SCAN....................................................................................................................................... 213OTHER............................................................................................................................................ 341, 374OTHER TEXT FIELDS............................................................................................................................. 345OUTPUT TO FLATFILE.............................................................................................................................. 49OUTSTANDING (UNIT OF HOLD)............................................................................................................356OUTSTANDING (UNIT OF ISSUE)...........................................................................................................356OUTSTANDING ORDERS REPORT........................................................................................................250OVERALL %..................................................................................................................................... 102, 196OVERALL DISC%.................................................................................................................................... 333OVERALL DISCOUNT..............................................................................................................177, 337, 370OVERALL DISCOUNT (CODE "DS").................................................................................................338, 371OVERALL DISCOUNT INCLUSIVE OF TAX..............................................................................................340OVERALL DISCOUNTS........................................................................................................................... 225OVERRIDE B/O QTY (BACK ORDER).......................................................................................................32OVERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N)..................................................................................................344, 377, 389

P

PACK SIZE...................................................................................................................................... 327, 359PACKAGE ID................................................................................................................................... 124, 354PAGE #............................................................................................................................................ 318, 409PAGE BREAK ON HEADING? (Y/N)........................................................................................................389PAGE NO................................................................................................................................................ 352PAGE SKIP (Y/N)..............................................................................................................237, 244, 265, 292PART # FROM - TO................................................................................................................................. 289PART 1 TO 8........................................................................................................................................... 189PASS B/O LINES TO SP70........................................................................................................................36PAYABLE OVER [ ] MTHS.......................................................................................................................100PAYMENT METHOD........................................................................................................................ 103, 197PERIOD-END MODULE............................................................................................................................. 67PERIOD-END SEQUENCE........................................................................................................................ 68PHYSICAL STOCK QTY..........................................................................................................................361PICKING LIST PRINT.............................................................................................................................. 120PICKING NOTE/ORDER CONF..................................................................................................................43PICKING SLIP NO................................................................................................................................... 352POINT-OF SALE...................................................................................................................................... 307POST CODE................................................................................166, 314, 315, 349, 350, 394, 395, 407, 408PRICE...................................................................................................................................... 108, 183, 385PRICE #........................................................................................................................................... 101, 196PRICE # FOR RELEASE............................................................................................................................ 35

Appendix 431

PRICE MATRIX................................................................................................................................ 182, 227PRINT "J" INVOICES................................................................................................................................. 43PRINT AUDIT............................................................................................................................................ 69PRINT AVERAGE COST? (Y/N)................................................................................................................. 30PRINT DISCOUNT CALC......................................................................................................................... 259PRINT EXTENDED DESC........................................................................................................................251PRINT IN TRANSIT INFO........................................................................................................................ 148PRINT INVOICE & MSG............................................................................................................................. 51PRINT LONG DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................................258PRINT MODULE MENU........................................................................................................................... 230PRINT ONLY?........................................................................................................................................... 75PRINT PHYSICAL?.................................................................................................................................... 30PRINT RETAIL PRICE............................................................................................................................. 259PRINT TEST REQUIRED........................................................................................................................... 79PRINT TEST REQUIRED?....................................122, 134, 139, 142, 204, 232, 240, 261, 266, 270, 281, 294PROCESSING & BACKUP CYCLES..........................................................................................................66PRODUCT..........................................................................................105, 173, 175, 180, 182, 185, 330, 361PRODUCT CODE.................................................................................................................................... 171PRODUCT CODE - PART 1 TO 3.....................................................................................................329, 361PRODUCT GROUP.................................................................................................................................... 50PRODUCT GROUP OR PRODUCT.........................................................................................................258PRODUCT GROUP/CATEGORY CODES................................................................................................171PRODUCT GROUP/SALES CATEGORY...........................................................................173, 175, 179, 185PRODUCT JUMP TABLES........................................................................................................................61PRODUCT MESSAGE - CODE (IV30)...............................................................................................329, 363PRODUCT MESSAGE - DESCRIPTION............................................................................................329, 363PRODUCT PART 1 TO 3.................................................................................................................. 330, 362PRODUCT QUANTITY DISCOUNT..........................................................................................................173PRODUCT SALES CATEGORY...............................................................................................................363PRODUCT SALES CATEGORY DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................363PRODUCT SEQUENCE........................................................................................................................... 217PRODUCT/CUSTOMER DISCOUNT................................................................................................170, 222PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER................................................................................................................366

QQTY ON B/ORDER.................................................................................................................................. 387QTY ORDERED....................................................................................................................................... 387QTY SUPPLIED....................................................................................................................................... 387QTY X UNIT VOLUME...................................................................................................................... 327, 360QUANTITY............................................................................................................................................... 288QUANTITY DISCOUNT............................................................................................................................ 223QUANTITY ORDERED............................................................................................................................ 107QUANTITY PRICING............................................................................................................................... 184QUANTITY>............................................................................................................................................ 174QUERY STOP/DEL ACCS (Y/N/W)............................................................................................................47QUERY STOPPED ACCOUNT..................................................................................................................37

RRANGE OF SIZES............................................................................................................................ 330, 362RANGE SELECTION FROM-TO..............................................................................................................250RATE............................................................................................................................................... 355, 401RECALC PRO-RATA SUNDRIES...............................................................................................................36RECEIVE INTER BRANCH TRANSFERS.................................................................................................153RECEIVED STATUS................................................................................................................................ 149REF........................................................................................................................... 172, 174, 176, 178, 181REF #............................................................................................................................................... 100, 194REFERENCE................................................................166, 319, 320, 353, 354, 368, 384, 398, 399, 411, 412REFERENCE #......................................................................................................................... 335, 402, 416REFERENCES SOFT TERM (3 – 5) (SU30 'SP).......................................................................................333REFERNCES – SOFT TERM 3 – (SU30 SP)............................................................................................367

Index - 432

USER GUIDE

RELEASE ALL B/ORDERS?.................................................................................................................... 296RELEASE ALL ORDERS?.........................................................................................................128, 201, 269RELEASE B/O IF EXIST............................................................................................................................ 51RELEASE 'BLANK' SUBSTK #'S................................................................................................................. 49RELEASE DELIVERED QTY AND PRINT INVOICE.................................................................................280RELEASE DELIVERED QUANTITIES TO INVOICE..................................................................................279RELEASE NARRATIVE LINES...........................................................................................................31, 126RELEASE PICKED QUANTITY AND PRINT DELIVERY NOTE................................................................278RELEASE STANDING ORDERS..............................................................................................................200REPORT FORMAT........................................................................................................................... 246, 248REPORT NAME....................................................................................................................................... 381REPORT SEQUENCE...................................................................................................................... 120, 250REPRESENTATIVE CODE......................................................................................................................386REPRINT OF INVOICES............................................................................................................................ 55RESERVING STOCK................................................................................................................................. 55RETAIN PAYMENT METHOD ON B/0........................................................................................................28RETAIN PRICE HISTORY.......................................................................................................................... 35REVERSE A TRANSFER OUT.................................................................................................................147REVERSE DATE....................................................................................................................................... 43REVIEW STANDING ORDERS................................................................................................................199ROUNDING AMOUNT............................................................................................................................. 341ROUTE.................................................................................................................................................... 167ROUTE (CODE "RC")........................................................................................................315, 350, 395, 408ROUTE (DESCRIPTION)...................................................................................................315, 350, 395, 408ROUTE CODE................................................................................................................................. 102, 196

SS.A. CODE 1.................................................................................................................................... 101, 195S.A. CODE 2.................................................................................................................................... 101, 195SA#1 (CODE "S1")............................................................................................................336, 369, 403, 417SA#2......................................................................................................................................................... 50SA#2 (CODE "S2")............................................................................................................336, 369, 403, 417SALES CATEGORY................................................................................................................................. 332SALES CATG............................................................................................................................................ 50SALES ORDER PROCESSING.................................................................................................................... 3SALES TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT.................................................................................370SALES TAX INCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT..................................................................................370SALES TAX NUMBER............................................................................................................................. 369SALESMAN.............................................................................................................................. 100, 167, 195SALESMAN (NUMBER CODE "RP")..........................................................................................335, 402, 416SCAN FROM BIN LOCATION SEQUENCE..............................................................................................218SCAN FROM CUSTOMER #....................................................................................................................220SCAN FROM CUSTOMER # SEQUENCE................................................................................................214SCAN FROM CUSTOMER ORDER # SEQUENCE...................................................................................215SCAN FROM DELIVERY DATE SEQUENCE...........................................................................................216SCAN FROM ORDER # SEQUENCE.......................................................................................................213SCAN FROM PRODUCT SEQUENCE.....................................................................................................217SELECT CURRENCY TO BE USED...............................80, 123, 134, 140, 143, 205, 233, 240, 262, 267, 295SELECTIVE SP69 RELEASE..................................................................................................................... 41SETTING UP THE SYSTEM......................................................................................................................10SHOW NET AMOUNT............................................................................................................................... 33SP00......................................................................................................................................................... 14SP01......................................................................................................................................................... 65SP09......................................................................................................................................................... 93SP10......................................................................................................................................................... 95SP10/15/16/17/18 VALIDATION - ALLOW BLANK CODES.........................................................................50SP10/30 REFERENCES............................................................................................................................ 29SP11........................................................................................................................................................ 118SP11 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 30SP12........................................................................................................................................................ 120

Appendix 433

SP12 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 30SP13........................................................................................................................................................ 122SP13 ADDITIONAL FORM......................................................................................................................... 44SP13 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 31SP14........................................................................................................................................................ 127SP15........................................................................................................................................................ 130SP15 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 27SP16........................................................................................................................................................ 132SP16 DEFAULT FORM.............................................................................................................................. 44SP17........................................................................................................................................................ 135SP171...................................................................................................................................................... 137SP171 DEFAULT FORM............................................................................................................................ 44SP172...................................................................................................................................................... 138SP18........................................................................................................................................................ 139SP18 DEFAULT FORM.............................................................................................................................. 44SP182...................................................................................................................................................... 141SP19........................................................................................................................................................ 142SP19 DEFAULT FORM.............................................................................................................................. 44SP20........................................................................................................................................................ 145SP20 - PROTECT COST........................................................................................................................... 20SP21........................................................................................................................................................ 146SP22........................................................................................................................................................ 147SP23........................................................................................................................................................ 148SP24........................................................................................................................................................ 150SP25........................................................................................................................................................ 152SP26........................................................................................................................................................ 153SP27........................................................................................................................................................ 154SP28........................................................................................................................................................ 156SP30........................................................................................................................................................ 164SP31........................................................................................................................................................ 165SP32........................................................................................................................................................ 169SP33........................................................................................................................................................ 186SP34........................................................................................................................................................ 193SP35........................................................................................................................................................ 199SP36........................................................................................................................................................ 200SP37........................................................................................................................................................ 202SP38........................................................................................................................................................ 204SP39........................................................................................................................................................ 207SP40........................................................................................................................................................ 157SP40 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 39SP41........................................................................................................................................................ 158SP41 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 40SP42........................................................................................................................................................ 159SP45........................................................................................................................................................ 160SP50........................................................................................................................................................ 209SP501...................................................................................................................................................... 211SP51........................................................................................................................................................ 212SP52........................................................................................................................................................ 213SP53........................................................................................................................................................ 220SP56........................................................................................................................................................ 221SP57........................................................................................................................................................ 229SP6 VARIABLES....................................................................................................................................... 41SP61........................................................................................................................................................ 286SP62........................................................................................................................................................ 289SP67........................................................................................................................................................ 290SP69........................................................................................................................................................ 294SP70........................................................................................................................................................ 231SP70 COPY TERMINOLOGY....................................................................................................................44SP71........................................................................................................................................................ 239SP72........................................................................................................................................................ 246

Index - 434

USER GUIDE

SP73........................................................................................................................................................ 248SP74........................................................................................................................................................ 250SP741...................................................................................................................................................... 253SP75........................................................................................................................................................ 254SP76........................................................................................................................................................ 256SP761...................................................................................................................................................... 258SP77........................................................................................................................................................ 260SP77 LONG DESC IN BLOCKS................................................................................................................. 45SP78........................................................................................................................................................ 266SP78 DEFAULT FORM.............................................................................................................................. 44SP78 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 46SP79........................................................................................................................................................ 270SP80........................................................................................................................................................ 274SP81........................................................................................................................................................ 275SP82........................................................................................................................................................ 276SP83........................................................................................................................................................ 278SP84........................................................................................................................................................ 279SP85.................................................................................................................................................. 95, 280SP86........................................................................................................................................................ 281SP87........................................................................................................................................................ 282SP88........................................................................................................................................................ 283SP89........................................................................................................................................................ 284SP90......................................................................................................................................................... 69SP91......................................................................................................................................................... 71SP91 BY SELECTED WAREHOUSES.......................................................................................................48SP91 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 47SP92......................................................................................................................................................... 75SP92 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 49SP93......................................................................................................................................................... 79SP93 VARIABLES..................................................................................................................................... 49SP94......................................................................................................................................................... 82SP95......................................................................................................................................................... 83SP96......................................................................................................................................................... 84SP97......................................................................................................................................................... 87SP98......................................................................................................................................................... 88SP99......................................................................................................................................................... 89STANDING ORDER PRINT......................................................................................................................204START OF BODY......................................................................................................313, 348, 379, 392, 405START POSITION................................................................................................................................... 190STD#....................................................................................................................................................... 194STOCK FROM POSITION.......................................................................................................................... 21STOCK OR CUSTOMER TAX CATG..........................................................................................................20STOCK SALES BASED ON GROSS OR NET............................................................................................22STOCK UPDATED Y/N............................................................................................................................ 323SU31 TYPE...............................................................................................................321, 400, 401, 413, 414SU41 TYPE FOR....................................................................................................................................... 26SUB TOT (NET + LINE DISCOUNT + EXCL TAX)....................................................................................337SUB TOT (NET + LINE DISCOUNT + INCL TAX).....................................................................................370SUB TOTAL (NET + DISCOUNT + INCL TAX)..........................................................................................337SUB TOTAL (NET + DISCOUNTS + INCL TAX).......................................................................................370SUB-PRODUCT PART 1 TO 3..........................................................................................................330, 362SUB-STOCK/SERIAL # - PART 1 TO 3.............................................................................................329, 361SUBTOTAL - NET VALUE TOTAL + SUNDRY TOT...........................................................................340, 372SUMMARY TOTALS ONLY?....................................................................................................................273SUNDRIES TOTAL.................................................................................................................................. 370SUNDRIES TOTAL EXCLUSIVE OF TAX.................................................................................................338SUNDRIES TOTAL INCLUSIVE OF TAX..................................................................................................338SUNDRY CHARGES................................................................................................................................ 116SUNDRY DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................................... 367SUPERSESSIONS................................................................................................................................... 303

Appendix 435

SUPERVISOR ORDER REVIEW................................................................................................................93SUPERVISOR PASSWORDS ON..............................................................................................................54SUPPLIED............................................................................................................................................... 386SUPPLY FREE STOCK?................................................................................................................. 17, 28, 39SUPPLY IF AVAILABLE............................................................................................................................. 51SUPPRESS PRINT OF ZERO LINES.........................................................................................................37SYSTEM PARAMETER MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................14

TTALLY PRINTOUT (MAX 50 CHAR)...........................................................................................................49TAX......................................................................................................................................................... 109TAX #............................................................................................................................................... 101, 195TAX %.............................................................................................................................................. 331, 364TAX (AFTER OVERALL DISC)................................................................................................................. 333TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT.....................................................................................326, 364TAX EXCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT............................................................................................337TAX INCLUSIVE OF OVERALL DISCOUNT..............................................................................326, 337, 364TAX NUMBER.......................................................................................................................... 336, 403, 417TAX ON OVERALL DISCOUNT........................................................................................................337, 370TAX RATE............................................................................................................................................... 116TAX RATE #..................................................................................................................................... 101, 195TEMPORARY STOCK............................................................................................................................. 113TERMS............................................................................................................................................ 102, 196TERMS (CODE "DT")....................................................................................................................... 336, 369TERMS EXCEEDED.................................................................................................................................. 56TIME........................................................................................................................................................ 352TIME DEPENDENT DISCOUNTS.....................................................................................................179, 226TITAN SYSTEM PROFILE........................................................................................................................... 2TITLES.................................................................................................................................................... 345TO A/C #.................................................................................................................................................. 254TO ORDER................................................................................................................................................ 69TOTAL - AMOUNT TENDERED...............................................................................................................340TOTAL CALCULATED DISC/SURCHARGE AMT......................................................................................337TOTAL CALCULATED DISCOUNT/SURCHARGE....................................................................................369TOTAL COST................................................................................................................................... 338, 371TOTAL EXCLUSIVE GROSS (BEFORE DISC/SUR..................................................................................340TOTAL INCLUSIVE NET (NET + TAX).....................................................................................................338TOTAL LABELS....................................................................................................................................... 418TOTAL MASS................................................................................................................................... 338, 371TOTAL MASS X UNIT VOLUME.......................................................................................................339, 371TOTAL QTY..................................................................................................................................... 338, 371TOTAL QTY INVOICED........................................................................................................................... 365TOTAL QTY X UNIT VOLUME..........................................................................................................338, 371TOTAL QUANTITY........................................................................................................................... 354, 385TOTAL QUANTITY DELIVERED..............................................................................................................365TOTAL VALUE......................................................................................................................................... 354TOTAL WEIGHT...................................................................................................................................... 418TOTALS SINCE LAST SP91 AND SP92.....................................................................................................64TRAILER................................................................................................................... 313, 348, 380, 393, 406TRANSACTION TYPE.............................................................................................................................. 191TRANSACTION TYPES............................................................................................................................. 85TRANSFER TO - WH - BR.......................................................................................................................352TRANSPORT COMPANY......................................................................................................................... 150TRANSPORT NUMBER........................................................................................................................... 150TRANSPORT TYPE................................................................................................................................. 150

U

UNDERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N)...............................................................................................344, 377, 389UNIT DIS/SUR PRICE ( / VOLUME)..........................................................................................................331UNIT MASS...................................................................................................................................... 327, 360

Index - 436

USER GUIDE

UNIT OF MASS................................................................................................................................ 327, 359UNIT OF MEASURE (HOLD)............................................................................................................328, 359UNIT OF MEASURE (ISSUE)...........................................................................................................328, 359UNIT OF VOLUME................................................................................................................................... 365UNIT VOLUME................................................................................................................................. 332, 365UNPRINTED FORMS ONLY?...........................................................................................................238, 245UNRELEASED CREDIT NOTE REPORT.................................................................................................253UOM CONVERSION - FACTOR.......................................................................................................328, 359UPD.INV/REF.......................................................................................................................................... 135UPDATE ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE & SALES ANALYSIS........................................................................71UPDATE BR TRANSFERS........................................................................................................................70UPDATE FIELDS..................................................................................................................................... 289UPDATE ONLY PRINTED INVOICES........................................................................................................47UPDATE ORDERS WITH SUPERSESSIONS.............................................................................................69UPDATE PRICES...................................................................................................................................... 69UPDATE TYPE.......................................................................................................................................... 69UPDATE? (Y/N)................................................................................................................. 344, 377, 389, 390USE AR30 ‘AR’ FOR SA............................................................................................................................ 48USE BACK-ORDER SUB-SYSTEM............................................................................................................41USE CURRENT DATE AS ORDER DATE IN SP11....................................................................................27USE FROM AND TO FILENAMES..............................................................................................................40USE IV30 ‘PG’ FOR SA.............................................................................................................................. 48USE ORDER # AS INVOICE #................................................................................................................... 19USE WH# AS DEL ADD# PREFIX..............................................................................................................24USER NAME............................................................................................................................................ 332USER NAME (TELLER).............................................................................................................354, 399, 412USER NAME AS DEFAULT TEMP STK INT-CODE....................................................................................22USER PERMISSION LEVELS....................................................................................................................60USERNAME (TELLER)............................................................................................................................. 320USERNAME TO HOLD LATEST USER......................................................................................................30USING SP33 ALT. SEQUENCE................................................................................................................. 38

VVALIDATE FIRST..................................................................................................................................... 161VALUE DISCOUNT.......................................................................................................................... 175, 224VALUE FIELDS........................................................................................................................................ 345VENDOR................................................................................................................................................. 366VENDOR STOCK CODE..........................................................................................................................366VENDOR STOCK DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................366VERTICAL COLM TOTALS? (Y/N).............................................................................................344, 377, 389

WWAREHOUSE......................................................................................................................................... 384WAREHOUSE #.................................................................................................148, 154, 317, 351, 396, 409WAREHOUSE # (BODY)..........................................................................................................................334WAREHOUSE (BODY)............................................................................................................................ 365WEEK #........................................................................................................................................ 93, 96, 118WEIGHT........................................................................................................................................... 401, 415WEIGHT UOM.................................................................................................................................. 401, 415WH.......................................................................................................................................................... 105WITH PRINT?................................................................................................................... 157, 159, 161, 162WRITE TO HISTORY (INVHIST)................................................................................................................48WRITE TO HISTORY (SPHANAL)..............................................................................................................49

XXREF....................................................................................................................................................... 135X-REFERENCE #...................................................................................................................... 335, 402, 416

Z

ZERO PRICES ONLY............................................................................................................................................... 69

Appendix 437

Index - 438

Address this reply to your Dealer

YOUR COMMENTS PLEASE(On a copy of this page)

Information from our users is important to the ongoing improvement of this product. Please take the time to tell us what enhancements would be of benefit to yourselves and they will be carefully reviewed, and if applicable, incorporated in future releases.

Program Number

Details

Company

Address

Contact

· web viewcopyright reserve. the copyright in this manual vests exclusively with the titan...

Documents